GreengateCommissioningTrainingManual1 18 2010 PDF

System Commissioning Training
January 4th, 2010

Cooper Controls
Company confidential
Contents
Chapter 1 Overview
1-1
Course Goals...........................................................................................................................1-1
Commissioning Expectations .................................................................................................1-1
Chapter 2 Greengate Motion Sensor Commissioning
2-1
Motion Sensors Stand Alone and Lighting Controller Interface..........................................2-1

Motion Sensor Terminology.....................................................................................2-2
Motion Sensor Applications .....................................................................................2-5
Standalone Sensors...................................................................................................2-9
Sensors as Part of an Integrated System .................................................................2-13
Proper Methods for Testing Sensors ......................................................................2-16
Motion Sensor Configuration Switches and Settings .............................................2-16
Motion Sensors: Notes on Placement .....................................................................2-25
Motion Sensor: Basic Troubleshooting ..................................................................2-28
Chapter 3 Understanding Basic Power Principles
3-1
Electrical Power Basics ..........................................................................................................3-1

Relay Basics ...........................................................................................................................3-4
Chapter 4 LiteKeeper Panel Hardware
4-1
What is involved with Commissioning LiteKeeper Panel Hardware?....................................4-1

LiteKeeper 16 & 32 ................................................................................................................4-2
Enclosure General Information ................................................................................4-3
Enclosure Item Reference.........................................................................................4-3
Transformer Information ..........................................................................................4-4
Standard Override Card (SOC).................................................................................4-4
Relay Card Types .....................................................................................................4-6
Knockout Locations and High and Low Voltage Separation .................................4-12
Additional Available Enclosure Accessories..........................................................4-12
LiteKeeper 16 and 32 Logic Panel Item Reference ................................................4-13
LiteKeeper 8 Panel ...............................................................................................................4-15
LiteKeeper 8 Item Reference..................................................................................4-16
LiteKeeper 8 Additional Information .....................................................................4-16
LiteKeeper 8 Transformer Wiring ..........................................................................4-17
LiteKeeper 8 High and Low Voltage Separation....................................................4-17
LiteKeeper 8 Enclosure Accessory: Flushmount Kit .............................................4-17
LiteKeeper 4 Panel ...............................................................................................................4-18
LiteKeeper-4 Item Reference .................................................................................4-19
LiteKeeper-4 Wiring Information ..........................................................................4-19
LiteKeeper 4 High and Low Voltage Separation....................................................4-20
LiteKeeper 4 Additional Information .....................................................................4-20
Table of Contents TOC-1
Chapter 5 LiteKeeper Panel Input Accessories
5-1
Virtual versus Hardware Input Programming Concept...........................................................5-1

Contact Closure Switch Inputs ...............................................................................................5-1
What is involved with Commissioning Contact Closure Switch Inputs? .................5-1
Terminology .............................................................................................................5-2
Connecting Contact Closure Switches .....................................................................5-2
Digita Switch Inputs ...............................................................................................................5-9
What is involved with Commissioning Digita Switch Inputs?.................................5-9
Digita Switch Wiring.............................................................................................5-9
Digita Configuration Settings.................................................................................5-13
Digita Switch Commissioning Testing...................................................................5-15
Motion Sensor Inputs............................................................................................................5-15
What is involved with Commissioning Motion Sensor Inputs? .............................5-15
Connecting Motion Sensors ...................................................................................5-16
Special Considerations when using Motion Sensors with a Greengate Controller.5-18
Photosensor Inputs................................................................................................................5-19
What is involved with Commissioning Photosensor Inputs? .................................5-19
Connecting Photosensors........................................................................................5-20
PPS-4 Photosensor Configuration ..........................................................................5-22
PPS-5 Photosensor Configuration ..........................................................................5-26
Special Considerations when using Photosensors ..................................................5-27
Sharing Contact Input Switches Between LiteKeeper Controllers (LK16 or 32 only) .......5-27
Notes on Sharing Inputs: ........................................................................................5-27
Steps to Share Switch Inputs: .................................................................................5-27
Line Voltage Automatic Turn Off Switch ............................................................................5-29
Wiring Information.................................................................................................5-29
Programming Information ......................................................................................5-30
Telephone Interface Module (TIM) ......................................................................................5-31
What is involved with Commissioning Telephone Interface Module Inputs?........5-31
TIM Connection .....................................................................................................5-31
TIM Operation........................................................................................................5-32
Special Notes about TIM........................................................................................5-32
Additional Accessory Options ..............................................................................................5-33
Chapter 6 Keypad Programming Tutorial
6-1
Overview ................................................................................................................................6-1
Programming Keypad .............................................................................................................6-1
Screen Layout .........................................................................................................................6-2
Part A: Preparing the Panel for Programming: .......................................................................6-3
Step 1: Initial Power Up ...........................................................................................6-3
Step 2: Clearing Panel Memory................................................................................6-3
Step 3: Setting the Panel Jumpers.............................................................................6-4
Step 4: Set the Panel Clock, Date and Daylight Savings..........................................6-4
Step 5: Set the Panels Astronomical Clock .............................................................6-5
Step 6: Clear the Logs ..............................................................................................6-7
Gathering the Information you will need: ................................................................6-7
Part B: Configuring Relays.....................................................................................................6-8
Step 1: Set the Relay Type .......................................................................................6-8
Step 2: Assigning a Warn Off to a Relay .................................................................6-8
Part C: Programming a Time Schedule.................................................................................6-10
Creating a Time Based ON/OFF Schedule.............................................................6-11
Creating a Sunup or Sundown ON/OFF Schedule .................................................6-12
Reviewing Your Time Schedule Programming......................................................6-13
Part D: Programming Wall Switches....................................................................................6-13
Programming a Dry Contact Closure Switch .........................................................6-13

Programming Digita Switch Type ..........................................................................6-15
Linking the Switch to the Relays It Controls..........................................................6-18
Setting a Switch Timer ...........................................................................................6-18
Enabling Switch Warning Periods..........................................................................6-19
Part E: Programming Remote Commands ............................................................................6-20
Step 1: Linking a Remote Command to the Relays it Controls..............................6-20
Step 2: Setting up Remote Timers ..........................................................................6-20
Enabling Remote Warning Periods ........................................................................6-21
Part F: Holiday Dates............................................................................................................6-22
Creating Holiday Dates ..........................................................................................6-22
Reviewing Holiday Dates.......................................................................................6-22
Deleting Holiday Dates ..........................................................................................6-23
Part G: Changing Programming ...........................................................................................6-23
Option 1: Changing Scheduled Time .....................................................................6-24
Option 2: Changing Schedule Command/Priority ..................................................6-24
Option 3: Changing Relays Controlled by a Schedule ...........................................6-24
Option 4: Changing Scheduled Days of Week .......................................................6-25
Deleting Time Schedules........................................................................................6-26
Part H: Manual Commands, Status and Log History............................................................6-26
Issuing a Manual Relay Command.........................................................................6-26
Viewing Relay Status Information .........................................................................6-27
Relay, Switch, and Remote Logs............................................................................6-27
Power Up/Down Logs ............................................................................................6-28
Relay Runtime Logs: Viewing and Clearing..........................................................6-28
Advanced Programming Information ...................................................................................6-29
Using Priorities in the LiteKeeper System .............................................................6-29
Programming Priorities in the LiteKeeper System .................................................6-35
Using Masks in the LiteKeeper System..................................................................6-37
Additional Reference Materials ............................................................................................6-41
LiteKeeper 8 and LiteKeeper 4 Programming Notes .............................................6-41
Non-Touch screen ControlKeeper Version Comparison Chart ..............................6-41
Chapter 7 LiteKeeper Troubleshooting Procedures
7-1
Troubleshooting Notes............................................................................................................7-1
Transformer Power .................................................................................................................7-1
LK 16 and 32 Transformer Troubleshooting............................................................7-1
LK 8 Transformer Troubleshooting..........................................................................7-2
LK 4 Transformer Troubleshooting..........................................................................7-3
Brownout Notes:.......................................................................................................7-4
Standard Override Card Troubleshooting ...............................................................................7-4
Basic Relay Troubleshooting..................................................................................................7-5
Symptoms:................................................................................................................7-5
Basic questions to ask before beginning to troubleshoot:.........................................7-5
Troubleshooting steps:..............................................................................................7-5
Troubleshooting Logic Boards ...............................................................................................7-7
Logic Board Status Indicators ..................................................................................7-7
Troubleshooting Contact Closure Switches, Motion Sensors and Photosensors: ...................7-8
Symptoms.................................................................................................................7-8
Basic Troubleshooting Steps ....................................................................................7-8
Lighted Switch Troubleshooting ..............................................................................7-9
Low-Voltage Motion Sensor Troubleshooting:......................................................7-11
Photosensor Troubleshooting .................................................................................7-12
Digita Switch Troubleshooting .............................................................................................7-13
Recommended Equipment: ....................................................................................7-13
Resistance Test Prior to Powering Network ...........................................................7-13

Testing Digita Functionality and Troubleshooting .................................................7-13
Notes on Troubleshooting Programming..............................................................................7-16
Chapter 8 ControlKeeper Panel Hardware
8-1
What is involved with Commissioning ControlKeeper Panel Hardware? ..............................8-1

ControlKeeper-T.....................................................................................................................8-2
Enclosure General Information ................................................................................8-3
Enclosure Item Reference.........................................................................................8-3
Transformer Information ..........................................................................................8-3
Override Card Options .............................................................................................8-4
Center Rail and Relay Card Types ...........................................................................8-6
Knockout Locations and High and Low Voltage Separation ...................................8-9
Additional Available Enclosure Accessories............................................................8-9
ControlKeeper-T Item Reference Diagram ............................................................8-11
ControlKeeper 4 Panel..........................................................................................................8-12
ControlKeeper 4 Item Reference Drawing .............................................................8-13
ControlKeeper-4 Wiring Information.....................................................................8-14
ControlKeeper 4 High and Low Voltage Separation..............................................8-14
ControlKeeper 4 Additional Information ...............................................................8-14
ControlKeeper 2 Panel..........................................................................................................8-15
ControlKeeper-2 Item Reference Drawing.............................................................8-16
ControlKeeper 2 Wiring Information .....................................................................8-17
ControlKeeper 2 High and Low Voltage Separation..............................................8-17
ControlKeeper 2 Additional Information ...............................................................8-17
ControlKeeper 4A Panel.......................................................................................................8-17
ControlKeeper 4A Item Reference .........................................................................8-18
ControlKeeper (non-touch screen) Item Reference Diagram ...............................................8-21
Chapter 9 Network Wiring and ControlKeeper Accessories
9-1
Networking Controllers ..........................................................................................................9-1

Sample Network Wiring Applications......................................................................9-1
What is involved with Commissioning Networked Systems? ..................................9-2
Network Facts...........................................................................................................9-2
Network Addressing.................................................................................................9-4
Contact Closure Switch Inputs ...............................................................................................9-5
Connecting Contact Closure Switches .....................................................................9-5
Digita Switch Wiring ..............................................................................................................9-8
Digita Switch Commissioning Testing...................................................................9-14
Motion Sensor and Contact Input Photosensor Inputs..........................................................9-14
General Motion Sensor and Photosensor Wiring Instructions................................9-14
Connecting Motion Sensors ...................................................................................9-15
Connecting Contact Input Photosensors.................................................................9-17
Sharing Switches between Networked Controllers...............................................................9-19
Analog Photosensor Inputs ...................................................................................................9-20
What is involved with Commissioning Analog Photosensor Inputs?.....................9-20
Wiring to the ControlKeeper T...............................................................................9-20
Wiring to the ControlKeeper-4A............................................................................9-21
Analog Photosensor Placement ..............................................................................9-22
Line Voltage Automatic Turn Off Switch ............................................................................9-24
Gateway ................................................................................................................................9-24
What is involved with Commissioning a Gateway? ...............................................9-24
Gateway Wiring .....................................................................................................9-24
Ethernet Interface Module ....................................................................................................9-25
What is involved with Commissioning an Ethernet Interface Module? .................9-25

Current EIM Wiring and Configuration (Units Shipped After 11/15/2009)...........9-26
EIM Wiring and Configuration for Units Shipped prior to 11/15/2009 .................9-32
Modem..................................................................................................................................9-35
What is involved with Commissioning Modems? ..................................................9-36
Modem Wiring .......................................................................................................9-36
Telephone Interface Module .................................................................................................9-36
TIM Connection .....................................................................................................9-36
DMXGateway.......................................................................................................................9-37
What is involved with Commissioning a DMX Gateway?.....................................9-37
DMX Gateway Wiring ...........................................................................................9-38
Automation Interface Module...............................................................................................9-38
What is involved with Commissioning an AIM? ...................................................9-39
AIM Information Gathering ...................................................................................9-39
Sample Mapping Tables .........................................................................................9-41
AIM Wiring............................................................................................................9-45
Network Repeater .................................................................................................................9-45
What is involved with Commissioning Repeaters? ................................................9-45
Repeater Wiring .....................................................................................................9-46
Chapter 10 Touchscreen Programming
10-1
Overview ..............................................................................................................................10-1
Main Screen ..........................................................................................................................10-1
Part A: Preparing the Panel for Programming: .....................................................................10-2
Step 1: Initial Power Up Sequence .........................................................................10-2
Step 2: Clearing Panel Memory..............................................................................10-2
Step 3: Setting the Panel Jumpers...........................................................................10-3
Step 4: Setting the Panel Parameters ......................................................................10-4
Step 5: Setting the Panel Clock ..............................................................................10-5
Step 6: Setting the Astronomical Clock..................................................................10-6
Step 7: Clear the Log Files .....................................................................................10-8
Step 8: Gathering the Information you will Need: .................................................10-8
Part B: Configuring Relays...................................................................................................10-9
Part C: Programming a Time Schedule...............................................................................10-11
Step 1: Setting up the Time Schedule...................................................................10-12
Step 2: Linking the Time Schedule to the Relays it Controls...............................10-14
Part D: Programming Wall Switches..................................................................................10-15
Dry Contact Closure Switch Information .............................................................10-15
Digita Switch Information ....................................................................................10-16
Step 1: Programming the Switch: Basic Setup .....................................................10-18
Step 2: Linking the Switch to the Relays it Controls............................................10-23
Part E: Setting up Analogs..................................................................................................10-24
Step 1: Basic Analog Setup ..................................................................................10-24
Step 2: Setting Analog Parameters .......................................................................10-26
Step 3: Linking the Analog to the Controlled Relays ...........................................10-28
Part F: Programming Remote Commands ..........................................................................10-29
Step 1: Remote Setup ...........................................................................................10-29
Step 2: Linking the Remote to the Relays it Controls ..........................................10-31
Part G: Holiday Dates .........................................................................................................10-32
Part H: Programming Masks...............................................................................................10-33
Mask Types ..........................................................................................................10-34
Step 1: Setting Up a Mask ....................................................................................10-34
Step 2: Linking Masks to Switch, Analog and Remote Inputs .............................10-35
Part I: Reviewing Changing and Deleting Programming ...................................................10-36
Reviewing Programming by Relay.......................................................................10-36
Changing Programming........................................................................................10-38
Deleting Programming .........................................................................................10-38
Manually Overriding Relays...............................................................................................10-39
Hardware Relay Overrides ...................................................................................10-39
Touch Screen Relay Overrides .............................................................................10-40
Viewing Live Status & Log Data........................................................................................10-41
Relay Status..........................................................................................................10-41
Switch, Analog & Remote Status .........................................................................10-41
Viewing Logs .......................................................................................................10-42
Chapter 11 Keeper Enterprise Quick Start Guide
11-1
Introduction ..........................................................................................................................11-1
Opening the Keeper Enterprise Software..............................................................................11-2
Creating a New Database and Site Path................................................................................11-2
Navigating to the Site Map ...................................................................................................11-3
Defining the Site ...................................................................................................................11-4
Filling in the Site Information Tab .........................................................................11-4
Filling in the Communications Information Tab ....................................................11-6
Filling in the Location Information Tab .................................................................11-6
Holidays Tab ..........................................................................................................11-8
Lamps Tab..............................................................................................................11-8
Options Tab ............................................................................................................11-8
Creating a Network...............................................................................................................11-8
Defining the Network ...........................................................................................................11-9
Filling in the Network Information Tab ...............................................................11-10
Filling in the Network Communications Information Tab ...................................11-10
Using the Find Panels Tab....................................................................................11-11
Creating Panels ...................................................................................................................11-11
Defining the Panels.............................................................................................................11-13
Filling in the Panel Identification Information Tab ..............................................11-13
Filling in the Location Information Tab ...............................................................11-14
Filling in the Panel Communications Information Tab ........................................11-14
Defining Relays ..................................................................................................................11-14
Programming Time Schedules............................................................................................11-15
Programming a Contact Input Wall Switch ........................................................................11-18
Programming a Digita Switch Station ................................................................................11-20
Programming a Wall Switch to Activate Relays in Another Panel.....................................11-25
Programming a Telephone Interface Module Command....................................................11-28
Programming an Analog Photosensor ................................................................................11-30
Programming a Mask..........................................................................................................11-33
Creating Holidays ...............................................................................................................11-35
Initial Communications Setup ............................................................................................11-36
Step 1: Initial Connection to the System ..............................................................11-36
Step 2: Verify the Hardware Addresses................................................................11-36
Step 3: Clear the Control Panel Memory to Factory Defaults ..............................11-37
Step 4: Setting the Panel Time and Date ..............................................................11-38
Step 5: Clearing Panel Logs .................................................................................11-39
Downloading Programming to the Panel ............................................................................11-40
Single Panel Download ........................................................................................11-40
Network Download ..............................................................................................11-40
Commanding Relays On or Off from the Software ............................................................11-41
Viewing Live Status ...........................................................................................................11-42
Uploading and Viewing Log Files......................................................................................11-43
Backing Up and Restoring Databases.................................................................................11-43
Backing up the Database ......................................................................................11-43
Chapter 12 ControlKeeper Logic Panel Troubleshooting
12-1
Transformer Power ...............................................................................................................12-1

ControlKeeper-T Transformer Troubleshooting ....................................................12-1
CK2 and CK4 Transformer Troubleshooting .........................................................12-2
Brownout Notes:.....................................................................................................12-3
RSC Troubleshooting ...........................................................................................................12-3
Basic Serial Relay Troubleshooting......................................................................................12-5
Symptoms:..............................................................................................................12-5
Basic questions to ask before beginning to troubleshoot:.......................................12-5
Troubleshooting steps:............................................................................................12-5
Troubleshooting Logic Boards .............................................................................................12-7
Logic Board Status Indicators ................................................................................12-7
Troubleshooting Contact Closure Switches, Motion Sensors and Photosensors: .................12-8
Symptoms...............................................................................................................12-8
Basic Troubleshooting Steps ..................................................................................12-8
Lighted Switch Troubleshooting ............................................................................12-9
Low-Voltage Motion Sensor Troubleshooting:....................................................12-11
Contact Closure Photosensor Troubleshooting.....................................................12-12
Digita Switch Troubleshooting ...........................................................................................12-13
Recommended Equipment: ..................................................................................12-13
Resistance Test Prior to Powering Network .........................................................12-13
Testing Digita Functionality and Troubleshooting ...............................................12-13
Analog Photosensor Troubleshooting.................................................................................12-16
Notes on Troubleshooting Programming............................................................................12-17
Network Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................12-18
Single Panel not Communicating .........................................................................12-18
No Communications beyond a Point ....................................................................12-18
Intermittent Communications Problems ...............................................................12-19
Chapter 13 Additional Greengate Products
13-1
TracKeeper ...........................................................................................................................13-1
VisionSwitch ........................................................................................................................13-3
Commissioning Expectations .................................................................................13-3
VisionTouch Software ..........................................................................................................13-8
General Information ...............................................................................................13-8
Commissioning Expectations .................................................................................13-9
Event Manager....................................................................................................................13-22
Chapter 14 Commissioning Documentation
14-1
General Expectations ............................................................................................................14-1

Startup Documentation .........................................................................................................14-1
Before Startup is scheduled ....................................................................................14-2
During Startup ......................................................................................................14-12
After Startup Paperwork.......................................................................................14-15
Chapter 15 Appendix A: Commissioning Expectations
15-1
Commissioning Expectations Summary ...............................................................................15-1

LiteKeeper & ControlKeeper Panel Hardware:......................................................15-1
Contact Closure Switch Inputs ...............................................................................15-1
Motion Sensor Inputs .............................................................................................15-2
Contact Closure Photosensor Inputs.......................................................................15-2
Digita Switch Inputs ...............................................................................................15-2
Analog Photosensors ..............................................................................................15-3
Telephone Interface Module...................................................................................15-3

Network Commissioning........................................................................................15-3
Gateway..................................................................................................................15-4
DMX Gateway .......................................................................................................15-4
Automation Interface Module ................................................................................15-4
Ethernet Interface Module:.....................................................................................15-4
Modems ..................................................................................................................15-5
Repeaters ................................................................................................................15-5
Chapter 1 Overview
Course Goals
This course is designed for agents who will be commissioning lighting control
projects. By the end of this training, participants should have the knowledge to
commission a basic lighting control system. Course participants should also have
knowledge of features, tools and resources for achieving more complicated
applications and troubleshooting.
The course will achieve this by instructing attendees in:
An in depth hardware review of the Greengate line including

sensors, lighting panels, and accessories.
An in depth programming overview of the on board keypad or

touchscreen interfaces for the Greengate lighting controllers.
An in depth overview of the Keeper Enterprise Software usage.
Demonstration of the VisionTouch and VisionSwitch Software

packages.
Discussion of best practices in commissioning procedures and

documentation.
Commissioning Expectations
Commissioning is a process which verifies that a lighting control system has been
installed in accordance with recommended installation practices and has been
programmed or adjusted to meet the customers required needs.
During the commissioning process, Cooper Controls is expected to provide the
following services:
Pre-program the lighting control strategy including:
Gathering all necessary data for programming the system from the
electrical contractor/owner/engineer.
Setting up programming parameters based on information gathered
Providing descriptive notes fields in the Enterprise Software for

areas controlled as well as switch locations and other controls
Overview 1-1
Pretesting any special applications to be implemented in the field
On site system checkout including:
Verifying panel functionality by cycling all relays, downloading

programming, testing all switching via inputs.
Verifying functionality of and making any adjustments necessary

for all photosensors and motion sensors.
Verifying network integrity by systematically checking network

communications at each panel location.
Installing software on customers PC, verifying communications,

and transferring database files.
Training the end user on the lighting system hardware and software.
Providing the contractor/owner with closing paperwork including a trip
report, printouts of programming, a database backup of programming
and any other pertinent details.
Overview 1-2
Chapter 2 Greengate Motion

Sensor Commissioning
Motion Sensors Stand Alone and Lighting Controller Interface
Motion Sensor Terminology

Motion Types
Sensing Technologies
Motion Sensor Applications
Stand Alone Wiring and Commissioning
Lighting Controller Wiring and Commissioning
Motion Sensor Configuration Settings
Motion Sensor Placement
Greengate Motion Sensor Commissioning 2-1
Motion Sensor Terminology
Motion Sensor Applications
Standalone Sensors
What is Involved with Commissioning Motion Sensors as a
Stand Alone System?
Expectations on motion sensor installation include:
Verify all motion sensor wiring to switchpack connection points is

free of shorts between splices. If using direct line-voltage powered
sensors, verify that the wiring is correct and the sensor is powered
and operational.
Verify that wiring from sensor to switchpack matches.
If wall switches are used, as a manual-off option, make sure the

switchpack is not bypassed. (see wiring diagram).
Verify that the sensor placement is optimal for the space

controlled. If not, it may be necessary to relocate the sensor..
Adjust time delay and sensitivity settings for any motion sensors as
necessary.
Installation Details
Ceiling Sensor Installation
Switchpack Installation
Wall Switch Sensor Installation
Ceiling Sensor Wiring
Sensor- Switchpack Wiring Detail
One Sensor Two Switchpacks Wiring Detail
Line Voltage Sensor Wiring

Wiring typical for DT2000, US2000, US1500 and PIR1500 models
Wall Switch Sensor Wiring (Sample)
Wall Switch Sensor Wiring
Sensors as Part of an Integrated System

What is Involved with Commissioning Motion Sensor Inputs
that are Part of a Greengate Lighting Controller System?
Expectations on motion sensor inputs include:
Verify all motion sensor wiring to terminal connection points is

free of shorts between terminals.
Verify that wiring to channels matches preliminary data provided

for programming.
Verify that the local remote jumpers have been properly

positioned in the panel enclosures, when applicable.

controlled. If not, it may be necessary to relocate the sensor.
Once a panel has had its complete preliminary hardware checked

out and programming is downloaded test each sensor for
functionality by placing the sensors into installer test mode.
necessary.
CKT Greengate Sensor Wiring Detail
LiteKeeper 16 and 32 Greengate Sensor Wiring Detail
LiteKeeper 8 Greengate Sensor Wiring Detail
Proper Methods for Testing Sensors

Regardless of sensor type, testing methods are very similar. The biggest differences
on testing Greengate sensors are between the Microset and non-microset sensors.
Always make sure the sensors under test have been powered for approximately 3
minutes before making adjustments. Please review the steps below.
Testing the Microset Sensor:

1.
In all sensor testing, the HVAC should be running.
2.
Flip dip switch 3 or override dip switch out of self adjust

for 1 second then back. The unit will be in installer test
mode. Sensor will remain in test mode until the lights
have been continuously off for 5 minutes. During test
mode, the time delay will be 15 seconds.
3.
Remain still. The LED will not flash. Lights should turn
off after 15 seconds.
4.
Move about the area. Lights should come one. Testing is

complete.
5.
No need to do any further steps as the unit will default

back to user mode after the 5 minute off period.
Testing Non-Microset Sensors:

1.
In all sensor testing, the HVAC should be running so that

sensitivity can be adjusted accordingly
2.
Set timer to minimum setting
3.
Set sensitivity to midpoint
4.
Set photo control to maximum setting to disable the

photocell if the sensor is equipped with this function
5.
Make sure that the manual override is not set to override

ON
6.
Leave the area the lights should go off
7.
Test area of coverage watching the sensor LED adjust

the sensitivity to lowest setting required to adequately
sense motion
8.
If using the photosensor, adjust when the room is at the

light level that lighting should be turning on. Place the
photosensor setting at lowest light level. Leave the room
and wait for the lights to turn off. Enter the room. Adjust
the photosensor settings until the lights turn on
9.
Set the time to the desired number of minutes
Motion Sensor Configuration Switches and

Settings
Configuration Switch Definitions
Auto/Manual Mode: Auto mode automatically turns lighting on and off
when motion is sensed/ceases. Manual Mode if a two wire
momentary switch is connected between the brown and black wires, it

is possible to have the motion swept off automatically but to force the
ON to be from the switch.
Lighting Sweep: If power pack is down line from an output that is turned
off by a BMS such as a lighting relay, when the relay is swept on, the
unit will not automatically turn on the lighting but will re-evaluate after
a short period of time.
Time Delay: Sensors will have different methods of adjusting time delay.
In some models, time delay will be auto sensing with an option of
locking it at a 30 minute delay. Other sensors may allow you to select
your own setting. Please refer to the individual sensor details.
Default to ON: Used to invert the logic of the sensor to allow the sensor to
be used with normally closed switchpacks.
Half/Full Daylight Logic: In sensors that have an internal photosensor
when the yellow sensor lead is wired. In Full mode, any time the
photosensor goes below ambient level it will turn off regardless of
occupancy. In Half mode, while the area is continuously occupied, the
photosensor can not turn off the lights. Once occupancy ceases, the
photosensor will dictate whether the lighting turns back on the next
time occupancy is sensed. (Common app wire the blue lead to one
switchpack and the yellow lead to another. One will be motion
controlled totally while the other will be controlled by the photosensor.
Normal/Energy Saver: For models that can control dual circuits or
separately control A/B loads through switchpacks. If in energy save
mode, when the sensor turns on a load, it will only activate one load,
not both at once regardless of last setting. If left in normal, both loads
will activate whenever motion is detected.
Passive Infrared Microset Sensors OMC-P or OMC-R

(Recessed)
12 foot mounting height.
Red LED for Passive Infrared
Photocell option if using the photocell, the yellow wire instead of

the blue wire will be connected to the lighting controller ON
channel. (Blue control lead for switchpack applications)
Has a manual on override switch in case of sensor failure.
Dip 1: Auto/Manual Mode

Dip 2: Lighting Sweep
Dip 3: Locked 30 Minute time delay: Time delay is auto sensing
in the microset PIR. Minimum time will be 10 minutes and will
self adjust between 10 and 30 minutes. The sensor can be locked
at a 30 minute period rather than allowing self adjust.
Dip 4: Default to ON:
Dip 5: Half/Full Daylight Logic:
Dip 6 8: Used to determine FC switch range of when the lighting
is turned off. Learn setting is not currently active.(10FC)
Ultrasonic Microset Sensors OMC-U
12 foot max mounting height.
Blue LED for 1000 & 2000 square foot units.
Amber LED for 500 square foot unit.
Heavy draperies and carpets can reduce range recommended

15% reduction for these spaces.
The long edge of the sensor has the farthest range.
Dip 1: Manual/Auto ON
Dip 2: Lighting Sweep
Dip 3: Time Delay lock to 30 minutes
Dip 4: Override ON
Dual Tech Microset Sensors OMC-DT

Lights are switched on when the PIR (passive infrared) sensor detects motion. The
unit can be configured so lights stay on in one of the following modes: either
technology senses motion or both technologies have to sense motion. Dual
technology sensors provide superior sensitivity to minor motion. This feature
eliminates inadvertent lights out (false offs) in unoccupied rooms.
Green LED for Ultrasonic
Red LED for Passive Infrared
700 or 2000 feet (one way or two way)
The long edge of the sensor has the farthest range.
Dip 1: Manual/Auto ON
(One tap to bring lights on and off. When switch is pressed and
held it cycles through the loads. The sensor in regular mode will
bring back on the light level that was last in place unless used in
conjunction with energy saver mode. If energy saver mode is
invoked, only one load will light with auto on.)
Dip 2: Lighting Sweep OFF/ON
Dip 3: Self Adjust 30 minute mode
Dip 4: Normal/Energy Saver:
o Blue Lead Load A
o Yellow Lead Load B
Dip 5: Normal/Inverted Logic
Dip 6: Normal/Low Sensitivity: If too close to HVAC or airflow
with no hope of relocation, you can try to go to low sensitivity
mode.
Dip 7: Either Mode, Both Mode: PIR is the first sensing
technology. Once PIR activates, by default in Either mode, if
either technology senses motion, the lights wills stay on. In Both
Mode, both technologies must be on to keep the lights on.
Dip 8: Manual Override
Designer Series Ultrasonic Sensors ODC-U
Red LED for 1000 & 2000 square foot units and hallway sensors
Green LED for 500 square foot unit
To enable lighting sweep off mode, remove the J2 jumper shunt

device.
Time delay and sensitivity adjustments are done with rotary dials.
Override switch is under the main case.
Standard Series Ultrasonic Sensor OEC-U
Red LED 1000 and 2000 sq ft. models, hallway and airflow
tolerant
Green LED 500 sq. ft. model
Standard Series Extreme Temperature Sensor OXC-P
OXC-P-1500-R Up to 1500 square feet (two way). Max 8 foot

mounting height.
OXC-P-2MH0-R When mounted at 25 feet up to 25 feet in all

directions or 50 linear feet for warehouse aisles. (two way)
Temperature: -40F to 125F (-40C to 52C)
Relative humidity: less than 90%, non-condensing
For indoor or outdoor use
Integrated photocell control
Red LED
Form C relay for BAS
Dips 1-3 for Time Delay (15 sec min 30 min max). When in auto
mode, will adjust to 6 minutes if left at 15 sec.
Dip 4: Self Adjust Disable use if you wish to set the time delay
with dips 1-3.
Dip 5 & 6: Ambient Lights used for photocell switch off level.
Dip 7: HID Interface when the lights are turned on, leaves the
switchpack relay engaged for 20 minutes before the normal time
delay takes over.
Dip 8: Light Sweep
Dip 9 Pull up
Dip 10: Manual override
Wall Switch Sensor Adjustments OSW-P, OSW-U, OSW-DT
OSW-P
Single or Dual Level available.
Can be used in both single or three way implementations.
Dual circuit model contains tap ON/OFF and press and hold cycle
through mode to choose desired light level. Front LED read out
will show what is the active mode.
Sensitivity adjusted with tape strips to mask sensors field of view.
Takes approx two minutes after power up before the unit stabilizes.
Make sure to wait before testing.
Low Voltage Model available
Dips 1-4 Time Delay Adjust .25 sec to 30 minutes available.

Dip 5: Auto ON/Manual On
Dip 6: Disable self adjust locks time to the Dip 1-4 settings rather
than having the unit auto adjust to proper settings based on
activity.
Dip 7: Energy Saver (dual level unit) If both loads were last left
on when the lights turned off, the next time they turn on, only one
will be activated.
Dip 8: Override ON
OSW-U
Single Level Only
Can be three-way
Jumper is there to force override.
Manual/Auto is selected with slide switch
Sensitivity is adjusted separately for area vs. entry
Time Delay is adjusted with wheel
Single Level only
Photocell is integrated
Has built in blinders that cover the PIR window to adjust the field
of view without tape. These are movable through levers
Has three wheels to adjust sensitivity, timer, and photocell settings.
Timer has a setting of A for Auto Adjust or adjust wheel to choose

a time up to 30 minutes.
Photocell settings can be set for the lighting to turn off above the
level automatically. This wheel also chooses auto on vs. manual
on. Fully right, invokes auto on. Fully left, manual on.
Sensitivity used to adjust PIR sensitivity. In addition, can adjust

ultrasonic sensitivity by press and hold function of the manual
button.
OWS-DT
DT2000 Line Voltage Ceiling Sensor Adjustment
US2000 and US1500 Line Voltage Ceiling Sensor

Adjustment
PIR1500 Line Voltage Ceiling Sensor Adjustment
Motion Sensors: Notes on Placement

Motion sensor applications fail most often due to improper placement of the sensors.
While commissioning sensors include observing their placement in the room. Take
note that the following rules are met:
All motion sensors should be located at least 4 feet away from any
HVAC returns.
Motion sensors should be placed so that they can not see into
areas they should not be controlled from. In some cases, this may
mean masking the sensor with tape or special shield guards.
PIR sensors avoid obstructions. PIR sensors depend on a line of

sight in order to detect motion.
Classroom: Sample Placement
Multistall Restroom: Sample Placement
Small Restroom: Sample Placement
Conference Room: Sample Placement
Corridors: Sample Placement
Motion Sensor: Basic Troubleshooting
Chapter 3 Understanding Basic

Power Principles
Electrical Power Basics
Understanding Basic Power Principles 3-1
Relay Basics
Chapter 4 LiteKeeper Panel

Hardware
What is involved with Commissioning LiteKeeper Panel

Hardware?
Expectations on commissioning LiteKeeper Panel Hardware include:
Verify all high voltage wiring looks sound. No loose wires, burn
marks, stray wires are capped.
Verify that high voltage relays that are wired match the
preliminary information provided. If circuits are tagged, verify
circuit information as well.
Verify that when powered, all displays are lit, status LEDs are
flashing as described for devices in this chapter.
Verify individual relay function using manual relay overrides from

the controller or software.
Clear controller of all programming and then reprogram with sites

desired sequence of operation.
If no inputs are wired, verify that programming of schedules

controls proper relay groups by advancing the clock through the
schedule times.
See input chapter for information specific to commissioning different input types.
LiteKeeper Panel Hardware 4-1
LiteKeeper 16 & 32
Enclosure General Information

The 16 & 32 Size Enclosure is currently used for LiteKeeper 16 or 32 logic boards
and for DMXKeeper panels. In the past it has also been used for the non-touch
screen version of the ControlKeeper panel, the WatchKeeper panel, and
SwitchKeeper panel. It employs a parallel BUS for communications from the logic
panel to the relay cards for control of lighting loads.
Enclosure Item Reference
16 Size Enclosure
32 Size Enclosure
Item Reference # Description

1
Enclosure Door & Lockset
High Voltage Compartment with Relay Stack
Relay Stack Connector
Standard Override Card Power Leads from

Transformer
Transformer Well
Logic Board Power Wires
Logic Board Ribbon Cable Connector into SOC
Standard Override Card ALLOFF/AUTO/ALLON

Switch
(32 Size Enclosure Only) Enclosure Upper

Backplate
Transformer Information
The Transformer is mounted in the lower right corner of the standard enclosures. It
is a double tapped transformer to which 120VAC or 277VAC may be wired. A
120VAC/347VAC transformer is also available.
Standard Override Card (SOC)

16/32 size LiteKeeper enclosures are equipped with a three-position rocker switch.
The switch allows you to close or open all the relays when the control panel is not in
the enclosure or when you need to override normal programming on an enclosurewide basis. The switch must be in the middle or AUTO position where neither the
Green nor Red LEDs are lit in order for programmed schedules and switching to
occur.
Power
The override card is powered from the transformer through a separate set of
secondary wires that carry 18-20 VAC. The power supply on the override card
transforms this AC voltage to 24 VDC. This voltage is used to power the control
relays.
Additional SOC Features Relay Interface Module

The SOC has an optional function that provides for an external, maintained dry
contact input to control all the relays in the enclosure. This feature requires a female
mating connector, part number 32-003031-xx. The override is initiated by a contact
closure from any external device.
The SOC connector has screw terminals for connection to the external device
override wires. We recommend a standard 18 gauge twisted pair wire with a
maximum length of 1000 feet. A maintained closure is expected from the external
device. This closure can be wired such that when a closure occurs, it forces the
system to an ON state or an OFF state.
The external contact closure forces all relays in the enclosure to an ON or OFF state
independent of the control panel status. After the contact is opened, the relays return
to their pre-override state. The primary use of this override is to turn relays on in
case of the loss of normal power. It is not possible to selectively override relays
within the enclosure.
Cooper Controls has a Relay Interface Module which monitors normal power. In the
event of normal power loss, it forces all the relays in the enclosure on or off. There
are three RIM models available, 120VAC, 277VAC, and 347VAC. This device
when used in conjunction with a LiteKeeper 16 or 32 size enclosure assembly to
force lighting ON has been approved to meet UL924 standards.
It is important to note that:
The transformer must be powered from an emergency power

source as power to the transformer is required for the external
override to operate in a power down situation.
A manual Override OFF from the SOC rocker switch takes

precedence over the external override ON.
Relay enclosures with latching or two pole relay cards will not
override instantly if the enclosure has been powered down and the
relay cards are in the process of booting up. This relay card
boot up can take 15 to 30 seconds. Because these relays are
mechanically held, their state will not change until boot up is
complete. If they were held ON prior to the power outage, they
will remain ON until the external override takes place. This boot
up process will also occur if the panel ribbon cable is not
connected to the override card.
Normally closed relays will turn OFF when the external override is
moved to the ON position and turn ON when the external override
is moved to the OFF position.
The manual switch integral to the relay on some relay cards has the
ultimate override capability.
It is not permitted to daisy chain external overrides from one

LiteKeeper panel to the next. Each external override connection to
a lighting panel must have an isolated contact to prevent bucking
power supplies.
Relay Interface Module Wiring
Relay Card Types

There are several relay card configurations available for use in the lighting controller
enclosure. Current Relay Card offerings include the Standard Relay Card (SRC),
Latching Relay Card (LRC), Modular Relay Card (MRC) and Two-Pole
Relay Card (TPRC).
The relays are closed by a 24VDC signal generated by the control panel or by the
Standard Override Card (SOC). The 24VDC signal can come from the following:
Override switch on the SOC. The SOC override will immediately turn
the relays on or off unless it is controlling the LRC/LRM or TPRC.
For those relay types if there is either no control panel in the enclosure
or the control panel is not powered there will be a 30-second response
time for the SOC override.
External bypass switch wired into the terminal block on the SOC card.
Through the control panel in response to time schedules, switch inputs,

manual commands from the keypad or Enterprise Software, etc.
Standard Relay Card (SRC):

This card contains eight electrically held relays with contacts rated for 120/277VAC,
20 amp circuits. Unless specifically ordered for normally closed relays, the
Standard Relay Card has normally open contacts.
On power up the control panel actuates the relays to the correct on/off state after a
short evaluation period. Remember that during a power down state, the relays will
resume their true hardware state, i.e. if normally open, they will open on power
down, normally closed will close.
Latching Relay Card (LRC):

This card contains eight latching relays with contacts rated for use on
120/277/347VAC, 20Amp circuits. On reset or power up, the control panel will hold
the relays in their last known state until the control panel determines the correct relay
state. After this short evaluation period (30 seconds approx.), the relays are step
started to the correct state one at a time.
During a power down situation, the relays will hold in their last known state until
power returns.
Additional Items of Note

1.
There is a manual switch on each relay that indicates relay status and
allows for temporary override of the lighting load. If the switch is
moved towards the center of the modular relay card, the relay is ON. If
the relay switch is moved towards the outside of the relay card, the
relay is OFF. If this switch is used to override lighting, the relay will
stay in the overridden state until the next command to that relay from
the logic board.
2.
The Latching Relay Card has a status LED at the bottom that will assist
in determining if the latching relay card is operating properly. In
normal circumstances, when power is applied to the panel and the panel
is plugged into the override card or relay card, the LED will flash on
and off consistently. This indicates that operation is normal.
3.
During initial power up or return of power, if a power outage has been

experienced, the LED will be off for 30 seconds prior to resuming the
flashing operation.
4.
If the logic board is unplugged from the SOC and the SOC is left in the
AUTO position, the relays will remain in their last known state and the
LED will stop flashing. If the SOC switch is moved to ALL ON or
ALL OFF, the LED will be off for 30 seconds then resume flashing
when the relays assume the ALL ON or ALL OFF state.
5.
If the LED remains steady ON or OFF, please verify that the logic
board is plugged into the SOC and that the transformer powering the
panel is receiving the proper voltage. If everything appears OK with
this checkout and the relay card is still unresponsive, power down the
unit and verify that the chips on the LRC are properly seated. If on
power up it is still unresponsive, it is recommended that the relay card
be swapped out.
Modular Relay Card

The Modular Relay Card is a blank relay card upon which different configurations of
relays can be mounted. Relay modules that are currently available include a Two
Pole Relay Module Normally Open (TPRM-NO), a Two Pole Relay Module
Normally Closed (TPRM-NC), a Standard Relay Module (SRM) and a Latching
Relay Module (LRM).
Standard Relay Module
The Standard Relay Module (SRM) provides single pole switch

capability for 120/277VAC, maximum 20 amps. Each Standard Relay
Module takes up one relay space on the Modular Relay Card allowing
up to eight SRMs per Modular Relay Card.
The SRM is the same relay as on our standard relay card which is an
electrically held normally open relay. In the event of a power failure,
the SRM relay will assume its normally open state. Upon return of
power, the SRM will resume its commanded state.
The SRM contains an LED indicator that will be lit when the relay is
commanded by the control panel to be in the closed position.
Latching Relay Module
The Latching Relay Module (LRM) provides single pole switch

capability for 120/277/347VAC, maximum 20 amps. Each Latching
Relay Module takes up one relay space on the Modular Relay Card,
allowing up to eight LRMs per Modular Relay Card. Each LRM has a
mechanically held relay.
During initial power up, the relay on the Latching Relay Module will
remain in its current latched state for a period of 30 seconds. After 30
seconds, the relay will assume its programmed state.
During a power outage, the LRM relay will remain in the state it was in
prior to the power outage. Once power returns, the relay will stay in its
state for 30 seconds then assume its programmed state.
allows for temporary override of the lighting load. If the switch is
moved towards the center of the modular relay card, the relay is ON. If
the relay switch is moved towards the outside of the relay card, the
relay is OFF. If this switch is used to override lighting, the relay will
stay in the overridden state until the next command to that relay from
the logic board.
Two Pole Relay Module Normally Open & Normally Closed:

Operation Notes
The TPRM NO and NC provide two-pole switch capability for

208/240/480VAC at a maximum of 20 Amps. Each two-pole relay
module takes up two relay spaces on the Modular Relay Card, allowing
up to four TPRMs per Modular Relay Card.
The TPRM relay is electrically held. In the event of a power failure,

the TPRM will assume its natural state, i.e. Normally Open or
Normally Closed depending on the type ordered. Upon return of
power, the relays will assume their current commanded state.
The TPRM has an LED that will light up when the relay is commanded
to be in the closed position.
To program the controller to control a TPRM, apply the programming

to the relay number where the relay pin connector is attached to the
MRC.
Two Pole Relay Card

The Two Pole Relay Card is a blank relay card upon which different configurations
of relays can be mounted. This card can control 120/208V or 277/480V two-phase
loads. In addition, there is a single pole 347VAC relay available. It can be
configured with up to 8 relays on the TPR208V and SPR347V and up to 4 relays on
the TPR480V. The relays are clip mounted. They have a UL rating for use on
circuits of 20 amps.
During initial power up, the relays remain in their current latched state
for a period of 30 seconds. After 30 seconds, the relay will assume its
programmed state.
During a power outage, the relays will remain in the state they were in
prior to the power outage. Once power returns, the relays will stay in
their current state for 30 seconds then assume programmed state.
allows for temporary override of the lighting load. If this switch is
used to override lighting, the relay will stay in the overridden state until
the next command to that relay from the logic board.
Each relay plugs in to the relay card with a small two-wire connector.
To program the relay, you will need to know what relay slot # the
connector is plugged into. Also, if relays are not responding properly,
make certain that this connector is connected to the Two Pole Relay
Card.
Knockout Locations and High and Low Voltage

Separation
Knockout locations are available for piping in conduit for both the low and high
voltage sections. Conduit punch holes cannot exceed 3 (inches) from the back of
the enclosure. If this measurement is exceeded, the logic board will not fit properly
inside the enclosure.
It is important that there be a physical separation of low and high-voltage wiring.
Low Voltage wiring can be brought into the enclosure from the bottom or bottom left
of the enclosure. If Low-Voltage wire must be brought into the cabinet from the top
section, there is a knockout reserved on the left side which will allow conduit to be
run from the top of the enclosure into the low-voltage wiring area.
High Voltage wiring should not be brought into the enclosure through the bottom or
bottom left corner of the enclosure.
Failure to maintain high and low-voltage wiring separation may cause programming
not to execute properly or may even cause damage to low-voltage logic board
components.
Additional Available Enclosure Accessories

Additional Enclosure Accessories are available for the 16 or 32 size enclosures. This
includes a High Voltage Barrier kit as well as a Flushmount kit.
High Voltage Barrier Kit

The High Voltage Barrier Kit allows separation of relay cards to meet NEC
requirements for voltage separation. It must be placed in-between relay cards where
the connectors meet.
Flushmount Kit
The Flushmount Kit is a door and flange assembly that replaces the enclosure door.
It allows the contractor to mount the enclosure flush with the wall.
LiteKeeper 16 and 32 Logic Panel Item Reference

1
Digita Switch Gateway Connection Point
LiteKeeper Status LED Indicators: Power and

Status
Digita Switch Port Status LEDs
Connection for Relay Control Signal Cable
Relay Status Indicator LEDs
Reset Switch
Serial COM port connection point
Local/Remote Jumpers
Remote Power Connector (+24V, DC Gnd)
10
Logic Board Power Connection to Transformer
11
Standard Override Card Power Wiring from

Transformer
12
Relay Control Signal Cable connection to Standard

Override Card
13
Standard Override Card ALL OFF/AUTO/ALL ON

Switch with Indicator LEDs
14
Contact Input Switch Wiring Channels
15
Programming Keypad
16
Programming Display
LiteKeeper 8 Panel
LiteKeeper 8 Item Reference

1
Relay Status LEDs
Programming Display
Programming Keypad
Transformer Power Wiring
Ground Screw
Control Relays
Transformer 120 or 277VAC
Reset Switch
RS232 Communications Port/ Digita Switch Port
10
Peripheral Power Terminal (+24V and DC Ground)
11
Switch Input Wiring Channels
12
Override Switch: ALLOFF/AUTO/ALLON
LiteKeeper 8 Additional Information

The LiteKeeper-8 has a dual tap 120/277VAC transformer.
The LiteKeeper-8 panel can have the following relay cards installed:
Standard Relay Card (standard enclosure)
Latching Relay Card (requires deeper enclosure)
Modular Relay Card (requires deeper enclosure)
Two Pole Relay Card (requires deeper enclosure)
A deeper enclosure is provided for any relay card ordered other than a standard relay
card. Please note it is not possible to retrofit a standard relay card LK8 Enclosure
with another relay card type due to reduced profile width and transformer clearance.
LiteKeeper 8 Transformer Wiring
LiteKeeper 8 High and Low Voltage Separation

Make certain that low and high voltage wiring is physically separated in all conduit
and entry into the lighting control panel. The low-voltage wiring section is on the
left side of the enclosure. If high voltage also enters through this compartment, it
should be enclosed in conduit. Failure to maintain high and low-voltage wiring
separation may cause programming not to execute properly or may even cause
damage to low-voltage logic board components.
LiteKeeper 8 Enclosure Accessory: Flushmount Kit

The LiteKeeper 8 Enclosure is available with a flushmount kit. The Flushmount Kit
is a door and flange assembly that replaces the enclosure door. It allows the
contractor to mount the enclosure flush with the wall.
LiteKeeper 4 Panel
LiteKeeper-4 Item Reference

1
Relay Status LEDs
Control Relays
Transformer 120 or 277VAC
RS232 Communications Port
Peripheral Power Terminal (+24V and DC Ground)
Reset Switch
10
Switch Input Wiring Terminals
11
Programming Keypad
12
Programming Display
LiteKeeper-4 Wiring Information
LiteKeeper 4 High and Low Voltage Separation

left side of the enclosure. The high voltage section is on the right side of the
enclosure.
components.
LiteKeeper 4 Additional Information

The LiteKeeper 4 has a single tap transformer for either 120or 277VAC. It must be
pre-ordered with the proper transformer voltage.
The LiteKeeper 4 relay options include Standard Relays Normally Open or Normally
Closed.
Chapter 5 LiteKeeper Panel Input

Accessories
Virtual versus Hardware Input Programming Concept

The LiteKeeper panels contain physical hardware terminal blocks and other
connection points for wiring of input devices. It is important to note that in the
programming of the controller, a hardware input is called a switch in the software
regardless of whether the device is a wall switch, photosensor or motion sensor. In
the software there are a total of 64 programmable switches. These virtual switches
can be assigned to any of the hardware inputs through programming by identifying
the settings for that device, i.e. wiring channel number or address of the device if it is
a digital switch. This chapter discusses wiring of the hardware devices. Discussion
of the programming of the devices will be discussed in the section on keypad
programming.
Contact Closure Switch Inputs

What is involved with Commissioning Contact
Closure Switch Inputs?
Expectations on commissioning contact closure switch inputs include:
Verify all switch wiring is free of shorts between terminals.

for programming for switch types and locations.

positioned in the LK 16/32 size enclosure.
If switches are pilot lit, with power down to the lighting controller,
verify that the jumper on the lighted switch card is set for the
correct pilot light type, i.e. LED or Incandescent.

out and programming is downloaded, verify all switch locations for
function.
LiteKeeper Panel Input Accessories 5-1
If switches provided are pilot lit, verify that the pilot lights
function in addition to the switch functionality.
Terminology
In the Keeper controllers, contact closure input types consist of momentary,
maintained, and toggle types. We need to make certain it is clear how these types
are defined for both wiring and programming purposes.
Momentary Switch: A switch which has a distinct on and off

command and a center return. It issues a pulse to the on side to
trigger an on command and a pulse to the off side to trigger an off
command.
Toggle Switch: A switch which has a single closure that pulses to

issue alternate commands. An example would be a single
pushbutton which when pressed, issues a pulse to turn the lighting
ON. When pressed again, it issues a second pulse through the
same set of contacts to alternate to an OFF command.
Maintained Switch: A simple on-off switch: The two terminals are

either connected together or not. The closure issues an ON
command; the release of the closure issues an off command. A
regular line-voltage household switch is an example of a
maintained contact.
Connecting Contact Closure Switches

Regardless of switch type used, it is recommended that all switch input wiring be
done prior to applying power to the logic board or at the very least with the terminal
blocks removed from the logic board.
Number of Contact Closure Switch Channels per Panel Type

Panel Type
Number of Contact
Input Channels
LiteKeeper 16 or 32
32
LiteKeeper-8
LiteKeeper-4
General Contact Closure Switch Wiring

This section describes the wiring for dry contact closure devices. There are input
wiring terminals on the LiteKeeper to allow for wiring of the dry contact closure
devices.
1.
All low-voltage wiring is Class 2 wiring.
2.
All low-voltage wiring must enter the cabinet into the LowVoltage section of the enclosure. Failure to separate high voltage
from low-voltage wiring may cause interference with logic board
function. All low-voltage wiring must be run in separate conduit
from line-voltage wiring.
3.
Use 18 AWG twisted, unshielded wire for all low-voltage dry

contact closure device wiring.
4.
Maximum length for dry contact closure device wiring is 1000

feet.
5.
Test all low-voltage wiring for shorts to AC ground before

connection to the LiteKeeper panel.
6.
When powering peripheral devices such as motion sensors and

photosensors from the LiteKeeper panel, there may be a
limitation on the number of sensors that can be supported. Please
contact Cooper Controls for specific information on device
limitations if using these devices.
7.
It is recommended that the terminal blocks be removed from the

board or power removed from the logic board when doing initial
switch input wiring.
8.
For LK16/32 only, ensure that the local remote jumpers have been
moved to the local position (over pins 2 & 3) for both jumpers (J5
& J6) to enable 24VDC to the low-voltage switch channels.
LiteKeeper Low-Voltage Switch Wiring
3-Way Applications
Three way applications are easily achieved with momentary and toggle type
switches. Because of their pulsed action, it is possible to bring the switch wiring to
the same wiring input channel. This greatly simplifies programming as well as frees
up other input channels if they are necessary. If switches are pilot lit, it is not
recommended to exceed 6 LED switches per channel or 3 Incandescent switches per
channel.
If employing standard (maintained) 3-way switches (24 VDC power only) then the
switch closure must close onto the "ON & +24" channels. That channel would be set
up as a maintained switch, just like it is if it was installed in a class 1 environment.
However, you will be employing your 3-way switches as a "low voltage device".
Instead of the hot providing current to a fixture, the hot (+24VDC powered from the
lighting controller) is closing across the input channel on the Cooper Controls Logic
Board. See below diagram for clarification.
3-Way Switches
On
+24
Controller Terminal Block
Connections
Pilot Lit Switches

Pilot lit switches can be used with a LiteKeeper 16 and 32 size system with the
addition of an accessory Lighted Switch Card. LiteKeeper 8 and LiteKeeper 4
currently do not support pilot lit switches.
Cooper Controls does not support switches obtained from other sources unless a
sample is sent to us for testing first in order to make certain that the switch is in the
proper voltage range, current draw, and has the correct resistors installed for proper
operation.
You can have no more than 75 LED lighted switches in a

LiteKeeper 16 panel, or 45 in a 32 size panel, with no more than
6 LEDs per lighted switch channel.
You can have no more than 38 incandescent lighted switches in a

LiteKeeper 16 panel, or 23 in a 32 size panel, with no more than
3 bulbs per LSC channel.
Lighted switch types i.e. LED or incandescent may not be mixed

within the same Lighted Switch Card.
The pilot light function requires an additional conductor for wiring

purposes. For a momentary switch with pilot light, this would
require 18-4. For a toggle switch with pilot light this would
require 18-3.
Please note that these figures may decrease if motion sensors, photosensors or digital
switches are being used with the controller. Please contact Technical Support with
the numbers and types of inputs you are using to determine if the controller will be
able to support them without overloading the power supply.
The lighted switch card comes in different versions including a pilot lit lighted
switch card and a locator light lighted switch card. With the pilot lit lighted switch
card, when the associated load is ON, the switch will be illuminated. With the
locator light lighted switch card, the switch will be dimly illuminated at all times
going full bright when the associated load is ON.
To wire a lighted switch:
1.
Verify that there is no continuity between the pilot light wire and
the ON, OFF and +24V legs. If a short is detected, do not wire to
the Lighted Switch Card as damage will result.
2.
Make certain that power is off to the logic board. Place override
switch in ALL ON position if lighting is necessary during wiring.
3.
Connect the switch to the low-voltage input terminals at the bottom

of the lighting control panel as appropriate for the type of switch,
see previous section on contact input switch wiring.
4.
Select one relay that will be the relay that triggers the illumination
of the switch. Connect the pilot light wire to the appropriate LSC
Relay channel. (DO NOT CONNECT PILOT LIGHT WIRE TO
MORE THAN ONE LSC RELAY CHANNEL. DAMAGE TO
THE LSC OR SWITCH MAY OCCUR.)
5.
Place jumper at the bottom of the lighted switch card over LED if
you are using LED type switches or INCANDESCENT if you are
using incandescent type switches.
6.
Once all wiring and jumper placement has been completed, power
up the logic panel. If panel has been overridden with the Standard
Override Card Switch while being wired, return switch to AUTO
or middle position to allow normal lighting to resume after making
certain that all necessary relays are on via the relay status LEDs.
Pilot light control lead.

Wire to LSC output
corresponding to relay
output being switched.
Relay 1
Relay 2
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
3
4
5
6
7
Relay 8
Relay 9
Relay 10
Relay 11
Relay 12
Relay 13
Relay 14
Relay 15
Relay 16
Relay 17
Relay 18
Relay 19
Relay 20
Relay 21
Relay 22
Relay 23
Relay 24
Relay 25
Relay 26
Relay 27
Relay 28
Relay 29
Relay 30
Relay 31
LSC Jumpers
Relay 32
GND
+24V
+24V
J1 J2 J3
Relay
LED
Incandescent
Relay 31
Relay 32
GND
+24V
+24V
CH3
+24
VDC
OFF
+24
VDC
OFF
ON
ON
Relay
CH2
OFF
CH1
+24
VDC
ON
J1 J2 J3
LED
Incandescent
Toggle type switch

Use #18-3
Momentary type switch

Use #18-4
LiteKeeper 16 or 32 with Lighted Switch Card Wired
Wiring of Commonly Supplied Wall Switches

Currently, when switches are ordered from Greengate, we supply standard option
switches unless specific additional features for switching are required. The wiring
for these standard switches is described below:
RS23X Model Switches

Models include ivory, white and gray configurations, key and pilot lit options.
Regardless of model, they will wire similarly. Pilot lights in these switches are
incandescent.
Pilot Lit
Switch
Non Pilot Lit

Switch
To +24V terminal on
lighting controller
switch channel
To ON terminal on
lighting controller
switch channel
To +24V terminal on
lighting controller
switch channel
To OFF terminal on
lighting controller
switch channel
To ON terminal on
lighting controller
switch channel
Pilot light: to LSO channel on
lighting controller switch
channel or Lighted Switch Card
To OFF terminal on
lighting controller
switch channel
Standard wall plates for RS23X switch models consist of 1 gang 1 switch, 1 gang 2
switch, 2 gang 3 switch, 2 gang 4 switch, and 8 Switch Master Plate stainless steel or
white models with no engraving. All other models are considered custom wall
plates. Standard plates will come with mounting brackets for the wall switches.
Custom plates do not require the mounting brackets.
Standard Plate
Mounting Bracket
Press switch in from front
of bracket until mounting
clips engage
Custom Plate
No Bracket Required
of switch plate until
mounting clips engage
AML Model Switches

Models include red and green LED versions.
Switch Back View

To lighting controller
+24V terminal on switch
wiring channel
Pilot Light
Not Used
NC
To lighting controller lighted

switch output or Lighted Switch
Card channel (this connection
is not necessary for non-pilot lit
version)
+24V
ON
To lighting controller ON
terminal on switch wiring
channel
NO
Jumper between switch common

terminal and LED + terminal (this
connection is not necessary for
non-pilot lit version)
Switch Side View

Use provided crimp-on
terminal disconnects to make
connections to switch terminals

of plate until mounting clips
engage
MOM-key, MAIN-key Model Wall Switches

Models include a maintained key switch and a toggle key switch.
Maintained Key Switch

Pin 1 - +24 - wire to channel +24V terminal
Pin 3 - ON - wire to channel ON terminal
Turn the key to the right for ON
Turn the key to the center for Off
Use #18-2 conductor cabling
Side View
Back View
2
3
1 8
4 5
7
6
Maintained Key Switch

Pin 1 - +24 - wire to channel +24V terminal
Pin 2 - ON - wire to channel ON terminal
Turn the key to the right to issue a
pulse to the switch channel.
Use #18-2 conductor cabling
Use provided crimp-on terminal
disconnects to make connections
to switch terminals.
Install mounting
nut and tighten
GM Model Switches
The GM series of low-voltage dry contact switches are available in a three wire
momentary (SPDT), three wire momentary locking (SPDT), and a two wire
maintained style (SPST). These switches can be used with any Greengate lighting
controller.
Maintained
Switch
(SPST)
To ON terminal on
lighting controller
switch channel
To +24V terminal on
lighting controller
switch channel
Momentary
Switch
(SPDT)
To ON terminal on
lighting controller
switch channel
To OFF terminal on
lighting controller
switch channel
Black Terminal
Screw
Black Terminal
Screw
Ground
not used
To +24V terminal on
lighting controller
switch channel
Ground
not used
Attach switch plate to

installed switch using
provided screws
Digita Switch Inputs

What is involved with Commissioning Digita
Switch Inputs?
Expectations on commissioning Digita switch inputs include:
Verify that wiring to terminal connection points is visually free of

shorts between terminals.
Use ohm test described in this chapter to verify that resistance of

the CAN H and CAN L are correct for a terminated network and
that there are no shorts between the ground and +24V wires.
It may be necessary to address switch stations if not done by the

electrical contractor.


out and programming is downloaded test each switch station to see
that it controls the correct loads and that the LEDs in the buttons
light properly.
Digita Switch Wiring

Each LiteKeeper 16 or 32 size panel is capable of supporting up to 28 Digita
Switch device stations and 1 Digita Switch Gateway (the number the controller is
able to support is dependent on the number of other low voltage devices wired that
require power from the logic board. Please contact Technical Support for exact
details of how many devices your logic board can power.)
LiteKeeper 8 controllers are capable of supporting up to 14 Digita Switch device
stations and 1 Digita Switch Gateway.
LiteKeeper 4 controllers do not currently support Digita Switches.
Digita Switches do not wire directly to the LiteKeeper panels but are wired to a
CAN Bus network that connects to the LiteKeeper through a Digita Switch
Gateway.
Digita switch stations are available in the following configurations:
Digita 1
Digita 5 1 Button
Digita 5 2 Button
Digita 5 3 Button
Digita 5 4 Button
Digita 5 5 Button
The Digita 1 Switch is a decorator style rocker switch which has no status feedback.
The Digita 5 switch has from one to five control buttons, each with an LED indicator
that can be programmed to provide either relay status feedback or switch status
feedback. With the Digita 5 switch model, each button of the Digita 5 switch must be
set up as a separate Switch Input.
General Digita Switch Wiring Instructions

This section describes the wiring for low-voltage Greengate Digita Switches. All
installation of Digita Devices must be performed by qualified personnel or service
technicians and follow National Electrical Code and any other codes that may apply.
1.
All Digita Switch wiring is Class II low-voltage wiring. Do not run

low-voltage wire in the same conduit as line-voltage wiring.
Ensure that the low voltage wiring is run into the lighting
controller through the low-voltage side of the lighting control
enclosure.
2.
Digita Switch cable type should be Cooper LCCNP (non plenum),

Cooper LCCP (plenum), Belden 1502R (non-plenum) or 1502P
(plenum).
For best network performance, one of the suggested cables should
be used. If the specified cable is not used and communications
problems occur that require troubleshooting assistance, additional
charges for support may be assessed.
3.
The Digita Switch network shall be run in a daisy chain

configuration with two distinct ends. The Digita Gateway may be
located anywhere within this daisy chain and does not have to be
an end device.
4.
The Digita Switch network shall not exceed 1000 feet.
5.
The Digita Switch station or gateway that is at the end of the

network must have a termination resistor installed across the CANL and CAN-H wires. Termination devices have been provided with
the Digita Gateway for this purpose. Alternately, the 120 ohm
resistor may be taken out of the termination device and wired
directly into the Digita Switch terminal block at the two end
locations.
6.
If splices are necessary, it is recommended that connections be

made using wire nuts. Make sure to use the appropriate size for
optimal connection.
7.
Cable connections to Digita 5 switches and Digita Gateways are

made to a removable 5-way connector block located at the rear of
the Digita station. Digita 1 switch connections are made to the
provided pigtail.
8.
Wiring should not be done with power to the switch network.

Disconnect the Digita Gateway power wiring from the lighting
panel while wiring additional Digita devices.
9.
Connection to the lighting control panel is made through the

provided phone style connection cables. The LiteKeeper 16 and
32 panel will use the white RJ to DB9 pin connector to connect the
Digita Gateway to the lighting controller. The LiteKeeper 8 will
use the Gray phone style cable to connect. This cable is polarity
sensitive and has both ends labeled. Make sure to connect the
correctly labeled end to the lighting controller and Smartjack end
to the Digita Gateway.
10. If using a LiteKeeper 8, it will be necessary to set the com port as a

Digita Switch port.
from station to station. Total network length can not exceed 1000 feet. The Digita Gateway
device may be anywhere in the switch network. The two end devices must have the 120
Ohm termination devices provided with the Digita Gateway installed to terminate the CAN-H
and CAN-L wires.
To Lighting Controller
Digita Switch Port
Digita
Gateway
Digita 5 - 2B Digita 5 - 3B
Peripheral Power Connector
Digita 5 - 5B
Digita 1
Network Terminator
120 Ohm Resistor
Digita Network
Cooper LC Cable or Belden
1502 Wiring Scheme
GND
(black)
CAN-L
(blue)
Green (Ground)
Blue/White (CAN-L)
GND
CANL
Digita 1
Pigtail
CANH
V+
CAN-H
(white)
V+
(red)
GND
(black)
Digita 5 & Digita

Gateway
Terminal Block
CAN-L
(blue)
Blue (CAN-H)
Green/White (Power)
Shield drain wire is not used and should be taped

to prevent shorts
CAN-H
(white)
V+
(red)
Digita Wiring Detail

DC Ground - Black
CAN_L - Blue
DigitaSwitch
Network
CAN_H - White
Power (24VDC) - Red
Digita Network Termination Wiring Detail
Digita Switch
Gateway Front
View
LIG
HT
ING
CONTROLLER
Local Remote Jumpers

moved to the LOCAL position
(jumper over pins 2 & 3)
DIGITA
Wire provided phone style

cable to DIGITA jack on LK
and to Digita Switch Gateway
Digita Switch
Gateway Back View
Cabling is Cooper LC Cable,

Belden 1502R, or Belden 1502P
BLACK wire from Digita

Switch Gateway GND to
LK DC GND
RED wire from Digita
Switch Gateway V+ to LK
+24VDC
Digita Connection to an LK 16 or 32 Size Panel

LiteKeeper-8
Low-Voltage Section
RS-232 port must be set up for Digita
Switch use. Please use option 8 off the
main LiteKeeper menu. Refer to the
Keypad Programming Manual for further
information.
Cabling is Cooper LC
Cable, Belden 1502R,
or Belden 1502P
Digita Switch
Gateway
Back View

Switch Gateway V+
to LK8 +24VDC
BLACK wire from

Digita Switch Gateway
GND to LK8 DC GND
Digita Switch
Gateway Front
View
SMART JACK
LIGHTING
LLER
CONTRO
Digita Connection to an LK8 Panel
Past Wiring Information

In the past, Greengate has recommended CAT5 wiring instead of the current Belden
1502 wiring implementation. If commissioning a site prior to the change in
recommendation, it is important to note that all eight conductors of the CAT5 cable
will be used to connect to the Digita network. Power and Ground are tripled to
prevent voltage drop problems.
Green, Brown, Orange = Ground
Blue/White = CAN-L
Blue = CAN-H
Green/White, Brown/White, Orange/White = +24VDC
CAT5 Digita Backbone Network
Digita Configuration Settings

In order to be programmed in the Greengate lighting control system, every Digita
Switch station must be addressed.
Switches within the same network may have the same base address set if they are the
same model switch and the buttons on the wall switch stations perform exactly the
same functions. This simplifies programming and allows for easier set up of three
and four way switch applications.
Each Digita network is self contained allowing for these same addresses to be used
on other Digita networks as necessary.
Digita 1 Switch Addressing

There are sixteen available Digita 1 Switch addresses per Digita Switch network. To
address the switch, remove the face plate to expose the address wheel. 0 through 15
are valid addresses.
Address 0 is set when the small arrow on the rotary dial points directly up. Rotate the
address wheel to the right observing the number of clicks to set the desired address,
i.e. from 0 position, three clicks right would be address
Digita 1 Switch
Face Plate Removed
Address Wheel
Digita-1 Switch with Button Frame Removed
Once the address is set, replace the switch button front by lining up the lever opening
in the lower left corner and inserting the snap in tabs into the frame. Once in place,
make certain that the service lever is pressed in or the switch will not operate
properly.
Digita 5 Switch Addressing

When the initial address is set, a base address is assigned to the Digita Switch
station. Each button determines its address from the base address set. It is important
to set addresses that will not overlap with additional station buttons. To prevent this
from occurring please follow the chart below for addressing the stations.
Digita 5 Switch
Address Dial
Detail
SW1
BCD
BCD
0 12
78 9A
789A
SW2
EF
B CD
Switch 2
Address Dial
3456
01
EF 2
3456
Switch 1
Address Dial
789A
CanH
V+
0 12
3456
EF
GND
CanL
Station Number
SW1 SW2
Station 1 Base Address
0*
*Address 1-5 is not a valid address for a Digita 5 station.

There are 64 available programmable switches in a Greengate panel that may be
programmed to operate from any Digita Switch button. For example, if using all
Digita 5 - 5 button stations and all buttons are being used, only 12 stations may be
addressed (12 x 5 buttons = 60 switches). A thirteenth address may be set but the 5th
button will not operate as this exceeds the 64 switch limit.
Digita 5 Button Location Identification:

When programming Digita 5 switch stations, it will be necessary to identify the
button location on each switch station along with the base address of the station.
Button location may differ depending on the button configuration of the Digita 5
station.
Digita 5-5B
Digita 5-4B
Digita 5-3B
Digita 5-2B
1
2
3
4
5
2
3
4
5
2
3
4
Digita 5-1B
Digita Switch Commissioning Testing

Once Digita network wiring is complete, it is recommended that the following tests
be conducted before power is applied to the Digita network.
1.
Power down the Digita network by removing the Digita Gateway

power and communications cable connections to the Greengate lighting
control panel.
2.
With an ohm meter, at any Digita station, measure between the CAN-L
and CAN-H wires. The measurement should be close to 60 ohms for a
properly terminated network. If not close to 60 ohms, check that the
termination resistors are installed at the two end locations.
3.
With an ohm meter, at any Digita station, measure between the +V and
GND wires. The measurement should be greater than 2 megohms.
4.
CAN-H wire and the +V and CAN-L wire. Repeat this test measuring
between the GND and CAN-H and CAN-L wire. All measurements
should be greater than 2 megohms.
5.
If these measurements are correct, proceed with powering the Digita

network. If incorrect, troubleshoot wiring to determine cause or contact
technical support for further assistance.
Motion Sensor Inputs

What is involved with Commissioning Motion
Sensor Inputs?
Expectations on motion sensor inputs include:


for programming.



necessary.
Connecting Motion Sensors

Motion sensors connect into the contact closure switch channels available on the
LiteKeeper controllers.
Greengate sensors have been tested with our systems and because of this we know
the total number that a panels power supply can support. If motion sensors are
being used on a job site that have not been provided by Cooper, please keep in mind
that the panel power supply may not be able to power the equivalent number of
sensors. In the event that the sensor power draw exceeds the capabilities of the
panel, external power supplies or power packs may be employed. If power packs are
being used, isolated outputs (dry contacts) must be used for the connection to the
lighting control system. This will prevent bucking power supplies.
Panel type
Greengate
Greengate Greengate
PIR Sensor DT Sensor Ultrasonic

LiteKeeper 32
90
36
45
LiteKeeper 16
150
60
75
LiteKeeper 8
40
16
20
LiteKeeper 4
40
16
20
* These figures are contingent on no other peripheral devices being powered from
the logic panel. If using Digita Switches, Photosensors or Lighted Switches with
your controller in addition to the motion sensors, please contact Technical Support to
determine the total power draw. If it becomes necessary to go beyond the number of
sensors that the panel power supply can support, power packs are available.
General Motion Sensor Wiring Instructions

This section describes the wiring for low-voltage Greengate motion sensors. There
are input wiring terminals on the LiteKeeper to allow for wiring of these devices.
1.
2.
3.
Use 18 AWG - 3 conductor twisted, unshielded wire.
4.

feet.
5.

connection to the LiteKeeper panel. Verify there are no shorts
between the motion sensor ground wire and +24V and On wires.
6.

7.
Local Remote Jumpers moved to

the LOCAL position (jumper over
pins 2 & 3)
+24VDC
(Red Wire)
Black
REM PWR DC GND

(Black Wire)
ON
(Blue Wire)
Typical Greengate
Motion Sensor Wiring
LiteKeeper 16 and 32 Greengate Sensor Wiring Detail
Black
ON (Blue Wire)
+24VDC
(Red Wire)
Contact Input Photocell
Typical Greengate
REM PWR DC
GND (Black Wire)
Bla
ck
REM PWR DC GND

(Black Wire)
ON
(Blue Wire)
+24VDC
(Red Wire)
Black
Typical Greengate
Special Considerations when using Motion

Sensors with a Greengate Controller
The use of motion sensors with the Greengate system involves putting a little thought
into the programming of the product prior to implementation. If the motion sensor is
going to act entirely on its own to control a relay, there are few problems. The
challenge arises when the motion sensor and another input, i.e. switch, other motion
sensor, or time schedule, interact to control the same relay.
When a motion sensor is used in conjunction with another input, challenges can arise
due to the fact that motion sensors are a maintained type of contact that do not
retrigger until after motion ceases. The example below illustrates this concept:
Example: A custodian comes into the room and triggers the motion sensor.
While he is still in the room cleaning, a time schedule turns the lights
off. Because the motion sensor is still triggered from his initial entry
into the room, it does not send out a new on command. He can sit and
wave at the motion sensor and the lights will not retrigger. In fact by
causing more motion, he increases the time that the motion sensor stays
closed without sending out a new command. The motion sensor must
reset itself after a period of no motion before sending out a new
command.
With the LiteKeeper family version 3.0 and above the ability of prioritizing
commands allows for us to prevent this example from occurring. This is due to the
fact that we can set the priority of the motion sensor to be higher than the off
command of the time schedule. Therefore, if the off schedule occurs when there is
motion going on, the sensor will cause the lighting to stay on due to the fact that its
on command is a higher priority than the off command of the schedule. The lights
will turn off when the sensor times out. Please note that priority interactions need to
be well thought out before using this type of scenario as they can introduce new
challenges.
It is always recommended that whenever possible, motion sensors should run their
own timers. If there is a timer set up in the lighting system, it may cause problems
with the application as shown in the example below:
Example: The timer on the motion sensor is set for 10 minutes. The timer
in the controller is set for 5 minutes. Motion is sensed and the lights
turn ON. Motion continues in the room. After 5 minutes, the
controller time turns off the lights even though there is still motion in
the room. This is due to the lack of the maintained contact retriggering.
In addition, the problem is worsened as it will be 10 minutes from the
last motion sensed before the contact can retrigger.
With this said, there may be a time where the timer does need to be run through our
system. In these situations, it is best to set the timer on the physical motion sensor
down into the lowest range possible, preferably in the seconds range and set the
contact up as a momentary switch in the system. In the controller, you would set the
specific timer desired. When the motion sensor triggers, an ON command goes to
our contacts. The relays linked respond and the programmed timer starts running.
Because the timer is set so low on the motion sensor, the hope is that the sensor will
retrigger often during the timers time period, resetting the timer in the controller
with each ON pulse. Because the switch is set up as a momentary switch, the sensor
issuing an OFF will not cause an off to occur to the lights. All off function will be
handled by the timer set up in the controller. Please be aware that if the motion
sensor does not retrigger from continuous motion, the lights still may turn off despite
the motion in the area. This application depends on the contacts of the motion sensor
retriggering to cause our timer to restart.
Photosensor Inputs
What is involved with Commissioning Photosensor
Inputs?
Expectations on commissioning photosensor inputs include:
Verify photosensor wiring to terminal connection points is free of


for programming.

Verify that the photosensor placement is optimal for the space


out and programming is downloaded test each photosensor by
covering it over to verify it switches lighting properly.
Adjust sensitivity and deadband for sensor if necessary.
Connecting Photosensors
Photosensors connect into the contact closure switch channels available on the
There is a limit to the number of contact input photosensors that a Greengate panel
can support:
Panel type
PPS-4
PPS-5
Former
PPS-4/
PPS-5
LiteKeeper 32
45
45
LiteKeeper 16
75
15
75
LiteKeeper 8
20
20
LiteKeeper 4
20
20
* These figures are contingent on no other peripheral devices being powered from
the logic panel. If using Digita switches, motion sensors or lighted switches with
your controller in addition to the photosensors, please contact Technical Support to
determine the total power draw.
General Photosensor Wiring Instructions

This section describes the wiring for low-voltage Greengate photosensors. There are
input wiring terminals on the LiteKeeper to allow for wiring of these devices.
1.
2.
3.
4.

feet.
5.

connection to the LiteKeeper panel. Verify there are no shorts
between the photosensor ground wire and +24V and On wires.
6.

7.

pins 2 & 3)
+24VDC
(Red Wire)
PPS4
Black
Yellow & White
wires not used
REM PWR DC GND

(Black Wire)
ON
(Blue
Wire)
Contact Input
Photosensor
Wiring
PPS5
+24VDC
(Red Wire)
Black
ON
(White Wire)
LiteKeeper 16 or 32 Photosensor Wiring
PPS5
ON (Blue Wire)
Black
+24VDC (Red Wire)
Contact Input Photocell
PPS4
ON (Blue Wire)
Black
+24VDC (Red Wire)
Yellow & White

wires not used
REM PWR DC GND (Black Wire)
LiteKeeper 8 Photosensor Wiring
PPS5
Black
ON
(White Wire)
+24VDC
(Red Wire)
Contact Input
Photosensor
Wiring
ON
(Blue Wire)
Yellow & White

wires not used
ck
+24VDC
(Red Wire)
PPS4
REM PWR DC GND

(Black Wire)
Bla
Black
LiteKeeper 4 Photosensor Wiring
PPS-4 Photosensor Configuration

Notes on Placement
Window Application
When used in a window application, the PPS-4 should be located within 12 feet of
the window and away from any direct light from controlled fixtures. Ideally, locating
the photosensor between the window and first row of fixtures is recommended.
Rotate the PPS-4 so that the light sensor is nearest the window.
Window
Light Fixture
100 Degree
Field of View
Locate sensor within 12

feet of window
Skylight Application
There are two options for mounting a sensor that will be looking at contributed light
from a skylight. It is important that the sensor be mounted such that it is not looking
at direct sunlight as this will cause the sensor to exceed the maximum of its range.
To prevent this, locate the sensor either on the South wall of the skylight well
looking North (sensor should be rotated so that the sensors eye is at the top) or
mount on the ceiling next to the skylight looking down at the floor (sensor should be
rotated so that the sensors eye is closest to the skylight well).\
Skylight
100 Degree
Field of View
PPS-4
OR
Light Fixture
100 Degree
Field of View
Adjusting the Photosensor

Display
Light Sensor
Mounting
Screw Hole
Menu
Button
MENU
FC
8.7
SELECT
Select
Button
Mounting
Screw Hole
Status LED
FC
8.7 Menu: Live Reading
CTRL
ON Menu: Override Screen
ON
7.5 Menu: ON Threshold
OFF
TIME
SETUP
1 1 Menu: OFF Threshold

10M Menu: Time Delay
Menu: Submenu Options
TEST OFF Sub Menu: Test Mode

Sub Menu: Occupancy Mode
OCC
dIS (not used - set at disabled)

Sub Menu: Logic Inversion
OUT NORM (not used - set at NORM)

SERVICE
Sub Menu: Service

(not used)
Step 1: Verify Control Overriding the Sensor

If the PPS-4 is wired to a lighting control panel, it is recommended that the sensor be
programmed into the lighting controller prior to proceeding with these steps to allow
for test of functionality. Remember to program the sensor as a maintained contact.
1.
Pop the cover off of the photosensor to expose the Menu and Select
buttons and display.
2.
If the display is not illuminated, press the menu button. The display
will illuminate.
3.
Press the menu button until the CTRL screen is displayed.
4.
Press the Select button to toggle the override between ON and OFF.
The display will update with the overridden status. Verify that the
lighting responds.
5.
The override will remain active until the menu button is used to cycle
back through the menu options or will time out automatically in 10
minutes.
Step 2: Setting the ON Threshold

It is best to set the PPS-4 switching thresholds when the space is at the light level
that the lights should turn ON. The default setting is 7.5FC.
1.
Make certain that the lighting is at the level in the space where you
want the lighting to turn on.
2.
Press the menu button until the display is at the CTRL menu.
3.
Press the Select button until the display reads OFF and the lights are
OFF.
4.
Press and hold the select button for 2 seconds until MEM appears at the
top of the sensors display.
5.
Press the Menu button until the FC Reading Menu is displayed. Make
certain when reading this display that you are not blocking the light
source from reaching the sensor. Make note of the current light level.
This value will be the desired FC target value for the ON threshold.
6.
Press the menu button until the ON Threshold Menu is displayed (ON
XX).
7.
Press the Select button until the closest FC value to the noted reading is
displayed.
8.
When the desired FC threshold is displayed, press and hold down the
select button for about 2 seconds until MEM appears at the top of the
sensors display.
Step 3: Setting the OFF Threshold

The PPS-4 will calculate a 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% deadband value for the OFF
based on the ON threshold being used. The default setting is 50% deadband. It is
important to have adequate separation between the ON and OFF thresholds to
prevent cycling due to thresholds being crossed when lighting is switched on and off.
To prevent this from occurring:
1.
Set up the ON threshold.
2.
3.
Press the Select button until the display reads CTRL ON and the lights
are ON.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Press the Select button until the display reads CTRL OFF and the lights
are OFF.
8.
9.
10. Take the initial reading with the lights on and subtract the figure from
the reading with the lights off. This is the minimum deadband in FC
that needs to be maintained to prevent the lights from cycling.
11. Press the Menu button until the OFF Threshold Menu is displayed
(OFF XX).
12. Press the Select button to cycle through the available OFF thresholds
and select the appropriate setting.
13. Press and hold down the Select button for approx. 2 seconds until
MEM appears at the top of the sensors display window.
Step 4 Setting the Time Delay

The time delay setting determines how long the light level must be above the OFF
threshold before the lighting turns OFF. The default setting is 10 minutes. To change
this setting:
1.
Press the menu button until the display shows the Time Delay Menu
(TIME #M). This is the current time delay setting.
2.
Press the Select button until the desired choice is shown. Choices
include 3 minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes and 30 minutes.
3.
When the desired number of minutes is displayed, press and hold down
the select button for about 2 seconds until MEM appears at the top of
the sensors display.
Testing the Sensor

It is possible to place the sensor in test mode. In this mode, the sensor will
immediately switch lighting on or off upon the cross of the on or off thresholds. If a
sensor is left in test mode, it will automatically revert to normal operation after 30
minutes.
1.
Press the menu button until the display reads SETUP.
2.
Press the select button once. The display will read TEST.
3.
Press the select button again. The display will read TEST ON and the
sensor LED will flash. The sensor is now in test mode.
4.
Once test is complete, process steps 1-3 again to turn off test mode.
PPS-5 Photosensor Configuration

Notes on Placement
Position the sensor so that the sensor window is North facing and is not viewing
artificial light from the controlled load.
Mount the sensor on any approved weatherproof outdoor box. Mounting stem screws
into 14 threaded hole. It can also be mounted in a knockout ( 7/8 hole).
Make certain that connection is weather tight by using suitable tape or sealant on the
threading.
Adjusting the Photosensor

A slide adjustment has been provided to change the switchpoint of the PPS-5 sensor.
If the sensor is triggering too late, move the slide bar over the window until the
desired timing is achieved. Optimally, it is best to make the adjustment to the slide
bar when the light level is at the switching point. Move the slide bar across the
window until the lighting turns on. There is a 2-3 second time delay before lights are
switched when the threshold is reached.
PPS-5
Move slide adjustment
over the sensor window to
make sensor trip earlier
Sensor Window
Slide Adjustment
Special Considerations when using Photosensors

Photosensors could potentially have some of the same challenges that motion sensors
do in implementation due to the nature of how maintained contacts work. If it is
desired to turn lighting on by photosensor then off at a time schedule then reevaluate the photosensor the next morning it will be necessary to use either priorities
or masks to achieve this application. This interaction will be explored in detail in the
section on priorities.
Sharing Contact Input Switches Between LiteKeeper

Controllers (LK16 or 32 only)
In a system with more than one LiteKeeper 16 or 32 size enclosure, you may want
to have an input control relays in more than one panel. This is called "sharing" the
inputs.
Notes on Sharing Inputs:
Inputs can be shared between no more than 5 LiteKeeper panels.
Inputs that can be shared include non-pilot lit momentary,

maintained or toggle type switches. Digita Switches and
lighted switches may not be shared in this manner.
Inputs can not be shared between LiteKeeper-8 and LiteKeeper4 panels.
In this configuration, only one panel supplies the +24VDC to the

center pin (+24) of the switch input terminals for all the
LiteKeeper panels. This panel is known as the LOCAL panel and
must have the Local/Remote configuration jumpers J5 & J6 set to
the LOCAL position.
The other LiteKeeper, known as the REMOTE LiteKeeper, must

have their Local/Remote J5 & J6 jumpers set in the REMOTE
mode of operation. This disables their +24VDC power supply and
thus prevents "bucking" of all the connected power supplies.
Steps to Share Switch Inputs:

1.
Verify that all panels that are sharing switch inputs are in
the REMOTE position for their TB3 power supply
LOCAL/REMOTE jumpers to protect the panel during

wiring.
2.
Run 18AWG twisted pair from the LOCAL LiteKeeper

remote power terminal (TB3) to the REMOTE
LiteKeeper(s) remote power terminal (TB3). Be certain
there are no shorts to AC ground. Connect +24VDC from
the LOCAL panel to the +24VDC in the REMOTE panel.
Connect GND from the LOCAL panel to GND in the
REMOTE panel.
3.
The low-voltage contact input wires should be brought

into the LOCAL panel enclosure and wired to the lowvoltage terminal blocks as usual.
4.
Parallel the wiring from the ON and OFF of the LOCAL

panel switch terminal block to the ON and OFF of the
REMOTE panel terminal block. It is not necessary to
parallel the wiring from the +24V feed between the
panels.
5.
Once all wiring is complete, move the LOCAL/REMOTE

jumper in the LOCAL panel to the LOCAL position.
6.
Program the switch channels in each controller to run the

appropriate relay and for the proper switch type.
Sharing Switch Inputs between Panels
Line Voltage Automatic Turn Off Switch

The Line Voltage Automatic Turn Off Switch is a high voltage accessory that
operates on the load side of the LiteKeeper relays. It is a line voltage switch that
looks to the user as a familiar, conventional wall switch with a locator light.
The key feature of the switch is that it mechanically resets to the off position
automatically when input power to the unit is interrupted for five seconds or longer.
It allows for a single relay to control multiple spaces through time schedule control
but allows for individual space override. In this configuration, we install line voltage
automatic turn-off switches in each office and feed them all from a single relay. We
then program the relay to perform the special Sentry Warn function when the sweep
off occurs which will turn the relay off for 1 second, stay on for 1 minute then turn
off for 5 seconds and then turn the relay back on. This will force all switches to their
off position at sweep time. When the occupants wish to turn the lights on again they
simply move the switch to the on position.
Typical Line Voltage Automatic Turn Off Switch Application
The Automatic Turn Off Switch is available in either a toggle or decorator type
configuration. Both styles are available in a 5 amp and 20 amp version. It is
important that very lightly loaded circuits use the 5 amp version of the switch to
prevent switching problems.
This device was pioneered by Sentry LLC, which produces the Sentry Switch. While
others produce similar devices, this type of switch is often referred to as a Sentry
Switch in much the same way tissues are referred to as Kleenex.
Wiring Information
The Line Voltage Automatic Turn Off Switch wires in series down line of our relay.
For a single switch application, the switch has two black wires for installation. For
three way switch applications, the switch has a black, red and yellow wire to allow
for the proper traveler wiring. Please note that in 3-way application, both switches
will need to be in the OFF position for the lighting to be off.
Line Voltage Automatic

Turn Off Switch
Lighting
Load
Area 1
Relay Card
Neutral
To Load
Lighting
Load
Area 2
Neutral

Turn Off Switch
To Neutral
To Circuit
Breaker
Line Voltage Automatic Turn Off Switch Single Switch Application
Three Way
Turn Off Switch
Re
d
d
Re
llow Yello
w
Ye
Relay Card
To Load
Black
Black
Lighting
Load
Area 1
To Circuit
Breaker
Neutral
To Neutral
Line Voltage Automatic Turn Off Switch Three Way Application
Programming Information
A relay that has a Line Voltage Automatic Turn Off switch wired should be
programmed with a Sentry 1 Type warn off for proper operation. Any low-voltage
switches that operate this relay should have the Warn Off option active. These items
will be covered in the programming section of this manual.
Telephone Interface Module (TIM)
What is involved with Commissioning Telephone

Interface Module Inputs?
Expectations on commissioning TIM inputs include:
Verify that wiring to the TIM is correct.

out and programming is downloaded test each TIM Code to see
that it controls the correct loads. If phone line is not yet installed
for the TIM, this verification can be done using the Keeper
Enterprise Software to issue remote commands.
TIM Connection
1.
Locate the provided 6-wire phone style communication cable and

plug one end into the telephone style RS-232 communication jack
connector on the logic panel.
2.
Locate the TIM/MODEM connector adapter head. Plug other end

of the 6-wire phone style communications cable into the adapter
head.
3.
Plug the TIM/MODEM connector adapter head into the RS-232

port on the back of the TIM 4.
4.
Connect a phone cable to the dedicated line and plug the other end
in the TO LINE jack on the back of the TIM.
5.
Connect the AC adapter to TIM and plug it into a 120V AC

receptacle. TIM is ready for operation after power is applied, the
status LED goes off, and the VOICE and DTMF LEDs blink five
times to signal that initialization is complete. (If power has been
off for several days, press the reset pushbutton on the rear panel for
five seconds to erase any spurious password.)
6.
Set dipswitch 8 off.
TIM Operation
It is possible to hook a TIM into a standalone panel to provide the site with the
capability of dialing in to control lighting loads on and off. It also allows for modem
access from a remote machine with Keeper Enterprise Software. Phone override
codes are programmed as TIM commands or remotes in the LiteKeeper panels.
Remote numbers default to TIM1 through TIM64 in the LiteKeeper System. It is
possible of changing these defaults to other numbers through the Keeper Enterprise
Software.
Please note: If using older TIMs it is important that users wait for the
voice prompts to finish before entering touch-tone data. If touch-tones
are entered during a voice prompt, the TIM may not respond properly.
In addition, at the first voice prompt, if more than thirty seconds pass without a touch
tone entry, modem tones will be heard. At any other prompt, if touch-tone entries
are not made, the TIM will hang up.
1.
Dial the telephone number to which TIM is connected.
2.
TIM answers with "Hello, welcome to TIM. Please press one to

continue or zero to quit. Press the "1" key to move to the next
voice prompt. Press 0 to hang up.
3.
If a password has been previously set up, the next prompt is,
"Please enter your password to continue." A password consists of
four digits followed by the "#" key. Three attempts are allowed
after which TIM will hang up. This prompt will be skipped if a
password has not been set up.
4.
The TIM will ask you to "Please enter your user area number
followed by the pound sign" at which time you will need to enter
your TIM code followed by the "#" key.
5.
You will then hear "Please press one for on, zero for off." Enter 1
to turn your lights ON or 0 for OFF.
6.
You will then hear Please press one to continue or zero to quit.
Press 1 if you wish to issue another command or 0 to quit and hang
up.
7.
If you have entered information that the TIM can not process, the
TIM will state "I'm sorry, that's incorrect," and repeat the last
prompt. Entries that cause this error are:
a user area number greater than five digits
a user area number containing the " * " key
a key other than "1" or "0" when these keys have been
requested
Special Notes about TIM
If TIM has been powered down for a long period of time, when
powered up initially, it may request that the user enter a password.
To clear this password and allow entry, hold the reset button for a
period of about 15 seconds. The password will be cleared.
To enter a new password into the TIM to add an extra level of

protection. Upon hearing the prompt, "Please enter your user
area number", enter " * * * # ". This will invoke the prompt,
"Please enter the new password followed by the pound sign."

Key in the new password of exactly four digits followed by the "#"
key. If incorrect, TIM will say, "I'm sorry, that's incorrect." The
new password will not be stored, and any previous password will
remain in effect. If the password format is correct, TIM will
respond with "Thank you" to confirm that the new password was
stored in memory.
In a Standalone Application TIM must be connected to the

controller through the COM port of the LiteKeeper panel. Please
ensure that Bit Switch 8 is off on the back of the TIM for proper
operation.
Additional Accessory Options

Additional accessory options are available for LiteKeepers that will be discussed in
later chapters of this manual. These include:
Modem
Ethernet Interface Modules
Yes Box, Automation Interface Modules
Chapter 6 Keypad Programming

Tutorial
Overview
The purpose of this section is to familiarize you with the process of programming a
LiteKeeper using the keypad and LCD display. This is a brief tutorial of the
common functions which should leave you comfortable enough to begin
programming the LiteKeeper unit in the field. For further information, refer to the
LiteKeeper Keypad Manual provided with our controllers.
Programming Keypad
Programming is entered via a 16 button keypad. Keypad layout and key functions
are as follows:
0 thru 9 - Used for moving through programming menus, entering

time and date values and entering relay, switch and TIM options.
NOTE: most numeric entries are ended by hitting the # key (Save
key - see below)
0 thru 1 - OFF or ON input. 0 represents OFF, 1 represents ON.
1 thru 8 - Day of week and holiday entry. 1=Mon., 2=Tues.,

3=Wed., 4=Thurs., 5=Fri., 6=Sat., 7=Sun., 8=Holiday
Keypad Programming Tutorial 6-1
- Quit key - leaves current prompt without saving any recent

keystrokes.
# - Save key - saves current user entry and leaves prompt.
A - Sunup - selects astronomical clock's sunup time as the time

entry. Also used to scroll to the right if information does not fit on
one screen.
B - Sundown - selects astronomical clock's sundown time as the

time entry. Also used to scroll to the left if information does not fit
on one screen.
C - In Review Schedule mode, allows you to change the schedule.
D - In Astro Clock, acts as a negative key to make the current entry

negative. In Review Schedules, deletes the displayed schedule.
This section discusses the initial panel setup. It assumes that the enclosure and panel
have been installed per the provided installation instructions. In these steps, you will
prepare the hardware configuration and clear the panels memory in preparation for
programming.
Screen Layout
The screens are laid out in a top level menu with sublevel menus beneath. Below is
a map of the layout of the screens in the LiteKeeper system.
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 1 FOR
RELAY OPTIONS
PUSH 2 FOR
TIME SCHEDULE
OPTIONS
PUSH 3 FOR
SWITCH OPTIONS
PUSH 4 FOR
REMOTE OPTIONS
PUSH 1 TO
TURN A RELAY
ON OR OFF
PUSH 1 TO REVIEW
SCHEDULES
PUSH 1 TO LINK
SWITCH TO RELAYS
PUSH 2 TO
VIEW RELAY
STATUS
PUSH 2 TO
CHANGE
SCHEDULES
PUSH 3 TO
CHANGE RELAY
TYPE
PUSH 4 TO
SETUP RELAY
WARN
PUSH 5 FOR
MASK SETUP
PUSH 6 FOR
CLOCK/DATE
FUNCTIONS
PUSH 7 FOR
LOGS
PUSH 1 TO LINK
REMOTE TO RELAYS
PUSH 1 TO CHANGE
CLOCK TIME
PUSH 1 TO VIEW
RELAY LOGS
PUSH 2 TO CHANGE
SWITCH TIMER
PUSH 2 TO CHANGE
REMOTE TIMER
PUSH 2 TO CHANGE
CLOCK DATE
PUSH 2 TO VIEW
SWITCH LOGS
PUSH 3 TO
CREATE NEW
SCHEDULES
PUSH 3 TO CHANGE
SWITCH TYPE
PUSH 3 TO CHANGE
REMOTE
COMMAND/PRIORITY
PUSH 3 TO CHANGE
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
PUSH 3 TO VIEW
REMOTE LOGS
PUSH 4 TO
DELETE A
SCHEDULE
PUSH 4 TO CHANGE
SWITCH
COMMAND/PRIORITY
PUSH 4 TO ENABLE
REMOTE WARN
PUSH 4 TO CHANGE
ASTRONOMICAL
CLOCK SETTINGS
PUSH 4 TO VIEW
POWER UP/DN LOGS
PUSH 5 TO ENABLE
SWITCH WARN
PUSH 5 TO ENABLE
REMOTE MASKING
PUSH 5 TO CHANGE
HOLIDAY DATES
PUSH 5 TO VIEW
RELAY RUNTIME
PUSH 6 TO ENABLE
SWITCH MASKING
Part A: Preparing the Panel for Programming:

Follow the steps of this tutorial to learn the programming steps for the LiteKeeper.
When commissioning a panel, you should be sure that the panels basic hardware
configuration settings have been made prior to doing any lighting control
programming. In addition, it is always recommended that the panels memory be
cleared prior to programming a new panel to ensure that the panels test settings have
been eliminated.
Step 1: Initial Power Up

1.
Plug in the communications ribbon cable from the logic board into
the Standard Override Card pin connector located at the bottom of
the enclosure.
2.
Plug in the power wire (red and blue wires connected to the white
Molex connector) to the matching transformer wire. The controller
display should power up and display the MAIN SCREEN.
3.
Once power is applied, make certain that the status LED is flashing
in the upper left corner of the logic board. If the status LED is not
flashing, power down the logic board and check all connections. If
the problem persists, contact technical support.
Step 2: Clearing Panel Memory

We recommend that before you begin programming the LiteKeeper that you clear
panel memory. This assures you that you are beginning with a clean database. To
clear the panel memory:
1.
Place the Override Switch on the Override Card in the ON

position. This will turn on all the relays. If the Override Switch is
left in the AUTO position, all relays will turn off after the memory
is cleared.
2.
Press and hold the star (*) button on the keypad.
3.
Continue to hold the star (*) button. Press and release the RESET
button in the upper right corner of the panel.
4.
The display will read Initializing . and then return back to the
main display. Once the display is back at the main display, release
the star (*) button.
Step 3: Setting the Panel Jumpers

Be sure the two Local/Remote jumpers (J5 and J6) are in the proper position.
Jumpers J5 and J6 must be in the LOCAL position in order to supply +24 VDC to
the switch input center pin. The +24 VDC to the switch input terminals is disabled
when these jumpers are in the REMOTE position. The jumpers are factory set to the
REMOTE position for panel protection during installation.
Step 4: Set the Panel Clock, Date and Daylight

Savings
Setting the Clock:
PUSH 1 TO CHANGE
CLOCK TIME
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 6 FOR
CLOCK/DATE
FUNCTIONS
TIME: HH:MM
ENTER HOURS,MINS
PUSH # TO SAVE
PUSH * TO QUIT
1.
From the Main Display, press the 6 key. A secondary menu will
appear.
2.
Press the 1 key to change the time.
3.
Enter the current time using military time to distinguish AM from

PM.
4.
Press the # sign to save the entry.
5.
Press and release the * key two times to navigate back to the main
display.
Setting the Date:

LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 6 FOR
CLOCK/DATE
FUNCTIONS
PUSH 2 TO CHANGE
CLOCK DATE
DATE: DD/MM/YY
ENTER MON,DAY,YR
PUSH # TO SAVE
PUSH * TO QUIT
1.
appear.
2.
Press the 2 key to change the date.
3.
Enter in the current date.
4.
5.
display.
Setting the Daylight Savings Option:

Daylight Savings is automatically enabled by default. If your area observes daylight
savings time, it is not necessary to adjust this entry. If your area does not observe
daylight savings, you will need to turn the Daylight Savings feature off.
PUSH 3 TO CHANGE
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 6 FOR
CLOCK/DATE
FUNCTIONS
AUTO DLS: ON
1 = ON, 0 = OFF
PUSH # TO SAVE
PUSH * TO QUIT
1.
appear.
2.
Press the 3 key to change the daylight savings time.
3.
Enter the 0 key to turn the daylight savings time off or the 1 key to
re-enable the automatic daylight savings feature.
4.
5.
display.
Step 5: Set the Panels Astronomical Clock

The control panel has the capability of automatically calculating sunup and sundown
times for your location through an astronomical clock. These times can then be used
in relay schedules to turn on and off lights at sun up or sun down. It will be
necessary to enter your latitude and longitude to use this feature. In addition, due to
time zone differences and local topology it may be necessary to add or subtract time
from the calculated sunup or sundown values.
Setting the Latitude and Longitude:

LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 2 TO CHANGE
PANEL LATITUDE
PUSH 6 FOR
CLOCK/DATE
FUNCTIONS
OR
PUSH 4 TO SET
ASTRONOMICAL
CLOCK SETTINGS
ENTER LAT/LONG
?? DEG ?? MIN
PUSH # TO SAVE
PUSH * TO QUIT
PUSH 3 TO CHANGE
PANEL LONGITUDE
1.
appear.
2.
Press the 4 key to enter the Astronomical Clock Menu.
3.
Press the 2 key to select the latitude option OR press the 3 key to
select the longitude option.
4.
Enter in the coordinates for your location in degree and minute

format.
5.
6.
Press and release the * key three times to navigate back to the main
display.
7.
Repeat these steps for both latitude and longitude settings.
Setting Sunup and Sundown Offsets:

Due to time-zone differences and local topology it may be necessary to add or
subtract time from the calculated sundown time. It is possible to do this at the
Astronomical Clock Menu which will adjust the base sunup and sundown time for all
schedules. It is also possible to add individual sunup and sundown offsets at the
schedule level to allow for staggered on and off times.
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 4 TO CHANGE
SUN UP OFFSET
PUSH 6 FOR
CLOCK/DATE
FUNCTIONS
OR
PUSH 4 TO SET
ASTRONOMICAL
CLOCK SETTINGS
AMOUNT OF TIME
TO OFFSET SUNXX
CALCULATION
TIME: HH:MM
PUSH 5 TO CHANGE
SUNDOWN OFFSET
1.
appear.
2.
3.
Press the 4 key to add or subtract time to the Sunup time. Press the
5 key to add or subtract time to the Sundown time.
4.
Enter in the amount of time to add or subtract in Hours and

Minutes format (HH:MM). For instance 15 minutes would appear
as 00:15.
5.
Press the D key to toggle between adding and subtracting the time.
If subtracting, it will show a minus sign in front of the time.
6.
7.
display.
Reviewing Sunup and Sundown Times

Once the latitude and longitude are set, review the sunup and sundown times to
verify accuracy and to determine if additional offsets are necessary.
PUSH 1 TO SEE
SUNUP/DOWN TIMES
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
SUN UP: 07:29

SUNDOWN: 16:24
PUSH # TO END
PUSH * TO QUIT
PUSH 6 FOR
CLOCK/DATE
FUNCTIONS
PUSH 4 TO SET
ASTRONOMICAL
CLOCK SETTINGS
1.
appear.
2.
3.
Press the 1 key to review the sunup and sundown times for the
current day. (These will adjust on a daily basis).
4.
Once you are done reviewing, press the # key to end.
5.
display.
Step 6: Clear the Logs

If the panel has an incorrect date and time, it may be necessary to clear the logs once
the date and time are reset to obtain valid data. This clear logs command will clear
relay, switch, remote, and power up logs. Runtime logs will need to be cleared
separately.
1.
Press and hold the pound (#) key on the keypad.
2.
Continue to hold the pound (#) key. Press and release the RESET
button in the upper right corner of the panel.
3.
The display will read Initializing . and then return back to the
main display. Once the display is back at the main display, release
the pound (#) key.
Gathering the Information you will need:

Put together all the information that you will need to program the controller. This
includes:
1.
The location and function of the lighting loads controlled by each

relay.
2.
The desired time schedules for each controlled lighting zone.
3.
Contact Input information: switch type, channel that the wiring is

brought to on the panel as well as the relays it controls.
4.
Digita Switch information: Digita switch address and button

number and the relays it controls.
5.
If the Telephone Interface Module will be used, a list of desired

phone codes and their associated controlled relays.
Part B: Configuring Relays

Step 1: Set the Relay Type
The LiteKeeper lighting controller defaults to all relays set up as normally opened
relay types. Unless using Normally Closed relays or special high-voltage automatic
switches, it is not usually necessary to change the relay type setting.
A Not Used relay will not respond to any commands.
A Normally Open relay goes ON when the schedule, switch or

keypad tells it to go ON, and OFF when commanded OFF.
A Normally Closed relay goes OFF when the schedule, switch or

keypad tells it to go ON, and ON when commanded OFF. The
relay itself may not electrically be a normally closed relay. The
software in the control panel reverses the command for use with
certain contactors/applications.
A Sentry relay will provide special ON command sequences for

use with special intelligent high voltage switches. If defined for
this relay type, when a relay receives an ON command from a time
schedule, wall switch or remote, the relay will turn OFF for 3
seconds, then turn back ON and remain on.
Regardless of programmed relay type, when a panel is powered down, it will revert
to the physical hardware default, i.e. a normally open relay will revert to the open
state on power down despite assigned programming.
ENTER THE RELAY
NUMBER TO CHANGE
RELAY NUMBER: - (CHANGING TYPE)
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
TYPE: NORM OPEN

1 = NOT USED
2 = NORM OPEN
3 = NORM CLOSED
PUSH 1 FOR
RELAY
OPTIONS
PUSH 3 TO
CHANGE RELAY
TYPE
1.
From the Main Display, press the 1 key. The relay menu will
appear.
2.
Press the 3 key to change the relay type.
3.
Enter the relay number you wish to change then press the # sign.
4.
Enter the number corresponding to the desired relay type: 1=Not

Used, 2=Normally Open, 3=Normally Closed, 4=Sentry.
5.
6.
display.
Step 2: Assigning a Warn Off to a Relay

There are three types of warn off sequences that may be programmed into the
lighting controller. By default, if a warn off period is defined, only a time schedule
OFF command will trigger the warn. If wall switches or Telephone Interface
Module commands also need to cause the flash sequence, it will be necessary to
enable the switch or remote to warn.
Every relay that needs to perform this warn sequence will need to be programmed
per these instructions.
Standard Warn Off Feature

The Standard Warn OFF feature is designed to give a warning to the occupants of an
area that the lights are about to go off. With the Standard Warn OFF feature, the
relays flash OFF then back ON when an OFF command is received. After the
warning flash, the relays stay ON for a user-defined length of time before going
OFF. This allows users to have time to get out of the building or to override the OFF
command with a switch input, TIM command or keypad override.
Sentry Type 1 Warn

The Warn Off feature may also be set up to issue a Sentry Warn. The Sentry Type
Warn is used with special, intelligent line voltage switches that call for different
sequences of on/off commands to control the lighting loads. Any relay that has an
intelligent switch that requires a 5 second power interruption should use this setting.
The Cooper Controls Line Voltage Automatic Turn Off Switch will use this feature.
When configured for a Sentry Type 1 Warn and an OFF is issued, the Relays will
flash OFF for 1 second, ON for 1 minute, OFF for 5 seconds, then turn ON and
remain ON ready for the Sentry Switchs next command.
Sentry Type 2 Warn

This Sentry Type Warn is used with special, intelligent line voltage switches that call
for different sequences of on/off commands to control the lighting loads. Any relay
that has an intelligent switch that requires a 1-2 second power interruption should use
this setting.
When configured for a Sentry Type 2 Warn and an OFF is issued, the relays will go
OFF for 1.5 seconds, then back ON.
Programming a Standard or Sentry Warn Off
ENTER THE RELAY
NUMBER TO CHANGE
RELAY NUMBER: - (CHANGING WARN)
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
ENTER LENGTH OF
WARNING FLASH AT
RELAY OFF
00 MIN 00 SEC
PUSH 1 FOR
RELAY
OPTIONS
PUSH 4 TO
SETUP RELAY
WARN TIME
1.
appear.
2.
Press the 4 key to setup a warn time.
3.
Enter the relay number you wish to change then press the # sign.
4.
For a standard warn, enter the amount of time in minutes and

seconds (MM:SS) that you want the lights to remain on after the
initial blink off. For a sentry warn, enter the A key for sentry warn
1 or the B key for sentry warn 2,
5.
6.
display.
Part C: Programming a Time Schedule

The LiteKeeper can be programmed to turn lighting on and off based on time of day.
In the LiteKeeper, an ON schedule does not have to have a corresponding OFF
schedule or vice versa. Each schedule is programmed to issue a single command,
allowing flexibility in programming.
When creating a schedule, the controller will ask you for the schedule time,
command, priority of the command, relays controlled, and days of week.
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
Time of Day
The LiteKeeper times are expressed in military hours & minutes.

For instance, 1 oclock in the morning is 01:00. 1 oclock in the
afternoon is 13:00. The LiteKeeper also uses an astronomical
clock to calculate the sunup and sundown times based on the
latitude and longitude of your location. See Step 5: Set the
Panels Astronomical Clock on page 6-5 for further information.
If an astronomical clock sunup or sundown schedule is chosen in
a V4.6 panel, the controller will ask if an offset is desired to the
time.
Command
In addition to the usual ON or OFF commands, the LiteKeeper

allows a NO COMMAND to be assigned to a time schedule. The
NO Command at the NONE level of priority is most often used to
release controlled relays from a previous higher priority time
schedule without actually changing the relays state.
Priority Level
You can assign three levels of priorities to time schedules:

NONE, PRIORITY, and MASTER using keypad programming.
These priorities affect how schedules and other inputs interact to
control the lighting.
Setting multiple priorities may cause problems with your
application. Unless you have a clear understanding of how the
priority will affect your application, do not use priorities other
than NONE for your time schedules.
Relays Controlled by a
Schedule
Each time schedule has a list of relays to be controlled. If there

are some relays to turn ON at a specific time and some relays to
turn OFF at the same time, you will need to enter two time
schedules for the same time of day. One schedule is for the ON
command and one for the OFF command.
Active Day of
Week/Holiday
A time schedule can be active on any combination of days of the

week and can also be set to work on holidays. See Part F:
Holiday Dates on page 6-22 for more information on setting
holiday dates.
Creating a Time Based ON/OFF Schedule

NEW TIME: ??:??
ENTER HOURS, MINS
PUSH # TO SAVE
PUSH * TO QUIT
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 2 FOR
TIME
SCHEDULE
OPTIONS
PUSH 1 - ON
PUSH 0 - OFF
2 - NO COMMAND
CMD:
OFF
PUSH 3 TO CREATE
A NEW SCHEDULE
THIS SCHEDULE
COMMANDS RELAYS
SHOWN BELOW: - - -, - -, - -, - -, - -
DAY OF WEEK:
M, T, W, T, F, S, S, 1..7 = MON..SUN
PUSH # TO SAVE
WHAT IS PRIORITY
LEVEL OF THIS
SCHEDULE COMMAND
LEVEL: NONE
1.
From the Main Display, press the 2 key. The schedule menu will
appear.
2.
Press the 3 key to create a new schedule.
3.
Enter the time you want the schedule to occur at. Use military
time to distinguish between AM and PM. For instance, 1PM
would be entered as 13:00.
4.
Press the # sign to advance the screen.
5.
Enter the number corresponding to the command to be sent:

0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=NO COMMAND
6.
7.
Enter the number corresponding to the priority you would like this
schedule to be at. 0=NONE, 1=PRIORITY, 2=MASTER. Please
note if you do not know if your application needs priorities,
please leave this at the NONE level and consult the Advanced
Programming section of this manual for further detail.
8.
9.
Enter the first relay # to be controlled then press # to add that relay
to the list. Enter any additional relays pressing the # sign between
each one. To remove a relay that is already in the list, enter the
relay number and the # sign. The A or B key can be used to
scroll right and left if you wish to review the entries if there are
more than 5 relays controlled by the schedule.
10. Press the # sign to advance the screen.

11. By default the controller will run the schedule Monday through
Sunday. Enter the corresponding number for the day of week to
toggle the active days on and off. If the day of week is showing at
the top of the display, the schedule will run on that day.
1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, 3=Wednesday, 4=Thursday, 5=Friday,
6=Saturday, 7=Sunday, 8=Holiday.
12. Press the # sign to save the schedule.
13. Press and release the * key three times to navigate back to the main
display.
Creating a Sunup or Sundown ON/OFF Schedule

LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 2 FOR
TIME
SCHEDULE
OPTIONS
PUSH 3 TO CREATE
A NEW SCHEDULE
NEW TIME: ??:??

ENTER HOURS, MINS
PUSH A = SUN UP
PUSH B = SUNDOWN
AMOUNT OF TIME
TO OFFSET SUNXX
CALCULATION
TIME: 00:00
WHAT IS PRIORITY
LEVEL OF THIS
SCHEDULE COMMAND
LEVEL: NONE
THIS SCHEDULE
COMMANDS RELAYS
SHOWN BELOW: - - -, - -, - -, - -, - -
PUSH 1 - ON
PUSH 0 - OFF
2 - NO COMMAND
CMD:
OFF
DAY OF WEEK:
M, T, W, T, F, S, S, 1..7 = MON..SUN
PUSH # TO SAVE
1.
appear.
2.
Press the 3 key to create a new schedule.
3.
When prompted to enter a new time, enter the A key for a SUNUP
schedule or the B key for a SUNDOWN schedule.
4.
5.
If you wish to add an offset to juts this sunup or sundown schedule,

enter in the amount of time to add or subtract in Hours and
Minutes format (HH:MM). For instance 15 minutes would appear
as 00:15. This offset will only affect this schedule. Other sunup
and sundown schedules can be offset independently.
6.
Press the D key to toggle between adding and subtracting the time.
If subtracting, it will show a minus sign in front of the time.
7.
8.
Enter the number corresponding to the command to be sent:

0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=NO COMMAND.
9.
10. Enter the number corresponding to the priority you would like this
schedule to be at. 0=NONE, 1=PRIORITY, 2=MASTER. Please
note if you do not know if your application needs priorities,
please leave this at the NONE level and consult the Advanced
Programming section of this manual for further detail.
12. Enter the first relay # to be controlled then press # to add that relay
14. By default the controller will run the schedule Monday through
Sunday. Enter the corresponding number for the day of week to
toggle the active days on and off. If the day of week is showing at
the top of the display, the schedule will run on that day.
1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, 3=Wednesday, 4=Thursday, 5=Friday,
6=Saturday, 7=Sunday, 8=Holiday.
15. Press the # sign to save the schedule.

display.
Reviewing Your Time Schedule Programming

It is always good practice to review stored schedules before changing, creating or
deleting existing ones. The review process displays the schedule time, state
(ON/OFF/NO CMD), priority, relays controlled and active days of week. The
LiteKeeper stores and reviews schedules chronologically based on the schedule time.
To advance to the next stored schedule push the # key.
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 2 FOR
TIME
SCHEDULE
OPTIONS
PUSH 1 TO REVIEW
SCHEDULES
SCHEDULE #01 06:30

NONE ON
<01, 02, 03, 04, 05>
M. T, W, T, F, -, -, -
1.
appear.
2.
Press the 1 key to review schedules.
3.
The first schedule will be displayed. Press the # sign to advance to

the next schedule until the end of the list is reached. If the relay
list has brackets around it, you can use the A or B key to advance
the screen through the additional relays linked to the schedule.
4.
display.
Part D: Programming Wall Switches

The LiteKeeper Logic Panel can use two distinct types of override switches: low
voltage dry contact input devices and Digita Switch Stations. In the LiteKeepers
programming index, there are 64 switch input entries that may be programmed to
operate from any dry contact or Digita switch.
The controller defaults for switches are:
Momentary switch type
Channel 1=Switch 1, Channel 2=Switch 2,Channel 32=Switch

32
Switch 1 is linked to Relay 1, Switch 2 to Relay 2, Switch 32 to

Relay 32
These defaults can be changed through the following steps.
Programming a Dry Contact Closure Switch

Thirty-two dry contact inputs channels are available at the bottom of the LK board.
These channels support photosensors, wall switches, motion sensors, or any other
system that provides a dry contact closure. It will be necessary to tell the lighting
controller what switch type is on each switch channel so that it interprets closure
commands properly.
It may also be necessary to assign a switch to a different switch channel. This allows
for flexibility in applications so that one physical switch can perform different
functions from a single command. For instance, you may have a switch wired to
channel 1 that needs to turn on some relays with the on command but also turn off
other relays when that command is issued. It will be necessary to set up two
switches in programming that are programmed to the same switch channel.
Dry Contact Closure Switch Types
A TOGGLE switch (SPST momentary) is typically a single push

button type switch. When the button is pushed and released a brief
closure is made to the controller switch channel. The first closure
is seen as an ON command. Each closure that follows will reverse
or toggle the command.
Momentary
Maintained
OFF
A MAINTAINED switch (SPST) is typically a standard wall

switch. When the switch is turned ON a constant contact is made
between the ON contact and the 24VDC contact of the controller.
When the switch is turned OFF, the closure is released, which is
interpreted as an OFF command.
ON
+24VDC
OFF
A MOMENTARY switch (SPDT) typically has a distinct ON

position and a distinct OFF position. When moved to the ON
position, the switch sends a brief closure between the ON contact
and the 24VDC contact of the controller before returning to a
ready state. When moved to the OFF position, the switch sends a
brief closure between the OFF contact and the 24VDC contact of
the controller before returning to the ready state.
ON
+24VDC
OFF
ON
+24VDC
There are three basic types of dry contact switches.
Toggle
Dry Contact Switch Configurations

You can wire up to eight Momentary or Toggle switches in parallel into one input
channel unless they are pilot lit. No more than 6 LED or 3 Incandescent pilot lit
switches should be wired to any one switch channel. Maintained switches should not
be parallel wired unless they are motion sensors controlling the same area.
Programming a Dry Contact Closure Switch Type

ENTER THE SWITCH
NUMBER TO CHANGE
SWITCH NUMBER - (CHANGING TYPE)
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 3 FOR
SWITCH
OPTIONS
TYPE: MOMENTARY
1 = TOGGLE
2 = MOMENTARY
3 = MAINTAINED
PUSH 3 TO CHANGE
SWITCH TYPE
ENTER CHANNEL
NUMBER SWITCH IS
WIRED TO : 01
PRESS # TO SAVE
1.
From the Main Display, press the 3 key. The switch menu will
appear.
2.
Press the 3 key to change switch type.
3.
Enter the switch number you wish to program (1-64) and then
press the # sign.
4.
Enter the correct type for your switch. 1=Toggle, 2=Momentary,

3=Maintained.
5.
6.
Enter the Channel # that the switch wiring terminates on (1-32).
7.
Press the # sign to save the switch settings.
8.
display.
Programming Digita Switch Type

In addition to dry contact closure switches, the LiteKeeper supports the use of Digita
switches.
Programming a Digita 1 Switch Type

ENTER THE SWITCH
NUMBER TO CHANGE
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 3 FOR
SWITCH
OPTIONS
TYPE: DIGITA 1
4 = NOT USED
5 = DIGITA 1
6 = DIGITA 5
PUSH 3 TO CHANGE
SWITCH TYPE
DIGITA SWITCH
ADDRESS SWITCH
SW1 NUMBER: 00
(SW1) ENTER 0-15
1.
appear.
2.
3.
press the # sign.
4.
Enter the correct type for your switch. 5=Digita 1.
5.
6.
Enter the address that the switch address dial is set to (0-15).
7.
8.
display.
Programming a Digita 5 Switch Type

All Digita 5 stations regardless of # of buttons should be set up as the Digita 5 type.
It will be necessary to set each button on a single station as a separate switch in the
programming. For instance, if you are using a Digita 5-5B station, you will repeat
the below process 5 times, once for each button using a different switch number for
each button. For each button to be programmed, you will need to know the base
address of the Digita 5 station it is on, the Digita button #, and the method of LED
feedback to be used.
The Digita 5 switch has two rotary address switches for setting the switchs hardware
address. The rotary settings are 1 through 9, A through F.
When you set the switch address in the Advanced Setup page, the letters A through F
are entered as follows: A=10, B=11, C=12, D=13, E=14, F=15.
If your Digita 5 model switch contains more than one button, each button is
programmed in as a separate switch. All buttons on the same physical switch station
will have the same base address.
Depending on the ordered configuration of your model Digita 5, it may contain
anywhere from one to five buttons. When programming the button, it is important to
note the physical location of the button as this is the number that must be
programmed in. Please refer to the graphic below to identify the button numbers that
should be used for your switch configuration.
Digita 5-5B
Digita 5-4B
Digita 5-3B
Digita 5-2B
1
2
3
4
5
2
3
4
5
2
3
4
2
4
Digita 5-1B
Each Digita 5 Button has an internal LED. A feedback must be set up to allow the
LED to illuminate and for the switch to operate properly. The next switch command
is determined from the LED state on the switch. If the LED is ON, it will issue an
OFF command and vice versa. If a feedback is not programmed, the switch will only
be able to issue the command opposite its current LED state.
You can choose from two sources for the status feedback for this switch input: Self
Feedback and Feedback from a Relay.
Self Feedback
When you choose Self Feedback, the indicator light will track with the last command
issued from the switch. The LED will be lit if the switch has issued an ON command
and it will be OFF when the switch has issued an OFF command. It toggles state
with each button press. (This method does not take into account that some other
input such as another switch or a time schedule may have turned ON or OFF lights.
For instance, if the switch is turned ON, the LED will light. If a time schedule turns
off the relays that the switch runs, the LED in the switch will continue to be ON until
that switch issues an OFF command.)
Feedback Relay
Alternatively, you can choose to have the button indicator show the status of one of
the relays controlled by the button. When you choose this option, the indicator light
will be ON when the relay is on and OFF when the relay is off. With this method, if
another switch or time schedule turns the feedback relay off or on, the switch will
reflect the proper status.
ENTER THE SWITCH
NUMBER TO CHANGE
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 3 FOR
SWITCH
OPTIONS
TYPE: DIGITA 5
4 = NOT USED
5 = DIGITA 1
6 = DIGITA 5
PUSH 3 TO CHANGE
SWITCH TYPE
DIGITA SWITCH
ADDRESS SWITCH
SW1 NUMBER: 00
(SW1) ENTER 0-15
DIGITA SWITCH
ADDRESS SWITCH
SW2 NUMBER: 00
(SW2) ENTER 0-15
DIGITA SWITCH
BUTTON NUMBER
ENTER 1-5: 01
ENTER RELAY
MONITORED FOR
FEEDBACK: - (ENTER 0 - 32)
1.
appear.
2.
3.
press the # sign.
4.
Enter the correct type for your switch. 6=Digita 5.
5.
6.
Enter the address that left most address dial is set to (0-9 A=10,
B=11, C=12, D=13, E=14, F=15).
7.
8.
Enter the address that right most address dial is set to (0-9 A=10,
B=11, C=12, D=13, E=14, F=15).
9.
10. Enter the Button # you wish to assign to this switch number.
12. Enter one of the relays that the switch will control or press the A
key for self feedback.
13. Press the # sign to save the switch settings.
display.
Linking the Switch to the Relays It Controls

By default the switches are linked such that switch 1 controls relay 1, switch 2
controls relay 2, switch 32 controls relay 32. Switches 33 through 64 are not
linked to any relays by default. To link the switch to the relays it should control
perform these steps.
ENTER THE SWITCH
NUMBER TO CHANGE
SWITCH NUMBER - (CHANGING LINKS)
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 3 FOR
SWITCH
OPTIONS
SWITCH # TURNS
ON & OFF RELAYS
SHOWN BELOW: - 01, - -, - -. - -. - -
PUSH 1 TO LINK
WHICH RELAYS
SWITCHES CONTROL
1.
appear.
2.
Press the 1 key to link the switch to the relays it controls.
3.
press the # sign.
4.
5.
Press the # sign to save.
6.
display.
Setting a Switch Timer

It is possible to set a switch timer on the switch so that the system will automatically
turn off the lighting if a switch commands the lighting ON. This automatic timer
period can be user defined from 0 to 999 minutes. This feature is often used for after
hours overrides.
Special considerations should be used when using timers which include:
When you use an input timer, you may need to provide a NO TIMER MASK or a
prioritized schedule to protect the lighting from turning off when the timer times out
during regular scheduled ON times.
When a switch with a timer has been turned ON, only that switch can cancel the
timer by sending an OFF command.
ENTER THE SWITCH

NUMBER TO CHANGE
SWITCH NUMBER - (CHANGING TIMER)
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 3 FOR
SWITCH
OPTIONS
ENTER LENGTH OF
TIME THAT SWITCH
OVERRIDES RELAYS
MINUTES: - - -
PUSH 2 TO CHANGE
SWITCH TIMER
1.
appear.
2.
Press the 2 key to program a switch timer.
3.
press the # sign.
4.
Enter the desired time that the lights will remain on after an ON
command from the switch is received. All entries are in minutes,
i.e. 2 hours would be entered as 120 minutes. Entries may be from
0 to 999. To remove a timer, enter 0.
5.
6.
display.
Enabling Switch Warning Periods

By default, only Time Schedule OFF commands cause the defined warn off sequence
to occur. It may also be necessary to have a wall switch or remote command off
command trigger the sequence. Please note that if the switch or remote is set up to
cause the warn off command to occur, timer offs and physical off commands will
both cause the warn off sequence to occur.
ENTER SWITCH
NUMBER TO CHANGE
SWITCH NUMBER - (CHANGING WARN)
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
WHEN SWITCH GOES

OFF WILL RELAYS
IT CONTROLS WARN
WARNING: NO
PUSH 3 FOR
SWITCH
OPTIONS
PUSH 5 TO ENABLE
SWITCH WARN
1.
appear.
2.
Press the 5 key to enable switch warning.
3.
press the # sign.
4.
To turn on switch warns, press 1 for Yes. To turn off switch

warns, press 0 for No.
5.
6.
display.
Part E: Programming Remote Commands

A remote command comes from a source outside of the control panel itself. In the
case of a standalone panel being programmed from the keypad, the cause of the
remote is most often a Telephone Interface Module command. In effect, each
telephone on a touch-tone telephone system becomes a remote control switching
station with voice-prompted user input. The voice-synthesized interface prompts
users for password, user area code, and desired Override State.
Example:-You program a TIM remote number of 1 to affect relays 2, 3, and 4 with a
timer of 240 minutes. You stay in your building later than the regular time schedules
allow. You call into the TIM and turn ON those relays using 1 as your user area
number. The relays will stay on for the amount that the timer is set for. In this case
that would be 4 hours.
Step 1: Linking a Remote Command to the Relays

it Controls
The LiteKeeper unit defaults to using TIM#s 1 through 64. These are programmed
through the keypad interface by linking these remote numbers to the relays to be
controlled. Remote number one corresponds with TIM1, remote number two
corresponds to TIM2, etc
ENTER THE REMOTE
NUMBER TO CHANGE
REMOTE NUMBER - (CHANGING LINKS)
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 4 FOR
REMOTE
OPTIONS
TIM#
TURNS
ON & OFF RELAYS
SHOWN BELOW: - 01, - -, - -. - -. - -
PUSH 1 TO LINK
WHICH RELAYS
REMOTE CONTROLS
1.
From the Main Display, press the 4 key. The remote menu will
appear.
2.
Press the 1 key to link the remote to the relays it controls.
3.
Enter the remote number you wish to program (1-64) and then
press the # sign.
4.
5.
6.
display.
Step 2: Setting up Remote Timers

It is possible to set a timer on the remote so that the system will automatically turn
off the lighting if a remote commands the lighting ON. This automatic timer period
can be user defined from 0 to 999 minutes. This feature is often used for after hours
overrides.
Special considerations should be used when using timers which include:
When you use an input timer, you may need to provide a NO TIMER MASK or a
prioritized schedule to protect the lighting from turning off when the timer times out
during regular scheduled ON times.
When a TIM with a timer has been turned ON, only that TIM can cancel the timer by
sending an OFF command.
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 4 FOR
REMOTE
OPTIONS
ENTER THE REMOTE

NUMBER TO CHANGE
REMOTE NUMBER - (CHANGING TIMER)
ENTER LENGTH OF
TIME THAT REMOTE
OVERRIDES RELAYS
MINUTES: - - -
PUSH 2 TO CHANGE
REMOTE TIMER
1.
From the Main Display, press the 4 key. The remote menu will appear.
2.
Press the 2 key to program a remote timer.
3.
Enter the remote number you wish to program (1-64) and then press the #
sign.
4.
Enter the desired time that the lights will remain on after an ON command
from the remote is received. All entries are in minutes, i.e. 2 hours would
be entered as 120 minutes. Entries may be from 0 to 999. To remove a
timer, enter 0.
5.
6.
Press and release the * key three times to navigate back to the main display.
Enabling Remote Warning Periods

By default, only Time Schedule OFF commands cause the defined warn off sequence
to occur. It may also be necessary to have a wall switch or remote command off
command trigger the sequence. Please note that if the switch or remote is set up to
cause the warn off command to occur, timer offs and physical off commands will
both cause the warn off sequence to occur.
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 4 FOR
REMOTE
OPTIONS
ENTER REMOTE
NUMBER TO CHANGE
REMOTE NUMBER - (CHANGING WARN)
WHEN REMOTE GOES

OFF WILL RELAYS
IT CONTROLS WARN
WARNING: NO
PUSH 4 TO ENABLE
REMOTE WARN
1.
From the Main Display, press the 4 key. The remote menu will appear.
2.
Press the 4 key to enable remote warning.
3.
Enter the remote number you wish to program (1-64) and then press the #
sign.
4.
To turn on remote warns, press 1 for Yes. To turn off remote warns, press 0
for No.
5.
Press the # sign to save the remote settings.
6.
Press and release the * key three times to navigate back to the main display.
Part F: Holiday Dates

Creating Holiday Dates
The control panel automatically turns relays ON or OFF based on the user-defined
schedules. Sometimes exceptions need to be made to these schedules. Holidays are
an example of an exception.
On holidays you may not wish to run any schedules, or may wish to have special
schedules in place. The control panel allows the user to enter up to 32 holiday dates
on which special holiday schedules are run. A holiday is a month and a day of
month on which holiday schedules are run. Holiday dates will repeat each year
unless removed from the system after they have executed.
A holiday schedule consists of a time of day, an ON or OFF command, priority level
and a list of relays to control. Holiday schedules are set up like a regular time
schedule by setting the schedule to run on day 8 or H for holiday. However, holiday
schedules will not work unless specified holiday dates are set. When a holiday date
is defined and the panel enters that date, the letter H will be shown next to the date
and time in the main LiteKeeper display.
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
08:30 01/01/09 H
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 6 FOR
CLOCK/DATE
FUNCTIONS
PUSH 2 TO CREATE
A NEW HOLIDAY
ENTER DATE OF
HOLIDAY TO
CREATE
DATE: ??/??
PUSH 5 TO CHANGE
HOLIDAY DATES
1.
From the Main Display, press the 6 key. The clock/date menu will appear.
2.
Press the 5 key to access the holiday date menu.
3.
Press 2 to enter a new holiday date.
4.
Enter the date of the holiday by month and day. MM/DD format.
5.
6.
Press and release the * key four times to navigate back to the main display.
Reviewing Holiday Dates

It is always good practice to review stored holiday dates before creating or deleting
existing ones. The control panel stores and reviews holidays sequentially, based on
date. Upon entering review, the control panel will display first stored holiday date.
To advance to the next stored date push the # key.
PUSH 1 TO REVIEW
HOLIDAY DATES
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 6 FOR
CLOCK/DATE
FUNCTIONS
HOLIDAY #01
DATE: 01/01
PUSH # TO VIEW
NEXT HOLIDAY
PUSH 5 TO CHANGE
HOLIDAY DATES
1.
From the Main Display, press the 6 key. The clock/date menu will
appear.
2.
3.
Press 1 to review holiday dates.
4.
The first holiday date will be displayed. Press the # sign to

advance to the next holiday date until the end of the list is reached.
5.
Press and release the * key four times to navigate back to the main
display.
Deleting Holiday Dates

PUSH 3 TO DELETE
A HOLIDAY
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 6 FOR
CLOCK/DATE
FUNCTIONS
ENTER DATE OF
HOLIDAY TO
DELETE
DATE: ??/??
PUSH 5 TO CHANGE
HOLIDAY DATES
1.
From the Main Display, press the 6 key. The clock/date menu will
appear.
2.
3.
Press 3 to delete a holiday date.
4.
Enter the date of the holiday to delete by month and day. MM/DD
format.
5.
Press the # sign to delete the holiday.
6.
display.
Part G: Changing Programming

Once programming is established, changes should not be frequent. In most cases, if
adjustment is necessary, you will use the same screens you used to set initial
programming such as with switches or remotes. However, schedules have special
change options.
Option 1: Changing Scheduled Time

SCHEDULE #01 06:30
NONE ON
<01, 02, 03, 04, 05>
M. T, W, T, F, -, -, -
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
Press the # sign until the

schedule you wish to change is
displayed then press the C Key
PUSH 2 FOR
TIME
SCHEDULE
OPTIONS
PUSH 1 TO REVIEW
SCHEDULES
ENTER THE TIME

OF THE SCHEDULE
TO CHANGE
TIME: 06:30
PUSH 1 TO CHANGE
06:30 TIME
TIME: 06:30
ENTER HOURS,MINS
PUSH # TO SAVE
PUSH * TO QUIT
1.
From the main display, press the 2 key.
2.
From the Time Schedule menu, press the 1 key to access review
schedule mode.
3.
If the schedule you wish to change or delete is not showing, press

the # sign until the correct schedule is displayed.
4.
To make changes to this schedule, press the C key when the

schedule is still displayed.
5.
The system will ask you to confirm the schedule time and should
already show the time of the schedule you wish to modify. Press
the # sign to access the change menu.
6.
Push the 1 key to change the time of the schedule.
7.
Enter the time you wish the schedule to occur at. Use military time
to distinguish AM from PM.
8.
Press the # sign to save the change.
9.
display.
Option 2: Changing Schedule Command/Priority

We will discuss this option in the Advanced Programming Section.
Option 3: Changing Relays Controlled by a

Schedule
SCHEDULE #01 06:30
NONE ON
<01, 02, 03, 04, 05>
M. T, W, T, F, -, -, -
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY

PUSH 2 FOR
TIME
SCHEDULE
OPTIONS
PUSH 1 TO REVIEW
SCHEDULES
ENTER THE TIME

OF THE SCHEDULE
TO CHANGE
TIME: 06:30
PUSH 3 TO CHANGE
SCHEDULED RELAYS
THIS SCHEDULE
COMMANDS RELAYS
SHOWN BELOW: - <01, 02, 03, 04, 05>
1.
2.
schedule mode.
3.

4.

5.
6.
Push the 3 key to change the relays controlled.
7.
Enter an additional relay to be controlled then press # to add that

relay to the list. Remove relays by entering the relay number and
pressing # to remove the relay from the list. The A or B key can
be used to scroll right and left if you wish to review the entries if
there are more than 5 relays controlled by the schedule
8.
9.
display.
Option 4: Changing Scheduled Days of Week

SCHEDULE #01 06:30
NONE ON
<01, 02, 03, 04, 05>
M. T, W, T, F, -, -, -
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY

PUSH 2 FOR
TIME
SCHEDULE
OPTIONS
PUSH 1 TO REVIEW
SCHEDULES
ENTER THE TIME

OF THE SCHEDULE
TO CHANGE
TIME: 06:30
PUSH 4 TO CHANGE
DAY OF WEEK
DAY OF WEEK:
M, T, W, T, F, -, -, 1..7 = MON..SUN
PUSH # TO SAVE
1.
2.
schedule mode.
3.

4.

5.
6.
Push the 4 key to change the days of the week the schedule runs.
7.
Enter the corresponding number for the day of week to toggle the
active days on and off. If the day of week is showing at the top of
the display, the schedule will run on that day. 1=Monday,
2=Tuesday, 3=Wednesday, 4=Thursday, 5=Friday, 6=Saturday,
7=Sunday, 8=Holiday.
8.
9.
display.
Deleting Time Schedules

SCHEDULE #01 06:30
NONE ON
<01, 02, 03, 04, 05>
M. T, W, T, F, -, -, -
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY

schedule you wish to delete is
displayed then press the D Key
PUSH 2 FOR
TIME
SCHEDULE
OPTIONS
PUSH 1 TO REVIEW
SCHEDULES
ENTER THE TIME

OF THE SCHEDULE
TO DELETE
TIME: 06:30
1.
2.
schedule mode.
3.
If the schedule you wish to delete is not showing, press the # sign
until the correct schedule is displayed.
4.
To delete this schedule, press the D key when the schedule is still
displayed.
5.
already show the time of the schedule you wish to delete. Press the
# sign to delete the schedule.
Part H: Manual Commands, Status and Log History

Issuing a Manual Relay Command
ENTER THE RELAY
NUMBER TO TURN
ON OR OFF
RELAY NUMBER: - -
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 1 FOR
RELAY
OPTIONS
PUSH 1 TO
TURN A RELAY
ON OR OFF
PUSH 1 FOR ON
PUSH 0 FOR OFF
PUSH * TO QUIT
ENTER HOW MANY

MINUTES TO LEAVE
#01 RELAY 01 ON
MINUTES: - - -
The LiteKeeper allows you to override the current state of a relay via the keypad. To
turn a relay ON or OFF, push 1 at the RELAY OPTIONS MENU. The LiteKeeper
will prompt you for the relay number and the new state. Once these are entered the
LiteKeeper will command the relay to change to the new state desired.
1.
appear.
2.
Press the 1 key to turn a relay on or off.
3.
Enter the relay number to command and press the # sign.
4.
Enter 1 to issue and ON command or 0 to issue an OFF command.
5.
If you wish to place the system in master override, enter the

number of minutes the master override should run. If you wish to
issue a temporary command that will run until the next command
from the system is received, leave this field blank.
6.
Press the # sign to issue the command.
7.
display.
Viewing Relay Status Information

Viewing the status of a relay can often be essential in determining if the
programming is correct. With this in mind, the LiteKeeper reports the current state
(ON/OFF), priority of the last command, time and cause of last command, next
command, time and cause of next command. If the control panel cannot determine
the relays next state, cause, next time or next status, the display will show question
marks. For example, if there are no schedules the display will show ???,??? ??:??.
ENTER THE RELAY
NUMBER TO VIEW
RELAY NUMBER: - (STATUS)
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
#01 RELAY1 WAS

NONE ON
AT 06:30
BY SCHEDULE
PUSH 1 FOR
RELAY
OPTIONS
PUSH 2 TO
VIEW RELAY
STATUS
1.
appear.
2.
Press the 2 key to view relay status.
3.
Enter the relay number to view and press the # sign.
4.
View the status. If status screen times out before you have done a
complete review, you can immediately re-enter the relay number
again and press the # sign.
5.
display
Relay, Switch, and Remote Logs

These logs are accessed in similar ways and also display similar information.
PUSH 1 TO VIEW
RELAY LOGS
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 7 FOR
LOGS
OR
PUSH 2 TO VIEW
SWITCH LOGS
PUSH 3 TO VIEW
REMOTE LOGS
ENTER THE
NUMBER TO VIEW
NUMBER: - -
#01 RELAY# 1 WAS

NONE ON
21:22 1/2/09
BY SWITCH1
1.
From the Main Display, press the 7 key. The log menu will appear.
2.
Press the 1 key to view relay logs. Press the 2 key to view switch
logs. Press the 3 key to view remote logs.
3.
Enter the # of the relay, switch or remote you wish to view

followed by the # sign.
4.
The last action will be displayed on the screen.
5.
Press the # sign to review additional log entries. The logs will be
displayed with the most recent commands first.
6.
Once review is complete, press and release the * key four times to
return to the Main Display.
Power Up/Down Logs

PUSH 4 TO VIEW
POWER UP/DN LOGS
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 7 FOR
LOGS
POWER UP AT
21:22 01/02
PUSH # FOR NEXT
1.
2.
Press the 4 key to view Power Up Power Down Logs.
3.
The last action will be displayed on the screen.
4.
Press the # sign to review additional log entries. The logs will be
displayed with the most recent commands first.
5.
Once review is complete, press and release the * key three times to
return to the Main Display.
Relay Runtime Logs: Viewing and Clearing

The LiteKeeper keeps track of a cumulative number of hours that relays have been
on to allow for easier scheduling of relamping. Once relamping is performed, clear
the runtime hours back to 0.
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
ENTER THE RELAY

NUMBER TO VIEW
RELAY NUMBER: - -
PUSH 7 FOR
LOGS
RY 01: - - - -50 HRS

PRESS D TO CLEAR
PRESS * TO QUIT
PRES # TO END
PUSH 5 TO VIEW
RELAY RUNTIME
1.
2.
Press the 5 key to view relay runtime logs.
3.
Enter the relay number followed by the # sign.
4.
The cumulative total of hours ON will be displayed. To reset the

hours to 0, press the D key.
5.
Press the # sign to end the runtime review.
6.
Once review or hour reset is complete, press and release the * key
three times to return to the Main Display.
Advanced Programming Information

There are certain times when the basic programming steps may not achieve the
desired application. In some instances you may wish to customize programming to
prevent or allow specific commands to occur. In the LiteKeeper system,
customization is done through the use of Priorities or Masks.
Using Priorities in the LiteKeeper System

Priorities establish a hierarchy to the lighting control strategy, allowing for custom
applications and some if (this happens) then (that cant happen) logic to be
applied. Priorities can be assigned to any input command that controls a relay such as
a switch, a remote or a time schedule. While priorities are extremely powerful and
useful, sometimes it can be difficult to see how multiple priorities will interact and to
see the effect these priorities may have on the lighting system control. As a result,
priorities should be used with caution and after some thought.
General Concepts
There are fifteen levels of priority for any command from an input such as a Time
Schedule, Switch, or Remote. Available priorities, in decreasing order of strength
are:
Most control strategies will need no more than three of these priorities: NONE,
PRIORITY and MASTER.
Priority Rules
A command at the NONE level can only override other commands at

the NONE level.
A command at the PRIORITY level is able to override any command at

the NONE level as well as any other command at the PRIORITY level.
While the PRIORITY command is in effect, any command from any
other input at the NONE level will be disregarded.
If a command is set at any of the MASTER levels it can override any

command except for a command at one of the higher MASTER levels.
For example, you use a Telephone Interface Module (TIM) command
at the MASTER6 level to turn ON a relay. Then a time schedule at a
MASTER priority wants to turn OFF that relay. The MASTER priority
OFF command from the schedule is at a lower level of priority than the
MASTER6 priority ON. The relay will not turn OFF. Only an input
command at the MASTER6 level or higher can turn the relay off.
Exceptions to Normal Priority Rules:
If a timer is assigned to a switch or remote command and the ON

command of that input is prioritized, it exerts a step priority up from
priority that is set on that command. For instance, if the ON command
of Switch 1 is set as a Priority and it has a 60 minute timer, when the
timer is running, the priority level is actually PRIORITY+. This means
that an OFF at the PRIORITY level from another switch or input will
not be able to override this command. Only the switch or remote input
that issued the timer will be able to cancel the timers command before
the timer finishes counting down.
Usually a NONE priority command will not work to override higher

priority commands. However, to allow release of the higher priorities, it
is necessary to allow for some exception to the rule. For this reason, if
you have a PRIORITIZED command from a switch or remote input, it
is recommended that you use the opposite command from that same
input to release the priority back to the NONE level. For example, set
up the ON of the input to be MASTER and the OFF of the input to be
NONE. When the MASTER is in effect, other switches at the lower
priorities will not be able to function. When the MASTER switch is
turned OFF, it will release the MASTER priority. The LiteKeeper
software will then check to see if there is a previously actuated input
that should now control the lighting. This priority release and reevaluation allows lower level priority inputs to take control of the
lighting.
Time schedules set at NONE can override Time Schedules set at the
PRIORITY or MASTER level if they are controlling the same relay.
This will allow release of time scheduled prioritized commands.
Manual Keypad Commands will force the relay to the commanded state
and to the NONE priority. This will temporarily allow any input
regardless of priority to be able to control that relay again until the next
re-evaluation occurs.
Putting Priorities into Practice

Now that we know the general rules of using priorities, lets put this into a pictorial
example to help us grasp the priority concept.
Think of our relay as a tall pine tree that has a series of branches on it. Prioritized
commands are weights that will hang off the branches of the pine tree. The lowest
priority commands are down near the trunk of the tree while the progressively higher
priorities are hung on the higher branches. When a prioritized command comes
through, the treetop sways one way or the other from the weight of the priority. The
highest priorities must be released before the top of the tree can sway the other
direction towards the weight of lower priorities.
At the NONE level of priority, only the last issued NONE command will have a
weight as it cancels any prior NONE commands in effect. Therefore, in our pictorial
example, there will only ever be the last NONE command weight hanging off of our
tree.
In the picture above, the Master weight at the top of the tree causes the tree to sway
left. When it is removed, it goes to the next highest command in effect, in this case
the PRIORITY command. When that is removed, it goes to the next highest
command; in this case the last issued NONE command.
Now that we have the general concept, lets see if we can take this example further.
Lets say that the tree swaying to the left is causing an ON command to our relay and
the tree swaying to the right is causing an OFF command to be in effect. Also
commands at the same priority level other than NONE are put in order of the latest
command issued is at the top of that section of the tree.
In our example, there are multiple commands that are linked to our relay. The first is
a set of schedules, the first set up to be a PRIORITY ON at 08:00 and the second a
NONE OFF at 19:00. The second is a motion sensor which is set up to issue a
PRIORITY ON command and a NONE OFF command. The third is a switch input
that is set up to be a NONE ON and a MASTER OFF command. Lets see if we
can put this into some pictures to see the interactions:
1.
At 07:30, someone enters

the room, causing the
lights to turn on by the
motion sensor in a
PRIORITY ON
command.
2.
At 08:00 the time

schedule issues a
PRIORITY ON. The
lights are already ON
from the sensor.
Regardless of the fact that
the lights are ON already,
because the command has
a priority assigned, the
command gets added to
the ON side of the tree.
3.
At 8:15, the motion

sensor times out and
issues a NONE OFF
command. The lights
remain ON because the
PRIORITY ON schedule
is still in effect.
4.
Someone enters the room

at 12:15 and triggers the
motion sensor back ON.
5.
At 12:25, the person turns

off the lights using the
wall switch which issues
a MASTER OFF
command. (Nothing else
can function until this
wall switch is moved
back to the ON position).
6.
At 13:15, someone flips

the switch back to the ON
position. This releases
the Master command.
7.
At 19:00, the time

schedule OFF goes
through, releasing the
PRIORITY of the prior
08:00 schedule ON
command.
8.
At 21:25, the motion

sensor turns OFF. At this
point, there are no more
priorities active so the
lights do turn off.
Now that we understand the basic concepts of how priorities work, lets apply this to
some other examples of priority implementation in the LiteKeeper System. Keep in
mind that a lot of times it is easiest to work from the top priority down when setting
up prioritizations. Figure out first what device command(s) needs to be the highest
priority with levels in between.
Practice Examples:
Example 1: The facilities owners have time schedules set up during the day with a
0600 ON and an 1830 OFF schedule for Monday through Friday. They do not want
the wall switches to work at all during the day but would like them to work after the
1830 OFF time.
How would you do this?
Example 2: The facilities owners have a fire alarm system that gives the lighting
system a dry contact closure when an alarm happens. The facilities owners want all
the emergency lighting to turn on and remain on regardless of wall switch state or
time schedules when an alarm happens. When the alarm system is turned off by the
fire department the owners do not want the lighting to turn off. Instead they want it
to resume its normal scheduled state.
Example 3: The facilities owners have an interior photo sensor that turns ON or OFF
interior lights nearest the windows as needed by the light level. The owners want to
turn OFF lighting entirely at 20:00 and re-enable the photosensor to run the lighting
after 07:00. The lights should only come on at 07:00 if the photosensor is still ON
from lack of light.
Example 4: The facilities owners have motion sensors in a corridor. The corridor
lights must be ON during the hours of 07:30 and 18:30 but after hours must be run
by motion sensor. Both the time schedule and the motion sensors must be off in
order for the lights to be off in this corridor. How can we set this up?
Example 5: The electrical contractor wired two switches into a controller that
control the same relays. These are wired into CH1 and CH2. Both switches have 60
minute timers so that the lights are not left on inadvertently. Fred turns on one
switch then tries to turn off the lights using the other switch but the lights do not turn
off. Explain why the lights would not turn off and how this situation could be fixed.
What would happen if the switches had a PRIORITY ON in this situation? Would
the same fix work?
Programming Priorities in the LiteKeeper System

Changing Switch Commands and Priorities
ENTER THE SWITCH
NUMBER TO CHANGE
SWITCH NUMBER - (CHANGING PRIOR)
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
WHEN SWITCH GOES

ON WHAT COMMAND
SHOULD IT ISSUE?
CMD:
ON
PUSH 3 FOR
SWITCH
OPTIONS
PUSH 4 TO CHANGE
SWITCH
COMMAND/PRIORITY
WHEN SWITCH GOES

OFF WHAT COMMAND
SHOULD IT ISSUE?
CMD:
OFF
WHEN THE SWITCH

GOES OFF WHAT IS
PRIORITY LEVEL
LEVEL: NONE
WHEN THE SWITCH

GOES ON WHAT IS
PRIORITY LEVEL
LEVEL: NONE
1.
appear.
2.
Press the 4 key to change switch command and priority.
3.
press the # sign.
4.
Enter the number corresponding to the command that you want the
switch to issue when it receives an ON command. Options are
0=OFF, 1=ON , 2=NO COMMAND
5.
6.
Enter the number corresponding to the priority that you wish to

assign to the switch ON command. Options are 0=NONE,
1=PRIORITY, 2=MASTER
7.
8.
switch to issue when it receives an OFF command. Options are
9.
10. Enter the number corresponding to the priority that you wish to
assign to the switch OFF command. Options are 0=NONE,
11. Press the # sign to save the switch settings.
display.
Changing Time Schedule Command and Priorities

Priorities can be assigned to a schedule when it is first created. They can also be
assigned after the fact through the change time schedule command. This section
discusses changing the command and priority of an existing schedule.
SCHEDULE #01 06:30

NONE ON
<01, 02, 03, 04, 05>
M. T, W, T, F, -, -, -
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY

PUSH 2 FOR
TIME
SCHEDULE
OPTIONS
PUSH 1 TO REVIEW
SCHEDULES
ENTER THE TIME

OF THE SCHEDULE
TO CHANGE
TIME: 06:30
PUSH 2 TO CHANGE
COMMAND/PRIORITY
PUSH 1 - ON
PUSH 0 - OFF
2 - NO COMMAND
CMD:
OFF
WHAT IS PRIORITY
LEVEL OF THIS
SCHEDULE COMMAND
LEVEL:
NONE
1.
2.
schedule mode.
3.

4.

5.
6.
Push the 2 key to change the Command/Priority.
7.
To change the command, press the number corresponding with the

command desired. 0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=NO COMMAND
8.
9.
To change the priority, press the number corresponding to the

priority level desired. 0=NONE, 1=PRIORITY, 2=MASTER
10. Press the # sign to save the change.

11. Press and release the * key four times to navigate back to the main
display.
Changing Remote Commands and Priorities

ENTER REMOTE
NUMBER TO CHANGE
REMOTE NUMBER - (CHANGING PRIOR)
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
WHEN REMOTE GOES

ON WHAT COMMAND
SHOULD IT ISSUE?
CMD:
ON
PUSH 4 FOR
REMOTE
OPTIONS
PUSH 3 TO CHANGE
REMOTE
COMMAND/PRIORITY
WHEN REMOTE GOES

OFF WHAT COMMAND
SHOULD IT ISSUE?
CMD:
OFF
WHEN THE REMOTE

GOES OFF WHAT IS
PRIORITY LEVEL
LEVEL: NONE
WHEN THE REMOTE

GOES ON WHAT IS
PRIORITY LEVEL
LEVEL: NONE
1.
appear.
2.
Press the 3 key to change remote command and priority.
3.
press the # sign.
4.
remote to issue when it receives an ON command. Options are
5.
6.
Enter the number corresponding to the priority that you wish to

assign to the remote ON command. Options are 0=NONE,
7.
8.
remote to issue when it receives an OFF command. Options are
9.
10. Enter the number corresponding to the priority that you wish to
assign to the remote OFF command. Options are 0=NONE,
11. Press the # sign to save the remote settings.
display.
Using Masks in the LiteKeeper System

Masks change the way a switch or remote input works during a specified time of
day. Masks often can achieve the same effect as priorities but can also achieve
certain actions that a priority cannot. There is no right or wrong to choosing a mask
over a priority. However, since masks are tied to a specific time of day, they will
need maintenance if you change the Time of an associated Time Schedule. You can
create a total of eight different masks and assign them to any switch input or
remote/TIM input command.
Mask Definitions and Examples

There are seven mask types for you to choose from.
Not Used: No mask is defined.
No Offs: OFF commands from the masked input will be ignored during
the period when the mask is active. Please note that if the inputs timer
is counting while the mask period begins and expires during the mask
period, the timers OFF command will occur. To make sure that
expired timers will not cause the lights to go off during this period
you will also need to assign a No Timer mask.
No Ons: All ON commands from the masked input will be ignored

during the period when the mask is active.
Ignored: All commands from the masked input will be ignored during
the period when the mask is active. The control panel acts as if the link
between the input and the output has been removed during the period
that the mask is active.
No Timer: When an input with a timer turns ON during the period that
the mask is active or if the input timer times out during the period that
the mask is active, no OFF command will be issued by the timer.
No Warn: If an input that initiates a warn turns OFF during the period
that the mask is active, the OFF will cause an immediate OFF rather
than waiting for the warning delay. If the input is turned OFF just
prior to the start of the mask and the warn off timer starts
counting down into the period that the mask is active, that warning
will be issued.
Re-evaluate: At the masks END TIME the LiteKeeper re-evaluates

the current status of each relay that has been controlled by the masked
input. The LiteKeeper determines the correct ON or OFF state for the
relays, based on the status of other inputs that are linked to it, and turns
the relay ON or OFF based on that evaluation. The BEGIN TIME of
the mask is irrelevant other than the fact that it must occur prior to the
END TIME. Please note that if other masks are set up on the switch,
they will take precedence over the RE-EVALUATE mask. For
instance, if a NO OFFS mask is active at the RE-EVALUTE masks
END TIME and the switch is OFF when the re-evaluation occurs, the
off command from the switch will not be issued.
Practice Examples
Practice 1: The facilities owners have a wall switch that they do not want to work at
all during the scheduled time from 07:00 to 18:00. What type of mask would we use
here? Is there another way of doing this through priorities? If so, what method do
you think would be easiest for facilities owners to maintain if they changed their
schedule times later on?
Practice#2: The facilities owners have a wall switch with a 60 minute timer. They
want the switch to work always but do not want the timer to run during the hours of
07:00 to 18:00. What type of mask would we use here? Is there another way of
doing this through priorities?
Practice#3: The facilities owners have a TIM. They want users to be able to turn
the lights ON with the TIM but they do not want them to be able to turn the lights
off. What type of mask would we use here? Is there another way of doing this
through priorities?
Practice 4: The facilities owners have a photosensor that turns on outside lighting at
dusk. They wish to turn the outside lighting off at 23:00 but have the lights come
back on in the morning at 06:30 but only if the photosensor is still calling for the
lights to be ON. What type of mask would we use here?
Step 1: Defining a Mask

The first step of using a mask is to set the mask parameters. It is then linked to the
switch or remote it controls.
ENTER THE TIME
WHEN MASK STARTS
PRESS # TO SAVE
TIME: HH:MM
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
PUSH 5 FOR
MASK SETUP
ENTER THE TIME

WHEN MASK STOPS
PRESS # TO SAVE
TIME: HH:MM
ENTER MASK
NUMBER TO CHANGE
MASK NUMBER: - -
DAY OF WEEK:
- , - , - , - , - , - , -, 1..7 = MON..SUN
PUSH # TO SAVE
TYPE: NOT USED

0 = NOT USED
1 = NO OFFS
2 = NO ONS
1.
From the Main Display, press the 5 key. The mask setup screen
will appear.
2.
Enter the mask number you wish to program (1-8) and then press
the # sign.
3.
Enter the time the mask period should start. Use military time to
distinguish between AM and PM. To enter Sunup, press the A
key. To enter Sundown, press the B key.
4.
Press the # key to advance the screen.
5.
Enter the time the mask period should stop. Use military time to
distinguish between AM and PM. To enter Sunup, press the A
key. To enter Sundown, press the B key.
6.
7.
Enter the number corresponding to the type of mask you want to

set. 0=Not Used, 1=No Offs, 2=No Ons, 3=Ignored, 4=No Timer,
5=No Warns, 6=Re-evaluate
8.
9.
Enter the numbers corresponding to the days of week that the mask
should be active. 1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, 3=Wednesday,
4=Thursday, 5=Friday, 6=Saturday, 7=Sunday, 8=Holiday
10. Press the # sign to save the settings.

11. Press and release the * key two times to navigate back to the main
display.
Step 2: Linking the Mask to the Switch or Remote

In order to use a Mask, you must first define the Mask time and type. This section
discusses how the switch or remote is linked to a mask that is already set up.
Linking the Mask to a Switch

ENTER SWITCH
NUMBER TO CHANGE
SWITCH NUMBER - (CHANGING MASK)
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
SWITCH#
IS
IS AFFECTED BY
MASKS BELOW: - --,--,--,--,--
PUSH 3 FOR
SWITCH
OPTIONS
PUSH 6 TO ENABLE
SWITCH MASKING
1.
appear.
2.
Press the 6 key to enable switch masking.
3.
press the # sign.
4.
Enter the first mask number to link to the switch then press # to
add it to the list. Enter any additional mask numbers pressing the #
sign between each one. To remove a mask that is already in the
list, enter the mask number and the # sign. The A or B key can be
used to scroll right and left if you wish to review the entries if there
are more than 5 masks.
5.
6.
display.
Linking the Mask to a Remote

ENTER REMOTE
NUMBER TO CHANGE
REMOTE NUMBER - (CHANGING MASK)
LIGHTING CONTROL
PUSH # TO START
HH:MM MM/DD/YY
TIM#
IS
IS AFFECTED BY
MASKS BELOW: - --,--,--,--,--
PUSH 4 FOR
REMOTE
OPTIONS
PUSH 5 TO ENABLE
REMOTE MASKING
1.
appear.
2.
Press the 5 key to enable remote masking.
3.
press the # sign.
4.
Enter the first mask number to link to the remote then press # to
add it to the list. Enter any additional mask numbers pressing the #
sign between each one. To remove a mask that is already in the
list, enter the mask number and the # sign. The A or B key can be
used to scroll right and left if you wish to review the entries if there
are more than 5 masks.
5.
Press the # sign to save the remote settings.
6.
display.
Additional Reference Materials

LiteKeeper 8 and LiteKeeper 4 Programming Notes
The LiteKeeper 8 and LiteKeeper 4 program the exact same way as the LiteKeeper
16 and 32 with the exception that on some screens, entering the # sign between items
added to the list is not necessary.
The LiteKeeper 8 contains an additional menu option 8 that allows users to configure
the COM port to work as a Digita port or a serial COM port.
Non-Touch screen ControlKeeper Version

Comparison Chart
Prior to 2005, the ControlKeeper was manufactured with a similar keypad layout to
the LiteKeeper discussed in this chapter. Through the years there have been some
changes to features as well as the layout of the screens within the controller. These
feature differences are listed for your reference below in case you encounter any of
these older facilities.
V3 Keypad Layout
Chapter 7 LiteKeeper
Troubleshooting Procedures
Troubleshooting Notes
As a commissioning agent, we verify that the sequence of operation works properly
from the devices that make up a system. It is inevitable that troubleshooting skills
will be necessary when a device does not act as it should. This section discusses
troubleshooting procedures for the LiteKeeper and attached device inputs.
Transformer Power
LK 16 and 32 Transformer Troubleshooting
Symptoms of Issue:
Power LED not lit
Power LED lit but status LED not blinking or display not lit
Panel is in continuous re-initialization
Please look at the following items to troubleshoot this condition.
Check Secondary Voltages

Disconnect power leads from the LiteKeeper to the transformer. With a volt meter
on AC Voltage:
Measure between the two red connection points in the transformer

connector: Expected voltage 18-20VAC
Measure between the two blue connection points in the transformer

LiteKeeper Troubleshooting Procedures 7-1
Condition
Direction
No Output on Secondary Wires
An internal thermal cutoff device protects

the transformer. This device opens when
transformer core temperature reaches 130
degrees centigrade. If this device has
opened you will need to bypass the relays to
hold the lights on until you can replace the
transformer.
Low Transformer Output
The output may be low because of low

primary voltage, improper connection of
primary voltage wires (i.e. connecting the
277 VAC tap into a 120 VAC source), or a
bad power supply.
Check Primary Voltages

There are neutral taps for two primary voltages: white/orange for 277 VAC or
white/black for 120 VAC. For the 347 volt version of the transformer, the brown
wire is the 347 Volt neutral tap. The solid black wire is the line voltage wire. If a
power problem is suspected, it is recommended that the incoming voltage be
checked.
LK 8 Transformer Troubleshooting
Symptoms of issue:
LK8 Display is not lit and no relay LEDs illuminate
Display is lit but panel keeps initializing.

The transformer provides power to the control panel through one pair of wires which
run from the transformer and connect with a spade connection to the back of the
logic board. There are four solder points on the front of the board that you can use to
take a voltage measurement. Choose one of the top two points and measure to one of
the bottom two points. You should be able to measure approx 18-20 VAC across the
red pair of wires.
Condition
Direction
An internal thermal cutoff device protects the

transformer. This device opens when transformer core
temperature reaches 130 degrees centigrade. If this
device has opened you will need to bypass the relays to
hold the lights on until you can replace the transformer.
The output may be low because of low primary voltage,

improper connection of primary voltage wires (i.e.
connecting the 277 VAC tap into a 120 VAC source), or
a bad power supply.

white/black for 120 VAC. The solid black wire is the line voltage wire. If a power
problem is suspected, it is recommended that the incoming voltage be checked.
LK 4 Transformer Troubleshooting
Symptoms of issue:
LK4 Display is not lit and no relay LEDs illuminate
Display is lit but panel keeps initializing.

The transformer provides power directly through control circuitry. There is no easy
way of measuring the secondary voltages on this logic board. The best way of
determining if there is adequate output voltage would be to take a reading for DV
voltage off of the +24V and Ground peripheral power. If approx. 24VDC is present,
the transformer is providing adequate power.
Condition
Direction
No Output on 24VDC
Verify that there is voltage on the primary side. If

voltage is present, contact Technical Support to obtain
replacement product...
Low Output on 24VDC

a bad power supply. Verify incoming voltage. Contact
Technical Support to obtain replacement product if
incoming voltage is fine.

The solid black wire is the line voltage wire. If a power problem is suspected, it is
recommended that the incoming voltage be checked.
The LiteKeeper-4 is a single tapped transformer supply. Verify that the voltage
leads colors are correct for the voltage being supplied: white/orange for 277 VAC or
white/black for 120 VAC.
Brownout Notes:
In the LiteKeeper system, a brownout to the transformer circuit is defined as an event
that causes our on board DC supply to reach approx. 7VDC or less. In this situation,
our logic board goes into "powerhit" mode in which it will shut down in order to
prevent damage to the software and RAM chips on the circuit board. This could
cause the lighting to be interrupted briefly as the relays may open then close once
power is restored to the normal DC voltage range. This would be an event that
would affect all relays on the panel in this same manner.
Events that could cause this type of could be:
cycles of power loss
If tapped off of a 120VAC circuit, a voltage dip below approximately

100-90VAC range.

230-210VAC.
A loose neutral on the transformer circuit can also cause the panel to go
into occasional powerhit mode.
If powerhits are occurring and causing lighting disruptions, it is possible to place the
transformer circuit onto a constant voltage transformer. (for LiteKeeper 16 & 32,
LiteKeeper-8 panels and LiteKeeper-4 units, Cooper Controls would recommend the
model Sola 23-13-060-2 60VA 120V in/ 120V out.) Although not preferred, a UPS
may also be used.
Standard Override Card Troubleshooting
The Standard Override Card (SOC) has two indicator LEDs. The green
LED comes on when the rocker switch overrides the relays ON. The
red LED comes on when the rocker switch overrides the relays OFF. If
the indicator LEDs do not come on when the switch is actuated there
either is a problem with the transformer output to the SOC or with the
power supply components on the circuit board. Check that there is
approx. 18-20VAC from the transformer leads coming into the SOC. If
there is no voltage present, swap the transformer. If the voltage is
present, swap out the SOC.
If the indicator LEDs do come on but the relays do not respond to the
override switch check the connection from the SOC to the relay cards
in the high voltage compartment. It may not be fully seated. You
should be able to CAREFULLY measure 24VDC between the leftmost
pin and the rightmost pin on the relay card/SOC connector. (This
should be done with extreme caution as it is easy to short out the pins if
care is not taken DO NOT ATTEMPT THIS STEP WITH A TOUCH
SCREEN CONTROLLER ENCLOSURE). Caution!! Before opening
the high voltage compartment know the status of the circuit breakers
controlling the loads!
If the indicator LED indicates that the panel is overridden ALL OFF or
ALL ON but the SOC switch is in the AUTO position, do a visual
check to see if there are any wires coming into the bottom of the SOC
other than the transformer leads. If there are wires coming into a
terminal block on the bottom of the SOC, these may go into an
emergency override device or switch that has been triggered. Double
check the status of this device or remove the terminal block to verify
that the panel goes to the proper mode of operation. If no device is
wired, the override card has been damaged. Replace the override card.
Basic Relay Troubleshooting

Symptoms:
A relay or relays do not turn lighting loads on and off as they should.
Basic questions to ask before beginning to

troubleshoot:
Is this the only relay in the enclosure not working?
Do any of the relay cards in the enclosure work?
Do they work with the SOC override but not with the control panel?
Is there a lighted switch card on this panel? If the answer to this is yes,
please refer to Lighted Switch Troubleshooting on page 7-9 which
contains further information.
What type of lighting load is being controlled?
Troubleshooting steps:
Go to the control panel that has the relay or relays controlling the affected lighting.
1.
Check the relay status LEDs against what the lighting load is doing. If
the relay status LED reflects what the lighting load is doing, i.e. the
lights are off and the LED is off, more than likely there is a
programming issue that is at fault. Manually command the relay
through the keypad to verify that it operates properly and if so, doublecheck the programming. If the relay status LED does not match the
status of the load, i.e. relay status LED is on and the lights are off,
check that the relay has not been manually overridden using the ALL
ON or ALL OFF Switch.
2.
Check the indicator LEDs on the control panel itself to make sure the
board is functioning. In the LiteKeeper-8 and LiteKeeper-4 the display
should be lit. In a LiteKeeper 16&32, the STATUS LED should be
blinking. The POWER LED should be on. If incorrect, check to make
sure that the control panel is getting the proper power through the
transformer. Refer to Transformer Power on page 7-1 for information
on troubleshooting the transformer.
3.
Use the Standard Override Card to override relays ALL ON. Verify
that the load responds. If possible, override relays ALL OFF. Verify
that the load responds. If the load does not respond the cause is most
likely a failed relay. It is recommended that the relay card be swapped
first. If this fails to resolve the issue, the SOC may also be swapped
out.
4.
If the above steps check out, make sure that the SOC is in AUTO,
override the relay through the local control on the control panel keypad.
You should hear the relay click open and closed. If you are qualified,
you can use a voltmeter to be sure that the relay is actually opening and
closing. Sometimes the relay is not actuating even though you may
hear a clicking sound. In this situation, the clicking sound may not be
as loud as other relays in the cabinet.
5.
If no click is heard but the relay LED is turning on and off, verify that
there are no bent pins in the SOC connection to the logic board ribbon
cable. Verity that the ribbon cable is firmly plugged in and does not
have any tears. If the relay still does not actuate, the problem could be
with either the SOC or Relay Card. It is recommended that the relay
card be swapped out first. If this fails to resolve the issue, the SOC
may also be swapped out.
If the issue is not a hardware issue, programming should be checked. Some of the
control panels have a relay output log capability. If the programs are correct, you
can use these relay logs to check the historical record on the affected relay to help
determine the cause of the problem.
Troubleshooting Specifics: SRC

1.
Sometimes a relay will stick slightly, causing lighting loads to not turn
off. This may happen on a rare basis when relays are new due to
manufacturing oils on the contacts of the relays or may happen as
relays age due to pitting on the contacts. Sometimes it is possible to
give the relay casing a slight tap to free the contacts and then actuate
the relay a few times to fix the problem. If a relay continues to exhibit
the sticking behavior, replace the relay card.
2.
With a very lightly loaded circuit, there is a protection device called a

snubber that may allow some leak through voltage to occur. On rare
occasion, this device may allow enough leak through to keep a
contactor coil or lighting load active or strobe the lights when the relay
is open. On the rare occasion that this occurs, it is usually with loads
less than two amps. If this is the suspected issue, technical support will
usually recommend removal of the orange snubber device from the
relay card which will alleviate this problem.
3.
The snubber device can also fake out a meter. If readings with a
meter are being referenced to earth ground from the line and load side
of the relay, a very lighting loaded circuit may still register some or all
of the full supplied voltage from the load side to ground when the relay
is open. Please note that this reading is voltage NOT CURRENT. The
more heavily loaded the circuit, the less likely this will occur. As a
precaution, always, Cooper Controls recommends following
recommended NEC circuit lock out practices when work is being done
on a circuit under relay control.
4.
A more accurate way of testing if a relay is open or closed is to take an

AC measurement across the relay contacts with the relay open then
closed. With the relay open, the reading should be 120 or 277VAC
(depended on supplied voltage). With the relay closed, the reading
should be close to 0VAC.
Troubleshooting Specifics: LRC

1.
The Latching Relay Card has a status LED at the bottom that will assist
in determining if the latching relay card is operating properly. In
normal circumstances, when power is applied the panel and the panel is
plugged into the override card or relay card, the LED will flash on and
off consistently. This indicates that operation is normal. If the panel is
not plugged into the SOC, the LED will only flash when the panel is in
the ALL ON or ALL OFF State.
2.
If the LED remains steady ON or OFF, please verify that the logic
board is plugged into the SOC and that the transformer powering the
panel is receiving the proper voltage. If everything appears OK with
this checkout and the relay card is still unresponsive, it is recommended
that the relay card be swapped out.
Troubleshooting Specifics: Modular Relay Card

1.
Verify that the proper relay is programmed to actuate the relays, i.e. if
TPRM is used, program the slot that has the white connector.
2.
Verify that relay modules are seated properly and making good
connection with the Modular Relay Card motherboard.
3.
LEDs on the different relay modules reflect that the coil of the relay has
been issued an ON or OFF command.
Troubleshooting Specifics: TPRC

1.
Verify that the relay connector is attached to the relay card and that the
proper relay slot is programmed where this connector lands.
Troubleshooting Logic Boards

Logic Board Status Indicators
Under normal circumstances, for a LiteKeeper-16 or 32, the display should be lit and
the System Status LEDs should be doing the following:
Status: Should be blinking on and off each second
Power: Should be lit
For a LiteKeeper 4 or LiteKeeper 8, in normal circumstances, the display should be
lit when power is applied.
If the controller does not seem to be showing the above behavior or is acting
strangely, the following things can be tried.
Reset
Sometimes all it takes to get the control panel working again is a simple reset. The
reset gives the control panel a jump start and may quickly restore a panel to
functionality. Please contact technical support if you encounter a panel that needs to
be reset consistently.
Memory Clear
If the simple reset does not bring the control panel back to operation, you can try
clearing the control panel memory. When you clear the memory the lights will go
out unless you use the override switch on the Standard Override Card or the slide
switch on the LiteKeeper-8, LiteKeeper-4. Once memory has been cleared, verify
basic functionality you will need to reprogram the control panel using the on-board
keypad or the computer software.
LiteKeeper 16 & 32 Memory Clear

To clear memory on these panels , press and hold the star key on the keypad.
Keep holding this down while you press and release the reset button. Keep
holding the * key down until you see the word Initializing on the screen. Release the
star key. Memory has been cleared.
LiteKeeper 8 and LiteKeeper-4 Memory Clear

Press the reset button. The display will read Initializing. Wait until the time and
date come back on the display, then press ABCD* on the keypad. The display will
read initializing again. Memory has been cleared.
Power Cycle
If a reset and cold start do not work, you can make one more attempt at getting the
logic board to function by cycling power to the control panel. This is easily done
with the LiteKeeper 16 & 32 without interrupting the building lighting. You need to
put the Standard Override Card rocker switch in the ON position to maintain the
lights and then disconnect the power connection between the transformer and the
control panel. This connector is between the red set and blue set of wires coming
from the control panel and the red set and blue set of wires coming from the
transformer and is at the lower right side of the control panel. Simply disconnect,
then reconnect the white plastic connector. The control panel then goes through a
power recovery reset and may begin working again. The relay status indicators will
show you what will happen to the lighting in the building when you put the Standard
Override Card rocker switch into the AUTO position. Programming will not be lost
with this power cycle.
In a LK8 or LK4, cycling power will interrupt lighting. The easiest method of
achieving this is to power down the transformer control circuit. Programming will
not be lost with a power cycle.
If the logic board fails to respond to any of the above measures, please contact
technical support to obtain a replacement unit.
Troubleshooting Contact Closure Switches, Motion

Sensors and Photosensors:
Symptoms
Switches are not working to control lighting loads on and off.
Basic Troubleshooting Steps

1.
Verify that the panel has not been overridden all on or all off.
2.
Remove the switch wiring from the panel and try jumpering the switch
channel using a piece of wire.
If panel responds to jumpering the switch channel:

1.
The problem is in the switch or wiring to the switch. Check the switch
wiring visually for mis-wires and crosses.
2.
Disconnect the switch from the end of wire and jumper with the switch
wiring. If this works, the switch needs replacement. If this does not
work:
3.
Disconnect both ends of the wire from both switch and panel. Verify
that conductors are not touching and perform a test with an ohm meter
to verify that there are no shorts between wires. If an open line reading
results, wire nut the wires together at one end. Verify at the other end
that you have continuity through the wires.
4.
If steps above fail to reveal a problem with wiring, please contact

technical support for further assistance in troubleshooting.
If panel does not responds to jumpering the switch channel:

1.
On a LK16&32, double-check and make certain that the local/remote

jumpers next to CH16 are in the local position. These enable the
+24VDC supply to the switch inputs.
2.
With switch wiring off the board, with a volt meter, double check that
24VDC is present between the ON and +24VDC of any switch channel
and the OFF and +24VDC of any switch channel.
3.
If there is no DC voltage present, on the LK16/32 double check switch

fuse. If hot, there is a short on one of the switch inputs. This fuse is
auto resettable. Disconnect switch wiring terminal blocks and allow
the fuse to cool to reset. Ohm out switch wiring with it disconnected
from the logic panel. Check for shorts especially between any +24V
and DC ground wires. Check for continuity between conduit ground
and any wire.
4.
If there is no DC Voltage present on an LK4 or LK8 please contact

technical support to obtain a replacement panel.
5.
If the jumper at the panel does not work and you have verified that
24VDC is present, double check the programming. The easiest way to
confirm a programming issue clear the board back to factory defaults
and verify functionality of the switch channels.
6.
If programming is verified to be the issue: check for improperly set up

switch types, prioritizations, masking and timers as root causes of the
potential issues.
Lighted Switch Troubleshooting

Lighted Switches can pose a challenge to troubleshoot when they are not acting
properly. This is due to the way that Cooper Controls chops the wave to drive the
switch bulbs and LEDs. It is not easy to take a voltage measurement and determine
if the LSC is faulty. The LSC is a sensitive piece of equipment. Care must be taken
in the installation of switches and troubleshooting to prevent damage to the card.
Please keep in mind that not all pilot lit switches are created equal! If switches have
been obtained by a source other than Cooper Controls and the switches are not
functioning properly, they may not be approved for use with our system. The
Cooper Controls system provides a sink path for voltage, not a source. In addition,
LED switches may need to have a resistor in place to prevent the LED from burning
out. Please contact technical support if you are working with Lighted Switches that
we have not provided.
With switches provided (or approved) by Cooper Controls, here are a few items for
troubleshooting.
Things to Check First
Verify the jumper settings on the LSC and local remote jumpers on
the logic board are set properly.
Check wiring at the switch and logic board to verify it is correct.

Verify that the pilot light wire is wired to the correct relay channel
for one of the relays it controls.
With GE switches, verify at the switch that the filament connecting

the +24V and Pilot wire has not been crushed when the connector
has been applied.
With a meter on DC voltage, measure between the +24V and GND

terminals at the bottom of the LSC. Verify that there is +24VDC
present. If not, power down the logic board, disconnect the LSC
and reseat it in the connector. If the problem persists, contact
technical support for replacement parts.
Blown Bulbs or LED in the Switch:

If it is a single switch that is causing a problem, try replacing it first with a known
good switch. If the new switch exhibits similar behavior as the old switch, suspect a
wiring or blown channel issue.
Blown LSC Channel:

Symptoms of a blown lighted switch channel include some switches on the Lighted
Switch Card work properly while one switch does not seem to run its associated
relay properly. The relay may appear to be sticking. The LED/Incandescent bulb
in the offending switch also does not light.
To confirm that this is the cause of the issue: with the switch still connected, trigger
the relay on and off from the keypad. If the relay does not click but the LED appears
to respond, turn the relay off and carefully look at the LED to see if it is slightly lit.
If you see a faint glow from the LED, you are dealing with a blown channel. Power
down the board and remove the Lighted Switch wire from the LSC for the offending
switch. At this point, power up the board and verify that the panel responds to
keypad commands for the relay in question.
If the switch does not trigger and you are not seeing unusual activity from the LED,
it is possible to do some meter testing to verify the channel is operating. To perform
this test,
1.
Power down the LiteKeeper.
2.
Remove all lighted switch wiring from the Lighted Switch Card.
3.
Move the LSC jumper to the RELAY position.
4.
Power the panel back up.
5.
Turn on all relays for the LSC channels you wish to test.
6.
With your meter on DC voltage, place the Negative meter probe on

the LSC channel you are testing.
7.
Place the positive meter probe on the +24VDC terminal of the

peripheral power connector. You should read 24 VDC.
8.
Turn off the relay.
9.
Retake the measurement. You should read 0 VDC.
10. Repeat the test for all LSC channels.

If you get a consistent 0VDC measurement regardless of the relay being on or off,
you have a blown LSC channel. Replace the LSC.
The only resolution of this issue is to replace the Lighted Switch Card. However,
usually a blown channel is caused by some larger issue. In most cases, this may
consist of a short between the control wires and the pilot light wire from the
switch. This overloads that LSC channel and blows the channel.
To check for this issue, remove the wiring from the LSC and the logic board for the
switch in question and with a meter, Ohm out the wiring between all wires of the
switch and the Pilot light wire. On all wires except for the +24V, you should get
open line or greater than 2 MEG. On the +24V wire, you may get a different reading
as there is a connection through the bulb of the switch. This resistance may vary
depending on switch type being used. You should not read a dead short. If you do,
this is the cause of the blown FET. Fix the wiring issue before proceeding. If the
FET continues to blow even after the switch wiring is checked, it may be because:
Another switch that is shorting to the pilot light wire and 24V,
verify each wire to the pilot light wire to verify that there is an
open line between conductors.
A switch that internally shorts the +24V to the pilot when the
switch is pressed. Double check that the switch maintains an open
line reading between the on and off wires and the pilot light wires
when the button is pressed in.
Overloading the Switch Channel:

The lighted switch card is designed such that you will want to limit the number of
switches that are being lit off of a single LSC channel. Our recommendation is to
not have more than 3 Incandescent switches and 6 LED switches have the pilot wires
landed on a single channel. If the channels are overloaded, it can blow the lighted
switch channel resulting in the bulbs/LEDs not illuminating properly. In this
instance, it is recommended that the switches be rewired to more than one LSC
channel. (Virtual relay programming may be necessary in some cases). In extreme
overloaded cases, the panel may actually exhibit brown-out or powerhit like
symptoms due to the current draw of overloaded circuits.

LiteKeeper 16 panel, or 45 in a 32 size panel, with no more than 6
LEDs per LSC channel.

LiteKeeper 16 panel, or 23 in a 32 size panel, with no more than 3
bulbs per LSC channel.
These figures may be affected by Motion sensor or photosensor usage on the same
logic panel.
Low-Voltage Motion Sensor Troubleshooting:

LED will not turn ON
Verify that the sensor is getting 24VDC across the red and black
wires if powered from a logic panel. If no 24VDC is present,
double check that the switch input channels at the panel have
24VDC present. If it does, and jumpering at the panel works,

recheck all wiring and connections for a break.
Lights will not turn ON
For motion sensors that have an option for manual control from an
onboard or directly wired wall switch, verify that the sensor is not
set in Manual mode.
Double check motion wiring following the switch input

troubleshooting discussed earlier in this chapter.
Lights will not turn OFF
Disconnect ON leg of sensor from the logic panel. If lighting

remains on, check for a programming issue. Check that the switch
type is set for the correct switch type, for priorities, timers, or
masks.
Make certain the sensor is not overridden with the on board

override switches or jumpers.
If multiple sensors are installed and wired to the same wiring

channel, sensors will need to be checked individually as another
sensor may be the cause of the lighting being on.
Verify that the motion sensor is registering lack of motion by the

LED being off. If LED is continuously flashing, verify cause such
as HVAC air flow or sensitivity of the sensor to traffic outside of
its coverage area. Adjust sensitivity or relocate sensor as needed.
Photosensor Troubleshooting
Lights will not turn on:
Verify that the read out on the display shows that the photosensor
is OFF. If the photosensor is stating it is ON, check for a wiring or
panel issue.
If the photosensor is indicating it is off, manually override it

through the on board menu and verify that the lighting responds.
Check threshold settings if this operates properly.
Lights will not turn off:
Manually override the sensor OFF from the LED display. If this
does not operate, disconnect ON leg of sensor from the logic panel.
If lighting remains on, check for a programming issue. Check that
the switch type is set for the correct switch type, for priorities,
timers, or masks.
If the lighting turns off when the sensor is overridden, verify

threshold settings.
Digita Switch Troubleshooting

Recommended Equipment:
For ease of ruling out programming in a Digita switch troubleshooting job, it is
recommended that all commissioning agents carry a test Digita Switch setup with
them to a site that has Digita Switches. This is an invaluable tool if switches are not
working properly in the field as it allows you to verify that the logic board is
functioning properly first and then the site Digita gateway. Remember when
adjusting Digita switch wiring, POWER DOWN the Digita network to avoid damage
to logic board, transformer or switch units in event of a short on the Digita network.
An Ohm meter is also an essential tool when troubleshooting Digita Switches.
Resistance Test Prior to Powering Network

1.

power and communications cable connections to the Greengate
lighting control panel.
2.
With an ohm meter, at any Digita station, measure between the

CAN-L and CAN-H wires. The measurement should be close to
60 ohms for a properly terminated network. If not close to 60
ohms, check that the termination resistors are installed at the two
end locations.
3.
With an ohm meter, at any Digita station, measure between the +V

and GND wires. The measurement should be greater than 2
megohms.
4.

and CAN-H wire and the +V and CAN-L wire. Repeat this test
measuring between the GND and CAN-H and CAN-L wire. All
measurements should be greater than 2 megohms.
5.
If these measurements are correct, proceed with powering the

Digita network. If incorrect, troubleshoot wiring to determine
cause or contact technical support for further assistance.
Testing Digita Functionality and Troubleshooting
1.
Upon initial power up, verify that the Digita Gateway LEDs will
flash amber for a period of seconds and then flash rapidly red and
green and turn off.
2.
Verify that when the Digita Gateway LEDs are flashing during
initial power up, the Digita CAN RX and CAN TX LEDs on the
lighting controller flash. These LEDs are usually located next to

the Digita communications cable connector on the lighting
controller. (LiteKeeper 8 panels do not have these LEDs. Proceed
to the next step).
3.
Remove the face plate of the Digita 5 and Digita 1 switches by

pressing in on the tabs on one side and lifting. Verify that when a
button is pressed, the communications LED near the right side
flashes. If able, verify that the Digita Gateway LEDs and the
Lighting Controller CAN RX LED also flashes when the button is
pressed.
Digita 5 Switch with

Face Plate Removed
Communication LED
Digita 1 Switch
Face Plate Removed
Communication LED
4.
Once the lighting controller is programmed, verify that the lighting

loads respond on and off for the Digita stations. The Digita 5
button LEDs should also turn on and off.
5.
If any of the above items do not function as expected, please

follow the below troubleshooting steps.
Regardless of the issue being experienced, follow these steps in the order they appear
in below to rule out potential causes prior to contacting technical support.
Troubleshooting Step
Failure Condition
Potential Resolution Steps
1. Power down and power up the Digita Red and Green LEDs do not 1. Verify that the communications cable
Switch Network. Ensure that the
is correctly plugged in properly from
turn off on the Gateway but
Gateway LEDs flash amber. If there
the Digita Gateway to the Lighting
continually flash.
are Digita-5 switches on the network Lighting Controller CAN
Controller Digita Port matching the
they should then flash red and green
labels on the gray phone cable to the
RX and TX LEDs do not
and turn off. Ensure that there is an
correct devices.
flash when the Gateway
answering flash on the CAN RX and
2. In a LiteKeeper-8 panel, verify that the
LEDs flash or the RX LED
COM port has been set up for Digita
TX LEDs on the lighting controller. .
may be dimly illuminated at
If there are only Digita-1 switches,
through menu option 8.
all times.
there will be no secondary red and
(LK8 and CK2 panels do not 3. In a ControlKeeper-2 panel, verify that
green flashes If the behavior is
the option select switch #1 is set to the
have the CAN RX and TX
ON position.
normal, proceed to the next step.
LEDs. Proceed with
resolution steps for these two
controller types).
Failure Condition
2. Verify that the communication LED
Communications LED stays
on the switch flashes when a button is
ON continuously
pressed. If the behavior is normal,
proceed to the next step.
Communications LED is
completely OFF
Communications LED blinks

on and off repetitively
without button press. (Digita
1)
3. Verify that when the button on the

switch is pressed the LEDs flash on
the Digita Gateway. If the behavior
is normal, proceed to the next step.
Communications LEDs do
not flash.

switch is pressed both the CAN RX
and TX LEDs illuminate on the
Lighting Controller. If the behavior
Only CAN RX illuminates

(LK8 and CK2 panels do not
LEDs. Proceed with
troubleshooting steps for this
step for these two controller
types).
Digita 5 switch issues only
ON or only OFF commands.
Digita 5 switch button LEDs
stay continuously off or are
continuously lit.

1. Verify that the CAN-L and CAN-H
wires have not been reversed in the
switch wiring.
2. Verify that there is no break in the
CAN-L or CAN-H wiring.
3. With power off to the Digita network,
verify that there are no shorts between
+24V or GND to the CAN-L or CANH wiring.
4. If a Digita 5 station is exhibiting this
behavior, verify that the address has
not been set to 0 0.
5. If a single switch is exhibiting this
behavior, replace with a known good
switch. If failure condition persists,
contact technical support
1. With a multimeter set to read DC
voltage, verify that +24VDC is present
between the V+ and GND terminals of
the Digita Station. If not, verify that
the panel peripheral power connector
has +24VDC and that the local remote
jumpers have been set properly on
larger controller types. Troubleshoot
wiring if power is at the panel but not
at the switch.
2. If 24VDC is present, at the switch,
replace with a known good switch. If
failure condition persists, contact
technical support.
1. Make certain that the clear Service
Switch lever in the lower left corner is
pushed in.
2. Replace switch with a known good
contact technical support.
1. Troubleshoot for a break in the CAN-L
or CAN-H wiring.
1. Verify that the panel has been
programmed for the desired switch
action and that it is linked properly to
the relays it controls.
2. Verify that the switch address is correct
on both the Digita Station and the
Lighting Controller Programming.
3. For Digita 5 switches, verify that a
Feedback has been set for the switch.
The feedback can be either a relay that
the switch controls or for self feedback.
If the feedback field is blank, the
switch will not work properly.
4. If failure condition persists, contact
technical support.
5. Verify that the control relay responds
to a manual relay command from the
lighting panel. If the behavior is
Failure Condition
The relay does not turn the
lighting load ON or OFF.
6. Immediately after the manual relay

command to the relay from the
lighting controller, test the switch
again. See steps to the right before
proceeding.
The relay responds to the

first press of the switch then
stops.
The relay still does not
respond.
7. Was the controller cleared of all

settings prior to initial programming?
8. Is the operating voltage of the Digita

Network correct?
Consistently intermittent
problems with switches and
feedback LEDs working as
expected.

1. Listen to hear that the relay clicks
when commanded. If it does not,
verify that the panel ALL ON or ALL
OFF override is not active. Verify
that the LED relay indicator on the
panel turns on and off with the
commands. If not in override mode
and the LED tracks properly, contact
technical support for further assistance
with troubleshooting the relay
2. If the relay clicks properly, verify that
there is voltage applied to the relay.
3. If voltage is present, trace out wiring
to verify the controlled load location.
technical support.
1. Verify what the priority command is
in control of the relay and current
input that issued the command by
reviewing the relays live status. If a
priority other than NONE is on the
screen, check all program settings are
correct.
technical support.
1. If no, please clear settings back to
factory default and reprogram a
switch for test
technical support.
Using a Multi-meter, verify voltage at
the last station on the network between
the +24VDC and GND terminals. If
voltage is less than 16VDC stations will
not work properly. Verify wiring and
distance of wire is per installation
instructions. It is recommended that this
test be repeated for each station on the
network wire.
Notes on Troubleshooting Programming

Programming problems can be the cause of the majority of issues that may be
experienced in the field. Remember our priorities and mask discussion.
If programming issues are suspected as the root of the problem, review the
programming in the panel to verify that things are what they should be.
However, there are a few tips and tricks that are handy to know when
troubleshooting programming.
If a relay is not turning on or off by an input and the relay is linked to that
input, perform a view relay status command. This will tell you what
command is currently in effect and what priority level it may have. In
addition, it will tell you if there are any timers counting down. If a priority
is shown on the screen, or a timer is counting down, this may be why the
input is not operational.
If contact input switches are not working but there are no priorities
assigned, make certain first that the local remote jumpers are correct. If so,
double check that there are no masks assigned and that the switches are set
up for the proper switch type and channel number. Verify that the ON and
OFF commands are set up to issue the correct commands. Also review the
switch logs to verify that no commands are being logged. Sometimes if
switches are improperly wired, you will see the same command being
issued over and over rather than both Ons and Offs.
If relays are responding at odd times, review the logs and see what the log
data says is happening with the relay. This can be invaluable in finding the
cause of the problem.
Chapter 8 ControlKeeper Panel

Hardware
What is involved with Commissioning ControlKeeper

Panel Hardware?
Expectations on commissioning ControlKeeper Panel Hardware include:



schedule times.
See input chapter for information specific to commissioning different input types.
ControlKeeper Panel Hardware 8-1
ControlKeeper-T
Enclosure General Information

The 16/32/48 Serial BUS Enclosure is currently used for the ControlKeeper-T. It
employs a serial BUS for communications from the logic panel to the relay cards for
control of lighting loads.
Enclosure Item Reference

1
Relay Cards
Center Rail for Relay Stack
Individual Relay Override Switch
Relay Status Indicator
Relay Card Status LED
Connection from Center Rail into RSC
Relay Stack Controller Power Wiring from

Transformer
RSC Status LED
Communications cable connection to RSC from

CKT (if the RSC has two ports you may use either
port)
10
CK-T power connection from RSC
11
RSC power LED
12
RSC ALL OFF/AUTO/ALL ON Switch with

Indicator LEDs
Transformer Information
The Transformer in the serial enclosure is the same transformer that is in the Parallel
BUS Enclosure. It is mounted in the lower right corner and is a double tapped
transformer to which 120VAC or 277VAC may be wired. A 120VAC/347VAC

transformer is also available.
Override Card Options

Relay Stack Controller (RSC)
16/32/48 size Serial BUS enclosures are equipped with a three-position rocker
switch. The switch allows you to close or open all the relays when the control panel
is not in the enclosure or when you need to override normal programming on an
enclosure-wide basis. The switch must be in the middle or AUTO position where
neither the Green nor Red LEDs are lit in order for programmed schedules and
switching to occur. Unlike the LiteKeeper unit, the RSC override when used ALL
ON will force all relays to close in the cabinet, regardless of relay type, i.e. normally
open or normally closed.
There are several items of note on this card.
RSC Underside View
Item
Reference
#
Description
ALL OFF LED
RSC Override Switch ALL OFF/AUTO/ALL ON
ALL ON LED
Power LED
ControlKeeper-T Power Connection
ControlKeeper-T Communications Cable Connection (in

older models, there may be two ports at this location. Either
port may be used)
Status LED
Transformer Secondary Docking Terminals (Red wires not

used)
RSC Power Wiring (Red and Blue wire Molex connection to

transformer secondary voltage wires)
10
Underside of pin connection to the serial relay stack
11
RSC Reset Switch (Recommended that the reset on the

ControlKeeper-T be used rather than this switch unless
advised by technical support).
12
Relay Micro Reset Switch (Not recommended for use unless

advised by technical support. Use of this switch may result
in the relays de-energizing even if panel is overridden from
the RSC Switch).
13
Peripheral Dry Contact Connector. Allows interface from a

Bypass relay or dry contact closure for an external override
of the relays. (Maintained closure only.)
Serial to Parallel Override Card (SPOC)

In our history, we have had many panel logic board types that use the enclosure and
relays that our current LiteKeeper line utilizes. We have seen the need to provide an
upgrade path for these sites to allow them to utilize the new ControlKeeper-T panel
logic board in their existing cabinets driving their existing relays. The SPOC card
allows them to easily retrofit their cabinet to allow the new logic board to drive the
old relays, an inexpensive way to upgrade the system. Controls on the SPOC are
similar to that on the RSC with the rocker switch and status LEDs.
Additional Features Relay Interface Module

The RSC and SPOC have the same optional function as the LiteKeeper SOC card
that provides for an external, maintained dry contact input to control all the relays in
the enclosure.
The external contact closure forces all relays in the enclosure to an ON or OFF state
independent of the control panel status. After the contact is opened, the relays return
to their pre-override state. The primary use of this override is to turn relays on in
case of the loss of normal power. It is not possible to selectively override relays
within the enclosure.
Cooper Controls has a Relay Interface Module which monitors normal power. In the
event of normal power loss, it forces all relays in the enclosure on or off. This
device when used in conjunction with a CK T enclosure assembly to force lighting
ON has been approved to meet UL924 standards. Please refer to the section
Additional SOC Features Relay Interface Module on page 4-5 for details
regarding wiring and practices with this device.
It is important to note that:
The transformer must be powered from an emergency power

source as power to the transformer is required for the external
override to operate in a power down situation.
This override takes precedence over the rocker switch until the
override is released.
With an RSC and serial relay cards, all relays will close despite
relay hardware type when forced to an ALL ON condition.
With an SPOC Normally closed relays will turn OFF when the
external override is moved to the ON position and turn ON when
the external override is moved to the OFF position.
The manual switch integral to the relay on the Latching Relay Card
has the ultimate override capability.
It is not permitted to daisy chain external overrides from one

external override source into several ControlKeeper-T enclosures.
Each external override connection to the RSC must have a separate
isolated dry contact closure.
RSC and SPOC Power

The relay stack controller is powered from the transformer through the red and blue
wires into a white Molex connector. These wires provide 8-10VAC through the blue
pair and 18-20VAC through the red pair to power the RSC, relay stack and
ControlKeeper-T logic board. Internal to the RSC, they are converted to the
necessary voltages to run these components, i.e. 5VDC and 24VDC.
LED Indicators
LED
Description of normal operation
Power
Should be lit steady when power exists to run the

RSC.
Status
When there are no communications to the relay

stack occurring, the LED will stay on approximately
4 seconds and flash off for a second. If there are
commands being processed, the status LED will
flash more frequently as the commands are going
through.
In newer installations, the RSC status LED will flash
rapidly if it can not contact one of the relay cards in
the enclosure, signaling that there is a problem in
communications of the serial stack.
ALL ON
Will be lit if the panel has been overridden using the

RSC switch ON or through the bypass connector.
ALL OFF
Will be lit if the panel has been overridden using the

RSC switch OFF or through the bypass connector.
Center Rail and Relay Card Types

Center Rails
Each enclosure comes pre-equipped with all center rails up to the capacity for that
enclosure size. Each center rail comes with four connection points to allow for
control of four relay cards per rail. We have made some modifications to improve
our products since the release of the ControlKeeper-T. We have changed connector
types since the first released rails. Newer rails will have shrouded connector points.
Older rails will have unshrouded connector points. This is important to note if
looking to obtain replacement parts for a site.
Enclosure with Center Rail Installed
Serial Relay Card General Information

There are several relay card configurations available for use in the lighting controller
enclosure. Current Relay Card offerings include the Standard Relay Card
(sSRC) Normally Open and Normally Closed, Latching Relay Card (sLRC), and
Two-Pole Relay Card (sTPRC) Normally Open and Normally Closed.
We have made some modifications to improve our products since the release of the
ControlKeeper-T. We have changed connector types since the first released relay
cards. Newer relay cards will have shrouded connector points. Older relay cards
will have unshrouded connector points. This is important to note if looking to obtain
replacement parts for a site as newer relay cards can not plug into older rails. We
can still obtain unshrouded connection parts for replacement if you have a site that
requires replacements.
The relays are closed by a DC signal generated by the control panel or by the
Standard Override Card (SOC). The DC signal can come from the following:
Individual relay override switches on the relay cards.
External bypass switch wired into the terminal block on the RSC card.
Override switch on the RSC. The RSC override will immediately turn
the relays on or off. Relays will close in the ALL ON position
regardless of relay type. Relays will open in the ALL OFF position
regardless of relay type.
From the ControlKeeper-T panel in response to time schedules, switch

inputs, manual commands from the touch screen or Enterprise
Software, etc.
Serial Standard Relay Card (sSRC):

This card contains four electrically held relays with contacts rated for 120/277VAC,
20 amp circuits. Unless specifically ordered for normally closed relays, the
Standard Relay Card has normally open contacts.
On power up the control panel actuates the relays to the correct on/off state after a
short evaluation period. Remember that during a power down state, the relays will
resume their true hardware state, i.e. if normally open, they will open on power
down, normally closed will close.
Serial Latching Relay Card (sLRC):

This card contains four latching relays with contacts rated for use on
120/277/347VAC, 20Amp circuits. During a power down situation, the relays will
hold in their last known state until power returns.
Serial Two Pole Relay Card (sTPRC)

This card contains two two-pole relays with contacts rated for use on
208/240/480VAC at a maximum of 20 Amps. The Serial Two Pole Relay Card may
be ordered for normally open or normally closed configuration. During a power
down situation, the relay will revert to its natural hardware state until power is
resumed at which time, it will resume its properly programmed state.
To program the controller to run the two pole relay, you will need to program the
proper control relays. Each two pole relay takes up two relay slots. The bottom
relay slot of each two pole relay is the control relay for that relay. This is the relay
that must be programmed in order to command the relay. For ease of programming,
technical support recommends that both relay spaces be programmed with the same
programming.
Knockout Locations and High and Low Voltage

Separation
Knockout locations are available for piping in conduit for both the low and high
voltage sections. Conduit punch holes cannot exceed 3 (inches) from the back of
the enclosure. If this measurement is exceeded, the logic board will not fit properly
inside the enclosure.
It is important that there be a physical separation of low and high-voltage wiring.
Low Voltage wiring can be brought into the enclosure from the bottom or bottom left
of the enclosure. If Low-Voltage wire must be brought into the cabinet from the top
section, there is a knockout reserved on the left side which will allow conduit to be
run from the top of the enclosure into the low-voltage wiring area.
High Voltage wiring should not be brought into the enclosure through the bottom or
bottom left corner of the enclosure.
components.
Additional Available Enclosure Accessories

Additional Enclosure Accessories are available for the 16, 32, and 48 size
enclosures. This includes a High Voltage Barrier kit as well as a Flushmount kit.
High Voltage Barrier Kit

The High Voltage Barrier Kit allows separation of relay cards to meet NEC
requirements for voltage separation. It must be placed in-between relay cards where
the connectors meet.
High Voltage Divider

Used in conjunction with the High Voltage Barrier, the high voltage divider can
further segregate a single serial relay card from the others in the cabinet.
Flushmount Kit
The Flushmount Kit is a door and flange assembly that replaces our current
enclosure door. It allows the contractor to mount the enclosure flush with the wall.
ControlKeeper-T Item Reference Diagram
System Status LEDs
Reset Switch
Power Cable Connection from RSC
Communications Cable Connection from RSC (RED

CABLE)s
Digita Switch LED indicators
Digita Switch RJ Port
RS232 COM Port, RJ Connector
Lighting Network Port 1 (CAT5 RJ45 Connection)
Lighting Network Port 2 (CAT5 RJ45 Connection)
10
Lighting Network Terminal Block (Twisted Pair

Connection)
11
Network Termination Jumper
12
LCD Display Contrast Tuning Potentiometer
13
14
Remote Power Connector (+24VDC & DC Ground)
15
Contact Input Switch Wiring Terminals
16
Relay Stack Controller Power Wiring
17
RSC Status LED
18
Communication Cable Connection from CKT to

RSC (Red CAT5 Cable Provided)
19
Power Connection from the CKT to RSC
20
RSC Power LED
21
RSC Override Switch ALL OFF/AUTO/ ALL ON
22
In V5 panels: Analog Photosensor Wiring Channels.
ControlKeeper 4 Panel
ControlKeeper 4 Item Reference Drawing
ControlKeeper-4 Wiring Information
ControlKeeper 4 High and Low Voltage Separation

enclosure.
components.
ControlKeeper 4 Additional Information

The ControlKeeper-4 has a single tap transformer for either 120or 277VAC. It must
be pre-ordered with the proper transformer voltage.
The ControlKeeper-4 relay options include Standard Relays Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
ControlKeeper 2 Panel
ControlKeeper-2 Item Reference Drawing

High Voltage Compartment
Low Voltage Compartment
6
NETWORK
C19
R49
12
R8
RELAY 1
Q2
R6A
U46
SN2
F2
11
10
RP2
J51
F1
U45
L1
S4
L3
MOV2
R57
MOV8
R6B
U47
R6
MOV9
R54
Q3
C18
MO V7
L34
R48
D4
C50
C39
C62
K2
R56
C55
S1
R1
C37
L4
F3
U37
U36
MOV6
R13
C59
C36
C71
TF1
U8
ON
C38
I1
C64
+24
13
BR1
C61
C63
CH1
C2
OFF
C1
D99
ON
CH2
U35
SD1
RP7
RN6
+24
SR1
OFF
14
S2
C99
C9
C80
GND
U2
U3
U4
RP1
C53
C52
C81
SN1
R7
CX2
C57
U30
RELAY 2
R7A
L5
MOV1
15
X2
Q1
C51
C82
D3
C100
C83
C58
U7
X1
U38
K1
C56
U9
54-020610-__
54-020611-__
54-020620-__
54-020621-__
U1
R7B
Q4
CX1
U32
S5
R71
R112
RESET
R61
C21
R12
C31
C10
J2
R111
S3
18
19
17
16

1
Peripheral Power GND connection
Options Switches (SW1 used to switch between

Digita Switch or COM port capability)
Switch Input Wiring Channels
RS-232 Communications Port
Network Wiring Terminal Block
Panel Address Switch
System Status LEDs
Relay 1 Override Switch
10
Relay 1 Status LED
11
High Voltage Barrier
12
Relay #1
13
Transformer Wiring
14
Transformer Wiring
15
Transformer
16
Relay 2
17
Relay 2 Override Switch
18
Relay 2 Status LED
19
Reset Switch
ControlKeeper 2 Wiring Information
ControlKeeper 2 High and Low Voltage Separation

enclosure.
components.
ControlKeeper 2 Additional Information

The ControlKeeper-2 has a single tap transformer for either 120or 277VAC. It must
be pre-ordered with the proper transformer voltage.
The ControlKeeper-2 relay options include Standard Relays Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
ControlKeeper 4A Panel
The ControlKeeper 4A will not be discussed in detail in regards to commissioning.
This unit will be trained separately in a separately offered advanced training for this
product.
ControlKeeper 4A Item Reference
Network LED
All ON LED
ALL OFF, AUTO, ALL ON switch
All OFF LED
Address dipswitch
Digita CAN RX and TX LEDs
Panel reset switch
Status LED
Relay Card Connector
10
Individual Relay Override Switch
11
Relay Wiring Terminal Block
12
Transformer wiring (120 or 277VAC)
13
Transformer
14
Power LED
15
Transformer Secondary Wire Connection
16
17
Peripheral Power Connector (+24V and GND)
18
Input Microprocessor Status LED
19
Output Microprocessor Status LED
20
Board Microprocessor Reset Button
21
Contact Input Wiring Terminal Block
22
0-10V Dimming Outputs
23
Analog Input Wiring Terminal Blocks
24
25
Network Wiring Terminal Block
26
Alternate Network Wiring RJ Jacks
27
Digita Switch Gateway Port
28
Serial COM Port
ControlKeeper-4A Additional Notes
The ControlKeeper-4A has a dual tap 120/277VAC transformer

that is individually replaceable from the rest of the components in
the enclosure.
The ControlKeeper-4A can control a single serial relay card. Any

serial relay card type may be used in the ControlKeeper-4A
The ControlKeeper-4A has four dimmer outputs to allow for

connection to 0-10V dimmable ballasts. No more than 50 ballasts
may be connected to the dimming channels.
The ControlKeeper-4A has an Incandescent Dimmer Module

(IDM) accessory that allows it to dim incandescent lighting loads.
In this configuration, the lighting load high voltage wires terminate
on the IDM and are not run through the ControlKeeper-4A relays.
Incandescent Dimmer Module
Violet terminal
to violet pigtail
of IDM
Gray terminal to
gray pigtail of of
IDM
Match violet pigtail to violet terminal

wire from the CK4A dimming
channel. This corresponds with
dimmer load 1.
Violet 1
Violet 2
GND to Gray
Used on dual dimmer units only.

Match violet pigtail to violet terminal
wire from the CK4A dimming
channel. This corresponds with
dimmer load 2.
Match gray pigtail to gray terminal wire from
CK4A dimming channels. If using a Dual
Dimmer unit, both gray wires from the CK4A will
be tied to this pigtail.
Incandescent Dimmer Module Wiring
In addition to switch input channels and Digita Switch support, the

ControlKeeper-4A allows up to 4 channels of analog inputs to be
landed. Cooper Controls can provide 0-10V photosensors for use
in dimming applications.
ControlKeeper (non-touch screen) Item Reference

Diagram
Prior to the release of the ControlKeeper-T, the ControlKeeper was available in a 16
and 32 size enclosure of the current LiteKeeper 16/32 design. This logic board is no
longer available but due to the large number of sites with this configuration, this item
reference is being included.

1
System Status LEDs
Digita Switch Gateway Connector
Digita Switch Status LEDs
Relay Status LEDs
Panel Reset Switch
Panel ID# Selection Switch
RS232 Port, RJ12 Connector
Remote/Local Jumpers
Network Termination Jumper, J7
10
Network Terminal
11
+24V Power Terminals
12
Panel Power Transformer Connector
13
Override Card Transformer Connector
14
Panel Connection to Override Card
15
16
Contact Input Terminals
17
Program Entry Keypad
18
Programming Display
Chapter 9 Network Wiring and

ControlKeeper Accessories
Networking Controllers
Sample Network Wiring Applications
Network Wiring and ControlKeeper Accessories 9-1
What is involved with Commissioning Networked

Systems?
Additional expectations involving commissioning networked systems include:
Visually verify all network wiring to terminal connection points is

free of shorts between terminals and polarity is observed.
Verify that the two distinct ends of the daisy chain network are
properly terminated with the network jumpers.
Verify that all panels are addressed properly.
During panel checkout, verify that Keeper Enterprise Software can

communicate back to panels that have already been brought on
line.
It may be necessary to completely check out the lighting system

prior to checking inputs for function as commands may be shared
between panels.
Network Facts
The preferred network cabling is Belden 9841. This consists of a

22AWG twisted pair with shield. Alternately (but less preferred), the
contractor may use CAT5.
Network specifications state that there should be no more than 4000'

and 35 stations (one station = control panel, Gateway, etc) on the
network. While we have been able to communicate safely in networks
that exceed this recommendation it may be necessary in some situations

to use network repeaters.
The perfect RS-485 network is a continuous daisy chain from one

control panel to the next. Every device except for the two devices on
the ends will have both an in and out pair of wires.
If wire is used that has a shield, the network shield should be left
floating and should not be connected to ground at any location unless
asked to by technical support. Although the enclosures are painted, you
should take care to wrap bare shield to prevent it from touching the
enclosure or other metal connected to earth ground.
Network termination jumpers are on each networkable panel. The

jumpers should be in place (over both pins) only on the end of network
devices (two devices). You should remove the jumpers on all other
middle of the network devices. Network characteristics are negatively
affected if more than two of these jumpers are in place.
Since the network is a single connection between control panels that

may get their power from different sources within the building, a short
in the wiring to conduit ground can provide a path for ground loops. If
this condition exists, some of the ground current flowing between
different locations in the building can flow in the network cable. This
current can, at a minimum, disrupt network communications or can be
large enough to damage network chips.
The Network LED is in a cluster of three LED's just to the left of the
relay status LED's. This LED should be completely off when there are
no active network communications. It should flash crisply when
network communications are active to any control panel on the
network. It should never faintly flicker or glow. It has no intelligence
and will light when there are any transmissions on the network - noise,
polarity problems, etc. - as well as with valid network transmissions. If
you see the network LED on constantly, be suspicious of a reverse
polarity problem. If the LED flickers you may have an intermittent
short or a problem with one of the transmitters.
The ControlKeeper-T and ControlKeeper-4A panels allow for use of

CAT5 cable connection for the lighting network by employing RJ jacks
on the lighting control board. The controllers also allow interface with
other controller types that use the terminal block for wiring twisted pair
wiring. A special 3 position terminal block is located at the top of the
panel to allow for this connection. If CAT5 cable is used, it is
recommended that the following wiring standard be used:
If it is desired to provide an RJ head on one end and twisted pair wire

on the other end, please note that the wires used for network
transmission are pins 3 (positive) & 6 (negative) or White/Green
(positive) and Green/White (negative).
Network Addressing
With the exception of the ControlKeeper T panel, network addresses of networked
devices and panels are set through a binary address dip switch. The ControlKeeper
Ts panel address is set through the touch screen display.
Switch positions are labeled 1 through 8 and valued at 1 through 128. The ID# is
calculated by adding the values of each position that is ON. Addresses 1 through
254 are valid addresses. Address 255 is reserved for system use. Zero is not a valid
system address. For example, in the switch setting shown below, positions 1 and 3
are ON. Position 1 has a value of 1, position 3 has a value of 4. The calculated ID
number is 5 (1 +4).
Switch Position
Switch 1 = Value 1
Switch 2 = Value 2
Switch 3 = Value 4
Switch 4 = Value 8
Switch 5 = Value 16
Switch 6 = Value 32
Switch 7 = Value 64
Switch 8 = Value 128
To initialize the ID# within the ControlKeeper, it is necessary to do a reset by

pressing the reset button.
Every device on the network must have a unique network address.

The same wall switches that are used in the LiteKeeper system may be used in the
ControlKeeper System. Please see Contact Closure Switch Inputs on page 5-1 for
information on commissioning expectations, terminology and other information.
This section deals specifically with differences in wiring and application between the
controllers.
Connecting Contact Closure Switches

The ControlKeeper-T, ControlKeeper-4, and ControlKeeper-2 logic boards can
support a total of 64 software switch inputs. The ControlKeeper 4A can support up
to 128 inputs. These can be mapped to any available contact closure channels on the
board or may be used for Digita switches.
Number of Contact Closure Switch Channels per Panel Type

Panel Type
Number of Contact Input Channels
ControlKeeper-T
32
ControlKeeper-4
ControlKeeper-2
ControlKeeper-4A
4 if using 3 wire momentary switches

8 if using 2 wire toggle or maintained switches.
Contact Input Switch Wiring

This section describes the wiring for dry contact closure devices.
1.
2.
from line-voltage wiring. .All low-voltage wiring must be run in
separate conduit from line-voltage wiring.
3.
Use 18 AWG twisted, unshielded wire for all low-voltage dry

contact closure device wiring.
4.

feet.
5.

connection to the ControlKeeper panel.
6.
When powering peripheral devices such as motion sensors and

photosensors from the ControlKeeper panel, there may be a
limitation on the number of sensors that can be supported. Please
contact Cooper Controls for specific information on device
limitations if using these devices.
7.

8.
For ControlKeeper-T and ControlKeeper-4A only, ensure that the

local remote jumpers have been moved to the local position (over
pins 2 & 3) for both jumpers. This enables 24VDC to the lowvoltage switch channels. See Figure below for location.
9.
Please see wiring detail in the figure below for details on

connections of different devices to the ControlKeeper system.
ControlKeeper-T Low-Voltage Switch Wiring
Low Voltage
Switch Inputs
Additional Switch Types

Momentary Switch
(3 wire)
ON
+24
OFF
ON
+24
CH1
CH2
Maintained Switch
(2 wire)
ON
+24
OFF
CH1
CH2
OFF
Toggle Switch
(2 wire momentary)
ControlKeeper-2 Low Voltage Switch Wiring
ControlKeeper-4 Low Voltage Switch Wiring
Local remote
Jumpers in Local
Position
ON/IN
+24VDC
Pilot Lit Momentary

Switch
(4 wire)
OFF/IN
PILOT/LS
ON/IN
Momentary Switch
(3 wire)
+24VDC
OFF/IN
ON/IN
Toggle Switch
(2 wire)
+24VDC
Pilot Lit
Toggle Switch
(3 wire)
Maintained Switch
(2 wire)
+24VDC
ON/IN
PILOT
ON/IN
+24VDC
ControlKeeper4A Switch Wiring
Using Pilot Lit Contact Input Switches (CK-T & CK-4A only)
The ControlKeeper-T and ControlKeeper-4A support the use of pilot lit switches.
ControlKeeper-4 and ControlKeeper-2 do not have a pilot lit option. Unlike the
LiteKeeper panels, no extra hardware (lighted switch card) is necessary. The lighted
switch points are on the logic board instead.
It is possible to run either Incandescent or LED style pilot lit switches from a
ControlKeeper-T or ControlKeeper-4A. Cooper Controls does not support switches
obtained from other sources unless a sample is sent to us for testing first in order to
make certain that the switch is in the proper voltage range, current draw, and has the
correct resistors installed for proper operation.

ControlKeeper-T 16 panel, 45 in a 32 size panel, or 30 in a 48
size panel, with no more than 6 LEDs per LSO channel. You can
have no more than 20 LED lighted switches in a ControlKeeper4A panel with no more than 6 LEDs per LSO channel.

size panel, with no more than 3 bulbs per LSO channel. You can
have no more than 10 incandescent lighted switches in a
ControlKeeper-4A panel with no more than 3 bulbs per LSO
channel.
Please note that these figures may decrease if motion sensors, photosensors or digital
switches are being used with the controller. Please contact Technical Support with
the numbers and types of inputs you are using to determine if the controller will be
able to support them without overloading the power supply.
It is possible to program the switch bulb or LED to operate as a pilot light or as a
locator light. With the pilot light function, when the associated load is ON, the
switch will be illuminated. With the locator light function, the switch will be dimly
illuminated at all times going full bright when the associated load is ON.
To wire a lighted switch:
1.
Verify that there is no continuity between the pilot light wire and
the ON, OFF and +24V legs. If a short is detected, do not wire to
the Lighted Switch Output as damage will result.
2.
Make certain that power is off to the logic board. Place override
switch in ALL ON position if lighting is necessary during wiring.
3.
Connect the switch to the low-voltage input terminals at the bottom

of the lighting control panel as appropriate for the type of switch,
see previous section on contact input switch wiring.
4.
Connect the pilot light wire to the same switch channels LSO
terminal. (DO NOT CONNECT PILOT LIGHT WIRE TO MORE
THAN ONE LSO CHANNEL. DAMAGE TO THE PANEL OR
SWITCH MAY OCCUR.)
5.
Once all wiring and jumper placement has been completed, power
up the logic panel. If panel has been overridden with the Standard
Override Card Switch while being wired, return switch to AUTO
or middle position to allow normal lighting to resume after making
certain that all necessary relays are on via the relay status LEDs.
6.
Program in the desired pilot light or locator light functionality into

the controllers.
Digita Switch Wiring

Each ControlKeeper-T 16 and 32 enclosure units are capable of supporting up to 28
Digita Switch device stations and 1 Digita Switch Gateway. Each ControlKeeper
T 48 size enclosure unit is capable of supporting up to 24 Digita Switch device

stations and 1 Digita Switch Gateway. (The number the controller is able to support
is dependent on the number of other low voltage devices wired that require power
from the logic board. Please contact Technical Support for exact details of how
many devices your logic board can power.)
ControlKeeper-4, ControlKeeper-4A and ControlKeeper-2 controllers are capable of
supporting up to 14 Digita Switch device stations and 1 Digita Switch Gateway.
Digita Switches do not wire directly to the panels but are wired to a CAN Bus
network that connects to the panels through a Digita Switch Gateway. The
following instructions describe the Digita Switch Gateway connection to the
panels.
Digita switch stations are available in the following configurations:
Digita 1
Digita 5 1 Button
Digita 5 2 Button
Digita 5 3 Button
Digita 5 4 Button
Digita 5 5 Button
The Digita 1 Switch is a decorator style rocker switch which has no status feedback.
The Digita 5 switch has from one to five control buttons, each with an LED indicator
that can be programmed to provide either relay status feedback or switch status
feedback. With the Digita 5 switch model, each button of the Digita 5 switch must be
set up as a separate Switch Input.
General Digita Switch Wiring Instructions

This section describes the wiring for low-voltage Greengate Digita Switches. All
installation of Digita Devices must be performed by qualified personnel or service
technicians and follow National Electrical Code and any other codes that may apply.
1.
All Digita Switch wiring is Class II low-voltage wiring. Do not run

low-voltage wire in the same conduit as line-voltage wiring.
Ensure that the low voltage wiring is run into the lighting
controller through the low-voltage side of the lighting control
enclosure.
2.
Digita Switch cable type should be Cooper LCCNP (non plenum),

Cooper LCCP (plenum), Belden 1502R (non-plenum) or 1502P
(plenum).
For best network performance, one of the suggested cables should
be used. If the specified cable is not used and communications
problems occur that require troubleshooting assistance, additional
charges for support may be assessed.
3.
The Digita Switch network shall be run in a daisy chain

configuration with two distinct ends. The Digita Gateway may be
located anywhere within this daisy chain and does not have to be
an end device.
4.
The Digita Switch network shall not exceed 1000 feet.
5.
The Digita Switch station or gateway that is at the end of the

network must have a termination resistor installed across the CAN-
L and CAN-H wires. Termination devices have been provided with

the Digita Gateway for this purpose. Alternately, the 120 ohm
resistor may be taken out of the termination device and wired
directly into the Digita Switch terminal block at the two end
locations.
6.
If splices are necessary, it is recommended that connections be

made using wire nuts. Make sure to use the appropriate size for
optimal connection.
7.
Cable connections to Digita 5 switches and Digita Gateways are

made to a removable 5-way connector block located at the rear of
the Digita station. Digita 1 switch connections are made to the
provided pigtail.
8.
Wiring should not be done with power to the switch network.

Disconnect the Digita Gateway power wiring from the lighting
panel while wiring additional Digita devices.
9.
Connection to the lighting control panel is made through the

provided phone style connection cable. All ControlKeeper panels
will use the Gray phone style cable to connect. This cable is
polarity sensitive and has both ends labeled. Make sure to connect
the correctly labeled end to the lighting controller and Smartjack
end to the Digita Gateway.
10. If using a ControlKeeper2, it will be necessary to set option select

switch 1 to the ON position to set the com port as a Digita Switch
port.
from station to station. Total network length can not exceed 1000 feet. The Digita Gateway
device may be anywhere in the switch network. The two end devices must have the 120
Ohm termination devices provided with the Digita Gateway installed to terminate the CAN-H
and CAN-L wires.
Digita Switch Port
Digita
Gateway
Digita 5 - 2B Digita 5 - 3B
Peripheral Power Connector
Digita 5 - 5B
Digita 1
Network Terminator
120 Ohm Resistor
Digita Network
Cooper LC Cable or Belden

1502 Wiring Scheme
GND
(black)
CAN-L
(blue)
Green (Ground)
CAN-L
(blue)
Blue/White (CAN-L)
GND
CANL
Digita 1
Pigtail
CANH
V+
CAN-H
(white)
V+
(red)
GND
(black)
Digita 5 & Digita

Gateway
Terminal Block
Blue (CAN-H)
Green/White (Power)
CAN-H
(white)
Shield drain wire is not used and should be taped

to prevent shorts
V+
(red)
Digita Wiring Detail
DC Ground - Black
CAN_L - Blue
DigitaSwitch
Network
CAN_H - White
Power (24VDC) - Red
Digita Network Termination Wiring Detail

pins 2 & 3)
Wire provided phone style cable

to DIGITA jack on CK-T and to
IN
HT
LIG
CONTROLLER
LED4
Digita Switch
Gateway Front View
RSC LINK
CAN-TX
LED5
CAN-RX
DIGITA
J4
J5
RS-232
J6
PCI-NET
PCI-NET
+NET
DIGITA
NET
PCI-NET
J3
SMARTJACK
J8
IND1
Digita Switch
Gateway Back View
NET TERM
T B1
SR1
C29
CW

CK-T TB2 DC GND
REM
LOCAL
J9
LCD
ADJ
J10
GND
CanL
C43
REM
PWR
GND
CanH
V+
+24
TB2
ICD LINK

Switch Gateway V+ to
CK-T TB2 +24VDC
LED6
LSC
TEST
ON +24 OFF LSO
24
ON +24 OFF LSO
ON +24 OFF LSO
ON +24 OFF LSO
ON +24 OFF LSO
ON +24 OFF LSO
ON +24 OFF LSO
ON +24 OFF LSO
CH 25
CH 26
CH 27
CH 28
CH 29
CH 30
CH 31
CH 32
CH 9
CH 10
CH 11
CH 12
CH 13
CH 14
CH 15
CH 16

TP1
ON +24 OFF LSO
ON +24 OFF LSO
ON +24 OFF LSO
ON +24 OFF LSO
ON +24 OFF LSO
ON +24 OFF LSO
ON +24 OFF LSO
ON +24 OFF LSO
Connection to ControlKeeper-T
CONTROLLER
Digita Switch
Gateway Back View

to DIGITA jack on CK-4A and to

top pins)
SMARTJACK
Digita Switch
Gateway Front View
BLACK wire to Digita Switch

Gateway GND to CK-4A TB2
DC GND
RED wire from Digita Switch

Gateway V+ to CK-4A TB2
+24VDC

Connection to ControlKeeper-4A
Digita Switch
Gateway Back View

to DIGITA jack on CK and to
CK4 DC GND
Switch Gateway V+ to CK4
+24VDC

Digita Switch
Gateway Front View
Connection to ControlKeeper-4
ControlKeeper-2 Panel Low-Voltage

Section
Wire phone style cable to RJ11
jack on CK2 and to Digita Switch
Gateway
NETWORK
J51
U46
U4 5
Digita Switch
Gateway Front View
S4
L1
L3
DIGITA
L3 4
U4 7
LIGHTI
NG CO
NTR OLL
ER
S1
L4
U3 6
U37
U8
ON
CH1
Digita Switch
Gateway Back View
+24
OFF
ON
CH2
U35
+24
1 2 3 4
S2
OFF
C 80
U4
U3 0
L5
U1
U7
U9
CanH
V+
U 32

Switch Gateway +24V to
CK2 +24V
U3 8

CK2 GND
GND
CanL
U3
54-020610-__
54-020611-__
54-020620-__
54-020621-__
Cabling is Cooper LC
Cable, Belden 1502R,
or Belden 1502P
U2
GND
S5
RESET
S3
Option Select DIP Switch 1 must be set to

ON in order for DIGITA Switch Operation
through the RJ-11 port.
Connection to ControlKeeper-2
For information on addressing and additional settings, please see Digita

Configuration Settings on page 5-13.
Past Wiring Information

In the past, Greengate has recommended CAT5 wiring instead of the current Belden
1502 wiring implementation. If commissioning a site prior to the change in
recommendation, it is important to note that all eight conductors of the CAT5 cable
will be used to connect to the Digita network. Power and Ground are tripled to
prevent voltage drop problems.
Green, Brown, Orange = Ground
Blue/White = CAN-L
Blue = CAN-H
Green/White, Brown/White, Orange/White = +24VDC
CAT5 Digita Backbone Network
Digita Switch Commissioning Testing

1.

power and communications cable connections to the Greengate lighting
control panel.
2.
With an ohm meter, at any Digita station, measure between the CAN-L
and CAN-H wires. The measurement should be close to 60 ohms for a
properly terminated network. If not close to 60 ohms, check that the
termination resistors are installed at the two end locations.
3.
GND wires. The measurement should be greater than 2 megohms.
4.
CAN-H wire and the +V and CAN-L wire. Repeat this test measuring
between the GND and CAN-H and CAN-L wire. All measurements
should be greater than 2 megohms.
5.
If these measurements are correct, proceed with powering the Digita

network. If incorrect, troubleshoot wiring to determine cause or contact
technical support for further assistance.
Motion Sensor and Contact Input Photosensor Inputs

The same motion sensors and contact input photosensors that are used in the
LiteKeeper system may be used in the ControlKeeper System. Please see Motion
Sensor Inputs on page 5-15 and Photosensor Inputs on page 5-19 for information on
commissioning expectations, terminology and other information. This section deals
specifically with differences in wiring and application between the controllers.
General Motion Sensor and Photosensor Wiring

Instructions
This section describes the wiring for low-voltage Greengate sensors. There are input
wiring terminals on the ControlKeeper to allow for wiring of these devices.
1.
2.
3.
4.

feet.
5.

connection to the panel. Verify there are no shorts between the
motion sensor ground wire and +24V and On wires.
6.

7.
For CKT and CK4A only, ensure that the local remote jumpers
have been moved to the local position (over pins 2 & 3) for both
jumpers (J5 & J6) to enable 24VDC to the low-voltage switch
channels.
Connecting Motion Sensors

Motion sensors connect into the contact closure switch channels available on the
Greengate sensors have been tested with our systems and because of this we know
the total number that a panels power supply can support. If motion sensors are
being used on a job site that have not been provided by Cooper, please keep in mind
that the panel power supply may not be able to power the equivalent number of
sensors. In the event that the sensor power draw exceeds the capabilities of the
panel, external power supplies or power packs may be employed. If power packs are
being used, isolated outputs (dry contacts) must be used for the connection to the
lighting control system. This will prevent bucking power supplies.
Panel type
Greengate
Greengate Greengate
PIR Sensor DT Sensor Ultrasonic

ControlKeeper T 48
60
24
30
ControlKeeper T 32
90
36
45
ControlKeeper T 16
150
60
75
ControlKeeper 4A
40
16
20
ControlKeeper 4
40
16
20
ControlKeeper 2
40
16
20
These figures are contingent on no other peripheral devices being powered

from the logic panel. If using Digita Switches, Photosensors or Lighted
Switches with your controller in addition to the motion sensors, please
contact Technical Support to determine the total power draw. If it becomes
necessary to go beyond the number of sensors that the panel power supply
can support, power packs are available.

pins 2 & 3)
REM PWR DC GND

(Black Wire)
ON
(Blue
Wire)
+24VDC
(Red Wire)
Black
Typical Greengate
Motion Sensor to CK-T Connection
+24VDC
(Red Wire)
REM PWR DC GND

(Black Wire)
ON/IN
(Blue Wire)
Black
Typical Greengate
Local remote
Jumpers in Local
Position
Contact Input
Photosensor
Wiring
Motion Sensor to CK-4A
Bla
ck
+24VDC
(Red Wire)
Black
REM PWR DC GND

(Black Wire)
ON
(Blue Wire)
Typical Greengate
Motion Sensor to CK-4 Wiring
dW
(R
e
C
VD
+2
4
ON
Black
(B
lue
W
ire
ire
)
Low Voltage
Switch Inputs
ON
+24
OFF
CH1
ON
+24
OFF
CH2
GND
Typical Greengate
REM PWR DC GND
(Black Wire)
Motion Sensor to CK-2 Wiring
Connecting Contact Input Photosensors

Photosensors connect into the contact closure switch channels available on the
ControlKeeper controllers.
There is a limit to the number of contact input photosensors that a Greengate panel
can support:
Panel type
PPS-4
PPS-5
Former
PPS-4/
PPS-5
ControlKeeper T 48
30
30
ControlKeeper T 32
45
45
ControlKeeper T 16
75
15
75
ControlKeeper 4A
20
20
ControlKeeper 4
20
20
ControlKeeper 2
20
20

pins 2 & 3)
+24VDC (Red
Wire)
PPS4
+24VDC
(Red Wire)
Black
Contact Input
Photosensor
Wiring
Yellow & White

wires not used
PPS5
REM PWR DC GND

(Black Wire)
ON (Blue
Wire)
Black
ON
(White Wire)
Photosensor Connection to CK-T
ON/IN
(Blue Wire)
Black
Yellow & White
wires not used
REM PWR DC GND

(Black Wire)
PPS4
+24VDC
(Red Wire)
Local remote
Jumpers in Local
Position
+24VDC
(Red Wire)
Contact Input
Photosensor
Wiring
PPS5
Black
ON/IN
(White Wire)
Photosensor Connection to CK-4A
B la
ck
+24VDC
(Red Wire)
Yellow & White
wires not used
PPS4
Black
+24VDC
(Red Wire)
REM PWR DC GND

(Black Wire)
ON
(Blue
Wire)
Contact Input
Photosensor Wiring
PPS5
ON
(White Wire)
Black
Photosensor Connection to CK-4
Low Voltage
Switch Inputs
PPS5
Photosensor
PPS4
Photosensor
ON (Blue Wire)
Black
+24VDC (Red Wire)
ON
+24
OFF
CH1
ON
+24
OFF
CH2
GND
ON (White Wire)
ON
+24
+24VDC (Red Wire)
OFF
Black
ON
+24
OFF
GND
REM PWR DC GND

(Black Wire)
REM PWR DC GND

(Black Wire)
Photosensor Connection to CK-2
Sharing Switches between Networked Controllers

Networked Controllers can share switch inputs by programming rather than by
hardwiring switches to all panels as in the standalone panels. In a networked system,
it is possible to broadcast a switch name across the network wires and have other
panels that are programmed to listen for that switch respond. This is set up by
setting the wall switch to broadcast and setting up a remote in the listening panels
with the exact same name as the original switch. Link relays to the switch and
remotes that you wish to have controlled by this wall switch.
Analog Photosensor Inputs

Analog sensors currently work with the ControlKeeper T and ControlKeeper 4A to
allow for daylight harvesting and daylight dimming applications. Models available
include an indoor sensor, outdoor sensor, skylight sensor and atrium sensor. There
are four analog input channels on both the ControlKeeper-T and ControlKeeper 4A
panels to allow for connection of these sensor types.
Analog sensors return a range of values which adjusts based on ambient light level.
Within the sensors range, it is possible to select a value called a threshold to allow
for lighting to be switch on or off or to simply try to maintain a level. One
photosensor may be used to trigger at multiple thresholds through programming.
What is involved with Commissioning Analog

Photosensor Inputs?
Expectations on commissioning photosensor inputs include:


for programming.


Adjust thresholds by logging photosensor values over time, using a

foot-candle meter and choosing thresholds that lighting should be
turning on and off at or in the case of dimming, maintaining..
Wiring to the ControlKeeper T

The ControlKeeper-T supports up to four 0-10V Photosensors which Cooper
Controls provides. See the below diagram regarding wiring:
All input wiring should be done without power to the board. Use 18AWG twisted
pair wiring to connect the sensor to the terminal blocks according to sensor
manufacturer installation instructions. Other wire sizes may be used depending on
wire length. If you are using a shielded cable, do not connect the shield to ground at
any location. Leave the shield disconnected, making certain that the shield wire is
not left exposed. Recommended max wire length: 500 feet.
ControlKeeper-T Analog Wiring
Wiring to the ControlKeeper-4A

The ControlKeeper-4A supports up to four 0-10V Photosensors which Cooper
Controls provides. See the below diagram regarding wiring:
All input wiring should be done without power to the board. Use 18AWG twisted
pair wiring to connect the sensor to the terminal blocks according to sensor
manufacturer installation instructions. Other wire sizes may be used depending on
wire length. If you are using a shielded cable, do not connect the shield to ground at
any location. Leave the shield disconnected, making certain that the shield wire is
not left exposed. Recommended max wire length: 500 feet.
ControlKeeper-4A Analog Wiring
Analog Photosensor Placement

The location of the photosensor is integral to the proper operation of your lighting
system. Please follow the mounting guidelines outlined in this document for your
photosensor type.
PC-I: Indoor Photosensor Mounting

Mount the sensor in a 3/8 hole in the false ceiling tile fixing it in place with the
adhesive backing.
For daylight dimming applications with a CK4A, the photosensor should be located
so that it views indirect light from its controlled zone.
Locate sensor within its controlled zone so that it "sees" reflected light only.
Window
Light Fixture
Light Fixture
Field of View
Light Fixture
Light Fixture
Field of View
ZONE 1
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
(non-dimmed)
For daylight harvesting ON/OFF applications, the photosensor should be located

between 6 & 8 feet of the window area and be centrally located in the area
illuminated by the electrical lighting that it will be controlling.
Window
Light Fixture
Field of View
Locate sensor 6-8

feet from window
In both applications, the sensor must be mounted so that it looks at reflected light
only and not at any direct light source. Locate the sensor within 500 feet of the
control panel.
PC-O: Outdoor Photosensor Mounting

Locate the sensor on a roof or where it will be exposed to full daylight. Do not locate
the sensor in a shaded location. The sensor should not be located where it will be
exposed to any nighttime illuminations or reflections from metal surfaces or
windows. The sensor must be mounted horizontally facing North, with the hooded
portion on top. Mount the sensor in a standard threaded conduit or knockout.
Locate the sensor within 500 feet of the Control Panel.
PC-A: Atrium Photosensor Mounting

Locate the sensor as close to the atrium window as possible and as far away from the
wall as possible. Mount the sensor vertically with the domed portion facing up.
Mount the sensor in a standard threaded conduit or knockout.
Atrium Sensor in 1/2" conduit. Ideal sensor location is the middle of the atrium glass
facing up.
PC-S: Skylight Photosensor Mounting

Locate the sensor indoors as near to the center of the skylight well as possible or at
least 12 from the side. The sensor should be exposed to full daylight and not be put
in a location that may be shadowed. The sensor must be mounted vertically, with the
dome pointing upwards. Mount the sensor in a standard threaded conduit or
knockout.
Line Voltage Automatic Turn Off Switch

The Line Voltage Automatic Turn Off Switch can be used with the ControlKeeper
series of controllers. For information on wiring the Line Voltage Automatic Turn
Off Switch, please see the section Line Voltage Automatic Turn Off Switch on
page 5-29.
Gateway
The Gateway translates RS-232 Serial COM port communications into RS485
communications. By wiring this device into the daisy chained network, it allows for
a PC to be placed at this location rather than having to plug into a panel directly.
What is involved with Commissioning a Gateway?

Expectations on commissioning Gateways include:
Verify network wiring is not shorted at terminal block and is

properly connected.
Verify that the PC is properly connected using the provided 9 to 25

pin serial cable.
Verify that the gateway has a unique network address.
If at the end of the network, make certain that the network

termination jumper is in place. (You will need to take the back
plate off and slide motherboard out to access this jumper. Factory
configured to be un-terminated).
Verify that the customers computer can talk to the network

using the Keeper Enterprise Software..
Gateway Wiring
Ethernet Interface Module

The Ethernet Interface Module may be used in either a standalone or networked
system to allow for a PC with Enterprise Software to make a connection from any
computer with access to that IP Address. It plugs into any panel in the network
through the panels serial port.
The Ethernet Interface Module may be used to allow access only from within the
internal building LAN or may also be set up by a qualified Network Administrator
for external access through the internet. The following pictures depict these types of
configurations.
TCP/IP Intranet Connection from a Local Location

Lighting Control
Panel onto Lighting
Control Network
NOTE: In this scenario, it is not necessary

to access the external, public internet. The
Ethernet Interface Module may be
accessed directly.
Enterprise Software set up

to talk to lighting control
panels using EIM IP
Address 10.0.0.1 and EIM
Port 10001.
HUB/SWITCH
Ethernet Interface
Module (EIM)
Ethernet Interface Module Private IP
Address : 10.0.0.1
EIM Port Assigned: 10001
Local Computer with

Enterprise Lighting Software
TCP/IP Internet Connection from a Remote Location

Lighting Control
Panel onto Lighting
Control Network
INTERNET
ROUTER
FIREWALL
Enterprise Software
set up to talk to lighting
control panels using
Firewall IP Address
64.30.7.31 and
Firewall Port 10001.
Firewall Public IP Address:

64.30.7.31
Firewall Port for EIM: 10001 - This
should be the same port number as
the port assigned in the EIM
Firewall Port 10001 is assigned to
direct all traffic coming to this port to
private IP Address 10.0.0.1
HUB/SWITCH
Ethernet Interface
Module (EIM)
Ethernet Interface Module
Private IP Address : 10.0.0.1
EIM Port Assigned: 10001
Remote Computer with

Enterprise Lighting Software
What is involved with Commissioning an Ethernet

Interface Module?
Expectations on commissioning EIMs include:
Verify that unit is configured with the correct IP Address settings.
Verify that the unit is wired properly to the lighting controller.
Verify by a crossover cable connection that the EIM is able to talk

to the lighting controller using the Keeper Enterprise Software.
Verify that the customer computer is able to communicate properly

through the building LAN.
Current EIM Wiring and Configuration (Units

Shipped After 11/15/2009)
The instructions that follow describe what methodology is used to configure the unit.
Regardless of what the important settings that must be configured, include the
following:
1. IP Address must be statically assigned
2. Subnet mask must be set
3. Default Gateway Address must be assigned
4. The IP Port must be configured if a port number. Port # 10001 is usually
an unused port that may be assigned.
5. The serial settings must be configured properly per the instructions for
communication to the Lighting Control network.
Failure to configure the above settings will result in the failure of the device to
communicate with the Lighting Control System.
Making the Initial Connection

Before you begin the device configuration, it will be necessary to configure your
Network Interface Card connection to be on the same subnet as the EIMs default IP
Address. The default address of the EIM is 192.168.127.254 before configuration.
To change your computers TCP/IP settings (Windows XP Steps Shown):
1. Disconnect your LAN Ethernet connection cable from your computer.
2. Access the Windows Control Panel.
3. Select the Network Connections option.
4. Under the LAN and High-speed internet option, find the Local Area
Connection for your network interface card. (you may have several
listed if you are not connected to your building LAN, it will more
than likely be the connection that states Network cable unplugged)
5. Right click on the connection and choose Properties from the popup
window.
6. In the General tab, scroll down the list of items and highlight the option
for Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
7. Click on the Properties button.
8. Make note of the current settings so that you can reconfigure them after
configuration is complete.
9. Select the Use the following IP address radial button..
10. Type in an IP Address of 192.168.127.1.
11. Type in the subnet mask 255.255.255.0.

12. Leave all other fields blank.
13. Click on the OK button.
14. Click on the Close button. It may take several seconds for the new IP
settings to take effect.
15. Connect the crossover cable provided from your computers Ethernet
port to the EIMs Ethernet port.
16. Open your internet browser.
17. Make certain that cookies are enabled. (please refer to your internet
browser help file for information on enabling cookies for your browser
version).
18. In the browser address window, type in the default EIM address
192.168.127.254 and press the Enter key.
19. You will be brought to the web console configuration tool for the EIM.
Configuration Settings in the EIM

1. In the menu tree on the left side of the screen, select the Network
Settings folder.
2. In the Network Settings screen, define the following items:
IP Address
Netmask
Gateway IP Address
IP Configuration make certain this is set to Static
3. Select the Submit button
4. In the Network Settings OK screen, select the Home button.
5. In the menu tree on the left side of the screen, expand the Serial Settings
folder.
6. Select the Port 1 folder within the Serial Settings folder.
7. In the Serial Settings screen, set the following parameters:
Baud rate: 9600
Data bits: 8
Stop bits: 1
Parity: Even
Flow Control: None
FIFO: Enable
8. Select the Submit button.
9. In the Serial Settings OK screen, select the Home button.
10. In the menu tree on the left side of the screen, expand the Operating
Settings folder.
11. Select the Port 1 folder within the Operating Settings folder.
12. In the Operating Settings screen, set the following parameters:
Operation Mode: TCP Server Mode
TCP alive check time: 1 minute
Inactivity time: 0
Max Connection: 1
Local TCP port: 10001 recommended (or other port specified by
the IT administrator)
Other fields not identified should be left at default settings
shown.
13. Select the Submit button.
14. In the Operating Settings OK screen, select the Save/Restart button.
15. Once the Now Save/Restart OK screen appears, close the web browser.
Configuration is complete.
Remember to reset your computers network TCP/IP settings to their original
settings. If you need to reconnect through the web server pages, you will need to
make certain that your computer is configured to communicate on the same subnet as
the EIM device. Instead of typing in the default address in the browser address, you
will need to use the units assigned IP Address.
Connecting the EIM to the Lighting Panel

After configuration is complete, it will be necessary to connect the device to the
lighting control panel using the following steps: The Ethernet Interface Module
(EIM) can be connected to any controller in the network.
1. Connect the supplied phone style communications cable to the female 9

pin adapter head provided.
2. Connect the 9 pin adapter head to the Ethernet Interface Modules serial
port.
3. Connect the other end of the phone style communications cable to the
RJ11 style COM port on the Lighting Control Panel. (On some
controllers there are two RJ11 style connectors. Please connect the
cable to connector labeled RS-232.)
4. Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet Interface Module
RJ45 port and the other end of the cable to the Ethernet network.
5. Plug in the Power Adapter supplied with the device.
Diagnostic LEDs
There are three LEDs located on the top of the EIM unit. They can be useful in
diagnosing proper operation as well as troubleshooting if necessary. The EIM will
indicate a valid connection to the Ethernet in the following ways:
The Ethernet LED maintains a solid green color when connected to a
100 Mbps Ethernet network.
The Ethernet LED maintains a solid orange color when connected to a
10 Mbps Ethernet network.
The Ethernet LED will flash when Ethernet packets are being
transmitted or received
Reset Button
There is an onboard reset button located between the power connection and Ethernet
connection on the EIM. Press the Reset button continuously for 5 sec to load factory
defaults: Use a pointed object, such as a straightened paper clip or toothpick, to press
the reset button.
This will cause the Ready LED to blink on and off. The factory defaults will be
loaded once the Ready LED stops blinking (after about 5 seconds). At this point, you
should release the reset button.
It is possible to limit the reset function for the first 60 seconds from initial power up
by accessing the Basic Settings screen in the webserver configuration mode and
selecting the Yes option for Reset Button Protect.
EIM Wiring and Configuration for Units Shipped

prior to 11/15/2009
Greengate recommends the direct serial method using HyperTerminal mode,
especially if the computer you are using to configure the Ethernet Interface Module
on is not tied into the building LAN. The instructions that follow describe the setup
of the device using the HyperTerminal method. Regardless of what methodology is
used to configure the unit, the important settings that must be configured include the
following:
IP Address must be statically assigned
Subnet mask must be set
Default Gateway Address must be assigned
The I/F mode must be changed to 7C.
The IP Port must be configured if a port number other than the default
port of 10001 is desired.
Failure to configure the above settings will result in the failure of the device to
communicate with the Lighting Control System
Step 1: Setting the IP Address in the EIM: HyperTerminal

Method
The Ethernet Interface Module (EIM) has the capability of being configured in part
by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Server. This is not the
recommended method of configuration. Supplying a Static IP Address is
recommended so that the IP address does not get inadvertently changed.
1.
Using the provided standard RS-232 communications cable, plug

the unpowered Ethernet Interface Module (EIM) device into an
available COM port on your computer.
2.
Open a Terminal Emulation software package such as

HyperTerminal supplied with the Windows Operating System.
3.
Create a new session within the Terminal Emulation Software

using the COM port that the Ethernet Interface Module (EIM) is
connected to as the Connection mode. Set up the HyperTerminal
Software Port Settings as follows:
Setting
4.
Baud Rate
9600
Data Bits
Parity
None
Stop Bits
Flow Control
Hardware
Apply these settings to the new session by clicking OK.
5.
After the port settings have been applied, you will be at a blank
HyperTerminal Window. Press and hold the x key down on your
computer keyboard while powering up the Ethernet Interface
Module (EIM). The following screen will be displayed.
6.
Press the <ENTER> key to go into the Setup Mode. (If the enter
key is not pressed quickly enough, you will get ASCII characters at
the prompt. If this occurs, you will need to close down and reopen
the HyperTerminal session and perform the previous step again.
7.
The Change Setup Screen will be displayed with the current

parameters for the device that is plugged into the COM port. At the
<Your choice? > prompt, press the 0 (zero) key and hit the
<ENTER> key.
8.
Please enter the following information:
IP Address:
This is the address that needs to be supplied

by the Network Administrator. It will be the
devices static IP Address. Enter the address
followed by the <ENTER> key.
Set Gateway IP Address:
Type Y.
Gateway IP addr:
The Gateway IP Address is the address of the

TCP/IP networks Gateway/Router. The
Network Administrator should supply this.
Enter the address followed by the <ENTER>
key.
Netmask:
A Netmask defines the number of bits taken

from the IP address that are assigned for the
host section. Note: Class A=24 bits; Class
B=16 bits, Class C=8 bits. The Ethernet
Interface Module (EIM) prompts for the
number of host bits to be entered, then
calculates the netmask which is displayed in
standard decimal-dot notation when the saved
parameters are displayed. (Ex. Entering 8
bits would give the subnetmask of
255.255.255.0).
Change telnet config

password:
Use the <ENTER> key to get past this

selection
Change DHCP device

name
Use the <ENTER> key to get past this

selection
9.
When finished, your screen will appear similar to the screen shown
below.
Step 2: Setting the Communications Parameters in the EIM:

HyperTerminal Method
1.
From the Change Setup Option Menu, <Your Choice?> prompt,

press the 1 (one) key followed by the <ENTER> key.
2.
Change the following settings:
Baud Rate:
9600
I/F Mode:
7C
Flow:
00
Port No.:
10001 (This is the default port number.

Available ports are 1 65535) If going
through a firewall to access the EIM, the port
number assigned to the EIM should be the
same as the port number assigned to talk to
the EIM in the firewall.
Connect Mode:
C0
Remote IP Address:
0.0.0.0 (This will allow any PC on the same

Ethernet to talk to the device. If only one PC
will be talking to the device, you can set up
the PCs IP Address in this spot, however,
only this PC will be able to talk to the device.
The device will need to be reconfigured if a
change occurs.
Remote Port
00000
DisConnMode
<ENTER> key past this choice.
FlushMode:
DisConnTime
SendChar 1:
SendChar 2:
3.
Your screen should resemble the following screen and the Change
Setup Option Menu will be displayed.
4.
From the Change Setup Option Menu, <Your Choice?> prompt,

press 9 to save and exit.
5.
Close the HyperTerminal Session and disconnect the device from

the COM port.
6.
Connect the device at a lighting control panel.
Connecting the Ethernet Interface Module (EIM) to the

Lighting Control Panel
1.
Connect the supplied phone style communications cable to the

adapter head part number 52-018703-00 and connect the adapter
head to the Ethernet Interface Module (EIM)s serial port.
2.
Connect the other end of the communications cable to the RJ11

phone style COM port on the Lighting Control Panel. (On some
controllers, there are two RJ11 style connectors. Please connect it
to the connector labeled RS-232.)
3.
Connect CAT5, 10BaseT Internet connection to the RJ45 Ethernet

Port on the other side of the Ethernet Interface Module (EIM)
device and run to the Network Hub.
4.
Plug in the Power Adapter supplied with the device.
Modem
A 2400 baud modem is available for connection to the Cooper Controls Control
System. This unit employs a serial connection into the com port of one of the panels.
This can be used with a standalone or networked system
What is involved with Commissioning Modems?

Expectations on commissioning modems include:
Verify wiring to panel is correct.
Verify that modem is operational by establishing a modem

connection or by dialing the unit to hear the modem tones..
Ideally, verify that the Keeper Enterprise Software can talk to

the system via the modem from the customers machine.
Modem Wiring
Telephone Interface Module

Similar to the TIM usage in a standalone panel, the TIM may be used to allow phone
overrides to a networked lighting control system. Instead of plugging into a panel
communication port, the networked TIM should be incorporated into the daisy
chained RS485 network for the most reliable results. It will be necessary to set a
network address of 1-128 to the TIM using bit switches 1-7.
Bit switch 8 is reserved for telling the unit that it is connected to a logic board
serially.
TIM codes are programmed in each of the panels to respond to TIM commands. If
TIM1 is programmed in panels 1 and 2, both panels will respond to the TIM1
command when issued from the Telephone Interface Module.
TIM Connection
1.
Locate the Network Connector on the back of the TIM and remove
it.
2.
Connect the network wires to the TIM Network Connector

observing polarity and plug connector back into the TIM.
3.
Connect a phone cable to the dedicated line and plug the other end
in the TO LINE jack on the back of the TIM.
4.
Connect the AC adapter to TIM and plug it into a 120V AC

receptacle. TIM is ready for operation after power is applied, the
status LED goes off, and the VOICE and DTMF LEDs blink five
times to signal that initialization is complete. (If power has been
off for several days, press the reset pushbutton on the rear panel for
five seconds to erase any spurious password.)
5.
Set bit switches 1-7 (binary, bit 1 is LSB) to the network address
assigned to TIM between 1 and 127.
6.
Install the network terminator jumper if TIM is physically located

at the end of the network cable; if not, install it on one pin only.
Only the two devices on the ends of the network should have the
terminator jumpers installed.
DMXGateway
The DMX Gateway is used to translate DMX codes from a dimming system into up
to 64 remote TIM codes to control Cooper Controls lighting ON and OFF. The
address switch on the DMX Gateway allows you to set the base DMX number that
the Gateway should listen for. It will then send out the corresponding TIM
command for that base address. For instance, if the base address is set to 30, when
DMX channel 30 is issued, TIM30 will be sent across the network wire. The next 63
DMX commands after the base address will be assigned their TIM codes
respectively. Multiple DMX Gateways may be attached to the lighting network to
allow for accommodation of all 512 DMX channel addresses.
The DMX Gateway sees an ON command when a dimming panels slide switch is
above 170 (66%) and an Off when the switch is below 85 (33%), based upon a scale
of 0 to 255.
What is involved with Commissioning a DMX

Gateway?
Expectations on commissioning DMX Gateways include:

properly connected for both the PC network and the DMX 512
network.
Verify that the gateway has its address wheel set for the starting
DMX512 address.
If at the end of the network, make certain that the PCI network
termination jumper is in place. (Will need to take the back plate
off and slide motherboard out to access this jumper. Factory
Have the DMX system issue commands to the lighting control

system to verify control. Test each command to verify that the
proper lighting is turning on and off.
DMX Gateway Wiring
Automation Interface Module
W ithout Key pad Display

24Vac, 24VA, 1A, 50-60 Hz
26Vdc, 10W, 0.4A
Us e Copper Conductors Only
Class 2
Ground
3V Lithium Battery
CR -123A
24V AC/DC
10/100 BaseT
Ethernet Port E1
Power
On
100
LAN
LINK
O ff
External
Battery
Gnd
+3V
Ext. Batt.
In t. Batt.
BT485
N et +
N et -
BACnet
OEMPrtl Pro
BT485
2 wire
S hield
G nd
Rnet +
Rnet +12V
Sense
EIA-232
Signal
Port S1
(BMS Connection)
Local Access
4 w ire
n/c
Rx -
DCD
n/c
Rx + DTR
3
4
NetNet+
Gnd
R net +
R net -
485
N et+
Rx
BACnet Tx
BACnet Rx
Tx
Rx
n /c
DT R
n /c
EIA -4 85
Port S2 (MFR Connection)

232
Net-
EIA -2 32
Rnet
+12V
Tx
D CD
Signal Gnd
EIA-232
Arc hive Valid

Port S1 Tx
Por t S1 Rx
Low Battery
E rr or C odes
Enh anced Access
on Rnet and Port S2

IP Address
0 = Download Required
1 = Control Pr ogram Error
On
As signed
2 = RAM Full
O ff
Default
3 = Comm Setup Err or
1
2
4 = Sys tem Error
MSTP
on S1
Defau lt
IP Address
+100
Enable
485-2w
485-4w
PTP
on S2
Enable
Dis able
3
Dis able
4
Option
Comm
8 = Formatting
Module
Status
Chase = OK
Blinking Dot = 'Run'
EIA-485
BT485
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
Power
LED
Open Energy
Management Equipment
Module Address
(ARC NET , MSTP, IP)
Format
10's
1's
88FO
E143900
TYPE: 002001
Mad e in USA
The Automation Interface Module is a product that allows interface of the following
protocols with the Cooper Controls Network:
BACnet over IP
BACnet over Ethernet
BACnet over ARCnet
BACnet over MS/TP
LON
Modbus RTU
Modbus ASCII
N2
Automated Logic
The unit supports sending remote commands, individual relay commands as well as
relay and switch and analog status commands. With a CK4A unit, it is also possible
to view dimmer levels. A total of 1200 points (if you are sending a command and
viewing the status, the command is considered a point and the status is another point)
may be mapped within the AIM for control with the exception of the N2 version
which supports up to 255 command points and 255 status points. It is possible to
increase the number of points available by adding additional AIM units. Each job
site will be asked to provide information specific to the relays they need to control
and the protocol they will be using so that we may custom configure the unit with the
proper mapping tables for their needs.
The unit is packaged in an enclosure with a Gateway motherboard for its access to
the Cooper Controls Lighting System. A wall wart plug in connection to 120VAC
outlet is its source of power.
What is involved with Commissioning an AIM?

If you are commissioning a site which has an AIM, Cooper Controls will request
configuration information and pre-configure the unit for the site. Mapping tables
will be supplied that allow the integrator to map the necessary points to their system.
When the AIM is connected, it will poll the network continuously for panel and point
status. This will cause the network LED to flash with the continuous polling. This is
normal behavior.
Expectations on commissioning AIMs include:
Verify that the AIM is properly connected to either the PCI

network or directly to the COM port of a LiteKeeper panel.
Verify that there is power to the AIM and that the power switch is
ON.
After about 1 minute powered, verify that the archive valid LED
illuminates and the Module Status LEDs follow a chase pattern
around the outside of the status display. In a networked system,
you should see some intermittent network traffic on the network
LED.
Have the system integrator verify that they can issue commands to
the defined points per the mapping table provided.
AIM Information Gathering

See next page.
Sample Mapping Tables
AIM Wiring
Gnd
Rnet +
Rnet +12V
Rnet
Port S2 (MFR Connection)
Tx
485
Net+
Rx
Net-
Rx
n/c
DTR
n/c
DCD
232
Tx
Signal Gnd
EIA-232
EIA-485
BT485
BACnet Tx
BACnet Rx
Archive Valid
Port S1 Tx
Port S1 Rx
Low Battery
Error Codes
0 = Download Required
1 = Control Program Error
2 = RAM Full
3 = Comm Setup Error
4 = System Error
8 = Formatting
Module
Status
Chase = OK
Blinking Dot = 'Run'
Power
LED
Networked AIM
Network Repeater
A RS485 repeater is available for use with the Cooper Controls Network. This may
be used to extend the network when necessary to go beyond 4000 feet or if there are
a great number of panels on a shorter network and it is necessary to boost the
network signal.
What is involved with Commissioning Repeaters?

Expectations on commissioning repeaters include:
Verify wiring to network and panel power is correct.
Verify that the network talks through the repeater.
Repeater Wiring
Isolated RS-485
Repeater
Chapter 10 Touchscreen
Programming
Overview
The ControlKeeper-T can be fully programmed through the touch screen, even for
network functions such as broadcasting remote commands! The only function that
the software is necessary for is to allow feedback for a digital switch or pilot lit
switch from a relay in a panel other than the panel that the switch is landed in.
The purpose of this section is to familiarize you with the process of programming a
ControlKeeper using the touch screen. This brief tutorial and should leave you
comfortable enough to program a basic job site.
Main Screen
Shows current status of all relays, control panel name, address, time & date &
holiday mode.
Shows if RSC Override has been used.
Displays physical relays in bold and other relays that are not present as grayed out.
Touch anywhere to enter the system.
Touchscreen Programming 10-1
Part A: Preparing the Panel for Programming:

In these steps, you will prepare the hardware and software configurations that
identify the panel for programming and networking functions.
Step 1: Initial Power Up Sequence

1.
Plug the communications cable (red CAT5 Cable provided) into

the Relay Stack Controller Card (RSC) RJ jack located at the
bottom of the enclosure.
2.
Plug in the power wire (white plastic connector with six wires
attached) into the Relay Stack Controller Card (RSC). The
controller display should power up and display the MAIN
SCREEN.
3.
Once power is applied, make certain that the status LED is flashing
in the upper left corner of the logic board and that the Main Screen
shows the relays that are installed in your enclosure are active (not
shadow boxes). If the status LED is not flashing or if the display
does not show all active relays, power down the logic board and
check all connections. If problem persists, contact technical
support.
Step 2: Clearing Panel Memory

We recommend that before you begin programming the ControlKeeper T you clear
panel memory. This assures you that you are beginning with a clean database. To
clear the panel memory:
1.
Move the override rocker switch to the ALL ON position to hold

lighting ON if necessary to maintain lighting during the procedure.
2.
Reset the panel, using the Reset Button.
3.
Within one minute, touch all 4 corners of the display screen, one
corner after the other, being sure not to touch anywhere else on the
screen. If more than a minute goes by without all four corners
being touched, or if you touch anything other than the four corners,
you will leave the memory clear function without having cleared
the memory.
4.
After you have touched the four corners within the one minute
time period, a warning message will appear, asking if you really
want to clear the panel. Press YES to clear the panel back to
factory defaults.
5.
Once the panel is programmed, remember to move the rocker

switch to the AUTO position.
Step 3: Setting the Panel Jumpers

Once all wiring is checked and terminated, be sure the two Local/Remote jumpers
(J9 and J10) are in the proper position. Jumpers J9 and J10 must be in the LOCAL
position in order to supply +24 VDC to the switch input center pin. The +24 VDC to
the switch input terminals is disabled when these jumpers are in the REMOTE
position. The jumpers are factory set to the REMOTE position for panel protection
during installation.
Local Remote Jumper Location
Be sure that, if your panel is in a network, the Network Termination Jumpers are in
the correct positions. Remove the network termination jumpers from all but the first
and last ControlKeepers on the network.
Network Components
Step 4: Setting the Panel Parameters

You should begin programming the ControlKeeper by setting up the panel
identification information through the panel setup screen. A panel name and address
should be defined. It is also recommended that the CLEAR LOGS option be done to
clear any data prior to the clock being set.
To make changes to the Panel Setup Screen:
1.
If the PANEL SETUP tab is not visible on the screen use the
arrows to scroll left or right until the tab appears. Touch the tab to
view the Panel Setup Screen.
2.
If you are not already in the Setup screen, touch the SETUP button
at the bottom of the screen.
3.
Panel Setup Screen
4.
Setup the desired information as described below. Once all

changes are done, touch the SAVE button. If you do not want to
save the changes, select the QUIT button. You will be asked if you
want to leave the screen without saving the changes. (Remember
to touch the CLEAR button under the Clear All Logs field when
doing the initial setup.)
Panel Setup Screen with Fields Defined
Setting
Panel Name
Default LCP#1. You can change this default name to any eightcharacter word that might be meaningful to the location or function
of the panel. Touch the down arrow next to the name field and a
touch screen keypad will appear. Press the characters you want and
then touch the ENTER button to save the name or numbers
Panel Address
In the CK T the panel address is set using the Panel Setup Screen.
The Panel Address can be changed to any value between 1 and
254. If you have more than one ControlKeeper panel in your
system, each panel should have its own unique panel address.
Touch the down arrow next to the address field and a touch screen
keypad will appear. Press the number you want and then touch the
ENTER button.
Auto-Save
When Auto-Save is checked, changes to the data screen will be

saved automatically when you leave a screen. Touch the AutoSave checkbox if you would like to save your changes
automatically, without needing to touch the save button. A
checkmark will appear. Touch the box again to remove the
checkmark and de-select the Auto-Save feature.
Description
Clear All Logs
The Clear All Logs commands will discard all relay, switch,
analog, remote and system logs from the controller so that the logs
will start over from that point forward. Relay Run Times will not
be cleared with this command.
Sound Option
The ControlKeeper T confirms a touch to the screen with an

audible click. It will also beep if you try to enter an illegal value in
a numeric data field. The panel defaults to Sound enabled. Touch
the Sound checkbox to delete the checkmark if you do not want
this audible feedback. Touch the checkbox again to restore the
sound feature.
Splash Screen
Option
The ControlKeeper T automatically defaults to the status screen as

its main screen when the touch screen is not in use. If you wish to
display the system splash screen and have the display alternate
between the splash screen and the main screen, checkmark this
feature.
Panel
Type/Version
This number shows the panel type and software version of the
control panel. You cannot change the type or version number that
is shown. This is informational only. If you contact Technical
Support, the technician will need to know the software version
number.
Step 5: Setting the Panel Clock

The next step in the panel setup is to set the panels clock. The clock time and date
determines when time schedules are activated. The date and time zone information is
also used in calculating the astronomical sunrise and sunset times and for running
holiday schedules. If you change the time or date in the clock screen the controller
will assume the properly scheduled state for the time and date entered when you
leave the clock screen.
1.
If the CLOCK tab is not visible on the screen use the arrows to
scroll left or right until the tab appears. Touch the tab to view the
CLOCK Screen.
2.
Setup the desired information as described below. Once all

changes are done, touch the Save button. The controller will
assume the properly scheduled state for the time and date entered
when you leave the clock screen. If you do not want to save the
changes, touch the QUIT button to return to the MAIN SCREEN.
You will be asked if you want to leave the screen without saving
the changes.
Clock Screen with Fields Defined
Setting
Description
Panel Time
The control panel uses the 24-hour military style clock so be sure to
set the time accordingly! For example 1 o'clock in the afternoon
should be input as 1300. Touch the down arrow to the right of the
Hour textbox. A numeric touch screen keypad will appear. Touch the
numbers you want, then touch the ENTER button. Repeat for the
Minutes and seconds text box.
Panel Date
Touch the down arrow to the right of the Day textbox. A numeric
touch screen keypad will appear. Touch the numbers you want, then
touch the ENTER button. Do the same for the Month and Year text
boxes.
Panel Time Zone
Touch the right or left arrows to scroll through the available time
zones. Stop scrolling when you see the zone you need. Time zones in
the continental United States will show the name of the zone as well
as the number of hours from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). For
instance, EST is 5 hours behind GMT, PST is 8 hours behind GMT.
Time zones outside the continental United States are represented by
the hours difference between the local time and GMT, that is, the
display will show the number of hours you must use to adjust local
time to GMT.
Daylight Savings
Option
The control panel is factory set with daylight savings enabled. This
means that it will automatically adjust the clock ahead 1 hour or back
1 hour when daylight savings time change occurs. If you live in an
area that does not implement daylight savings, you will need to
disable this option by touching the choice button to remove Daylight
Savings Option. The button will then read OFF and appear to be
pressed down. Touch the box again to re-instate the option.
Clock Time and

Date
The review area of this screen will show you the clock and date in the
controller based on the entries in the screen.
Step 6: Setting the Astronomical Clock

The control panel automatically calculates sunup and sundown times for your
location using a built-in astronomical clock. These sunup and sundown times can
then be used to define various time-related functions such as time schedules.
In order to calculate the sunup and sundown times for a location, the control panel
needs to know the locations latitude and longitude. From the latitude, longitude, and
current date, the control panel can accurately determine your sunup and sundown
times.
Due to local topology you may need to add or subtract time from the calculated
sunup or sundown values. The control panel gives you the option to offset the
calculated sunup and sundown times. Offsets may be added at the Astro Clock tab to
affect the entire panel. Individual offsets may be added later on the time schedule to
allow for schedules to occur at slightly different offset times.
To make changes to the Astronomical Clock:
1.
If the ASTRO clock tab is not visible on the screen use the arrows
to scroll left or right until the tab appears. Touch the tab to view
the Astronomical Clock Setup Screen.
2.
Enter the desired information as described below. Once all changes

are done, touch the SAVE button to save the changes. If you do not
want to save the changes, touch the QUIT button to return to the
Main Screen. You will be asked to confirm that you want to leave
the screen without saving the changes.
Astronomical Clock Screen with Fields Defined
#
1
Setting
Latitude
Description
You have a choice of North or South latitude. (North American
locations should always use NORTH). Touch the DOT to toggle
between the entries.
Set the Degrees and Minutes of Latitude by touching the down arrow
to the right of the text boxes. A drop-down touch screen numeric
keypad will appear. Touch the numbers you want, then touch the
ENTER button.
Longitude
You have a choice of East or West longitude. (North American

locations should always use WEST). Touch the DOT to toggle
between the entries.
Set the Degrees and Minutes of Longitude by touching the down
arrow to the right of the text box. A drop-down touch screen numeric
keypad will appear. Touch the numbers you want, then touch the
ENTER button.
Sunup and Sundown

Offsets
You can add or subtract time from the sunup or sundown times.
These fields establish the base sunup and sundown times. Additional
offsets can be added per time schedule if it is necessary stagger sunup
or sundown commands.
Touch the DOT to the right of the Offset Plus/Minus choice box.
Choose between subtracting or adding time to the sunup or sundown
value. Use the drop down boxes next to the hours and minutes fields
to bring up the numeric keypad to choose the amount of time to add
or subtract to the sunup and sundown times..
Reviewing Sunup and

Sundown Time
The review area of this screen will show you the calculated sunup
and sundown time based on the entries in the screen fields.
Step 7: Clear the Log Files

Before programming begins, it is recommended that the log files be cleared,
especially if the clock time and date was not set properly on initial power up.
To clear ALL logs:
1.
If the PANEL SETUP tab is not visible on the screen use the
arrows to scroll left or right until the tab appears. Touch the tab to
view the Panel Setup Screen.
2.
If you are not already in the Setup screen, touch the SETUP button
at the bottom of the screen.
3.
Panel Setup Screen
4.
On the panel setup screen, select the Clear All Logs CLEAR
button.
Clear Logs Button
5.
The panel will ask you to confirm if you wish to clear the logs.
Select YES if you wish to proceed with clearing the logs. Select
NO if you want to cancel the Clear Logs action and return to the
Panel Setup Screen.
Step 8: Gathering the Information you will Need:

Put together all the information that you will need to program the controller. This
includes:
1.
The location and function of the lighting loads controlled by each

relay.
2.
The desired time schedules for each controlled lighting zone.
3.
Contact Input Wall Switch information: channel that the wiring is

brought to on the panel as well as the relays it controls.
4.
Digita Switch information: the Digita switch address and button

number and the relays it controls.
5.
Analog photo sensor information: input channel that the sensor

wiring is brought to on the panel; the relay or relays that it is to
control; and ambient lighting threshold levels at which the relays
=will be actuated.
6.
If the Telephone Interface Module will be used, a list of desired

phone codes and their associated controlled relays.
Part B: Configuring Relays

Each ControlKeeper T can control up to 48 relays using programs that have been
entered through the touch screen on the circuit board, or through the optional Keeper
Enterprise Software.
The ControlKeeper T uses serial relay cards that let the control panel know the
relays actual hardware configuration. The IntelliRelay design allows the relay cards
to communicate to the logic panel what type of relay card is installed at any point in
the enclosure.
By default, the controller will issue a close command with an ON and a open
command with an OFF regardless of relay configuration. Through programming you
may choose to have the relay act differently. During a power outage, the relay will
resume its actual hardware configuration regardless of the software configuration
that you have defined for it.
Relays are numbered 1 through 48 with relay 1 being in the lower left corner of the
enclosure; relay 2 being in the lower right. Relays number up from this point
consecutively with odds being on the left and evens on the right. It is important to
map the physical relay to the software relay for proper operation.
The panel defaults to relays being the Normal type. It is not necessary to adjust
default parameters in order for relays to operate. Custom parameters and naming
may be assigned if necessary.
To access the Relay Setup Screen:
1.
If the RELAY tab is not visible on the screen use the arrows to
scroll left or right until the tab appears. Touch the RELAY tab to
view Relay Information.
2.
Use the right and left arrow buttons to scroll through the relays
until a relay that has not been used shows in the Name textbox.
Usually a relay that has not yet been defined will have the default
Name and a Type NOT USED. The Relay Name defaults to
RELAY#XX. Each relays definition appears in the informational
area of the screen as you scroll through the list.
3.
Touch the SETUP button to get to the set up screen.
4.
Enter the desired information as described below. Once changes

are complete, touch the SAVE button to save the changes. You can
also touch the QUIT button to return to the MAIN SCREEN. If
you leave the screen without saving the changes, you will be asked
if that is what you want. Touch the NO button to remain on the

screen, or touch the YES button to leave without saving any
changes.
Relay Setup Screen with Fields Defined
Setting
Relay Name
Description
The default name is RELAY#XX. You can change that default name
to a unique name of up to eight characters. We recommend that you
use a name that refers to the location or the function of the load that
the relay controls, such as 2FL HALL. Each relay name should be
unique within that panel.
Press the down arrow next to the relay name field and a touch screen
keypad will appear. Press the characters you want and then touch the
ENTER button to save the name or numbers.
Relay Type
You can use the software to configure a relay to act as NOT USED,
NORMAL, INVERTED, SENTRY or PHANTOM. By default, all
relays are set up to the Normal type, regardless of whether or not the
relay is there.
Not Used: the relay will not respond to any commands.
Normal: the relay will respond to ON and OFF commands.
Inverted: the relay will do the opposite of the ON or OFF

command issued with the exception of a touchscreen
command.
Sentry: will perform a specific SWEEP ON command

sequence for use with special intelligent SENTRY style high
voltage switches. When an ON command is received the relay
will turn OFF for 3 seconds then turn ON and remain ON
cueing the intelligent switch to turn ON. If sentry switches are
being used but the SWEEP ON function is not desired, the
relay may be left at the NORMAL default.
Phantom: a relay that does not control an actual load and may
not even exist in the ControlKeeper T enclosure. The Phantom
relay differs from a Not Used relay in that it will respond to
commands. It is mainly used in complex lighting strategies.
To set the relay TYPE, touch the DOT to the right of the Type choice
box to toggle through the list of possible entries until the one you
want is displayed.
Relay Warn
The standard Warn feature is designed to notify the occupants of an

area that the lights are about to go off. An additional Sentry Warn
feature is available to allow for the use of intelligent sentry style high
voltage switches. By default only time schedules warn. If switches,
analogs or remotes need to cause the warn to occur, you will need to
enable this feature on that item.
Standard Warn Feature: With the Standard Warn feature, the

relays flash OFF then back ON for a user-defined length of
time before going OFF. Touch the drop down arrow to the
right of the numeric entry field for the Warn Minutes. Enter
the time the lights should remain on after the warning flash
occurs. This time can be set both in minutes and seconds.
Sentry Type 1 Warn: The Sentry Warn sequence is used with a

lighting load that has special, intelligent line voltage switches.
When a relay is configured for a Sentry Type 1 Warn and an
OFF is issued, the Relay will flash OFF for 1 second, ON for 1
minute, OFF for 5 seconds, then turn ON and remain ON ready
for the Sentry Switchs next command. Place a checkmark in
the checkbox if you wish to enable this type of warn.
Sentry Type 2 Warn: The Sentry Warn sequence is used with a

lighting load that has special, intelligent line voltage switches.
When a relay is configured for a Sentry Type 2 Warn and an
OFF is issued, the relay will go OFF for 1.5 seconds, then back
ON and remain ON ready for the Sentry Switchs next
command. Place a checkmark in the checkbox if you wish to
enable this type of warn.
Relay Runtime
The ControlKeeper T keeps a running total of the hours that each

relay has been ON. The Relay Setup Screen shows the accumulated
ON time as the Runtime for the relay since the last time the field was
cleared. Touch the CLEAR button to clear the runtime and begin
accumulating again from zero. The relay runtime will not reflect
whether the RSC ALL ON or ALL OFF switch has been used to
override the normal programming. In addition, if a panel has been
powered down for an extended period of time, this field may reflect
inaccurate data until the field has been cleared.
Broadcast
In a networked system, you can broadcast one relay so that it issues

any command it receives to other relays in the network. The
broadcast consists of the relays name and the relays new ON/OFF
state. A remote command needs to be set up in the receiving panels.
Place a checkmark in the broadcast box to enable the broadcast
function. To remove the broadcast feature, touch the checkbox again,
and the checkmark will disappear.
Relay Logging
Logging is enabled by default. The control panel maintains a listing

of each relay actuation, including the relay name, ON/OFF status,
time and date of change, and cause of change. This can be helpful
when troubleshooting.
Place a checkmark in the log box to enable the logging function. To
remove the logging feature, touch the checkbox again, and the
checkmark will disappear.
Part C: Programming a Time Schedule

You need Time Schedules if your lighting control strategy includes turning lights on
and off on a regular basis throughout the week. In the Greengate system, an ON
schedule does not need to have a corresponding OFF time or vice versa. ON and
OFF schedules for the same relays are programmed as separate schedules allowing
for maximum flexibility. There are two steps to setting up a time schedule. The first
is to set up the time schedule parameters. The second is to link the time schedule to
the relays that it needs to control.
Step 1: Setting up the Time Schedule

A time schedule must be defined with a Time, a Command, a command Priority
level, and an active Day-of-week.
The Setup Screen allows you to set up a new time schedule or to change the
definition of an existing schedule. To set up a Time Schedule:
1.
If the SCHEDULE tab is not visible on the screen use the arrows
to scroll left or right until the Schedule tab appears. Touch the tab
to view Schedule Information.
2.
Use the right and left arrow buttons to scroll through the schedules
until you see a time schedule that has not yet been defined. An
unused time schedule will have the time --:-- in the Schedule
Time textbox. Time Schedules are stored and viewed in
chronological order. Each schedules definition appears in the
informational area of the screen as you scroll through the list.
3.
If you are not already on the Setup Screen, touch the SETUP
button.
4.
Enter the schedule parameters as described below. When you have

finished entering the Schedule definition, touch the SAVE button
to save the changes. You can also touch the QUIT button to return
to the MAIN SCREEN. If you leave the screen without saving the
changes, you will be asked if that is what you want. Touch the NO
button to remain on the screen, or touch the YES button to leave
without saving any changes.
Schedule Setup Screen with Fields Defined
Setting
Description
Schedule Time
You cannot change this field. The Schedule Time field contains the
time that the schedule is currently configured to run. Unused or blank
schedules will contain dashes --:--. ControlKeeper times are
expressed in military hours & minutes. For instance, 1 oclock in the
morning is 0100. 1:30 oclock in the afternoon is 1330
Schedule Type
Setting up a
Schedule Time
There are three schedule types available for the ControlKeeper T:

Time of Day, Sundown, or Sunup. Touch the DOT to the right of the
Type field. Each time you touch the dot you will toggle through the
available schedule types. Stop when the field shows the schedule type
that you want. Once you have chosen the schedule type, you must set
the schedule time.
Using Clock Time for the Schedule: Once you have set the
schedule TYPE as TIME, you must enter a specific time of day
as the schedule time. Touch the down arrow to the right of the
schedule Hour. A numeric touch screen keypad will appear.
Touch the numbers you want, then touch the ENTER button.
Do the same for the schedule Minutes.
Using Sunup or Sundown for the Schedule: Once you have set
the schedule Type as Sunup or Sundown the time calculated by
the astronomical clock will appear in Field 1 Schedule Time.
You may want to have the schedule operate a little before or
after the calculated sundown or sunup time. To apply an offset
to the calculated sunup or sundown time, touch the DOT to the
right of the Offset Plus/Minus choice box. If you want to make
the calculated time earlier, choose the Minus symbol (-). If you
want to make the calculated time later, choose the Plus (+)
symbol.
Touch the arrow to the right of the Offset Hours box. A touch
screen keypad will appear. Enter the hours you would like to
add to or subtract from the calculated time, then touch the
ENTER button. Do the same for the Offset Minutes. The time
in Field 1. Schedule Time will update to show the time with the
schedule-specific offset time applied to the calculated time.
Command
In addition to the usual ON or OFF commands, the ControlKeeper

allows a NO COMMAND to be assigned to a Time Schedule. The
NO COMMAND does not in and of itself change the relay status. It
is most often issued with a NONE priority to release the controlled
relays from a previous higher priority Time Schedule without actually
changing the relay state. Touch the DOT to the right of the Command
text box to move through the list of available commands: ON, OFF,
and NO CMD (no command). Stop scrolling when you see the
command you want to have issued by the schedule.
Priority
You can assign a priority level to a time schedule command. The

priority level affects how the schedule interacts with other inputs to
control the lighting.
To set a command Priority level, touch the right or left arrow next to
the Priority text box to scroll through the list of available Priorities.
Stop scrolling when you see the priority you want for the schedule.
Priority levels range from NONE to MASTER 13, MASTER 13
being the highest priority in the system and NONE the lowest
priority.
Days of Week
A time schedule can be active on any combination of days of the

week and can also be set to work on holidays. Any schedule that is
active on a holiday will work only on the dates that have been input
as holidays in the system.
Touch the checkbox to the right of the day of week that you want to
add to the schedule Active Days. A checkmark will appear, indicating
that the schedule being defined will be active on that day of week. If
you do not want the schedule to work on that day, touch the checkbox
again to remove the checkmark. Continue touching the checkboxes
for those days of the week during which the schedule will be active.
If this schedule should work on holidays as well, touch the Holidays
checkbox to enable the schedule to work on holidays.
Step 2: Linking the Time Schedule to the Relays it

Controls
Each schedule can control one, some, or all of the relays in the ControlKeeper
enclosure. You Link (or tie) a schedule to a relay through the Schedule LINKS
Screen. The IntelliRelay design will indicate when a relay is physically not there by
graying out the checkbox.
Schedule Links Page
To link a Relay to a Schedule:
1.
If the SCHEDULE tab is not visible on the screen use the arrows
Schedule Information.
2.
Use the right and left arrow buttons to scroll through the schedules
until you see the time schedule that you want to link to relays.
3.
Touch the LINKS button to get to the screen for setting up which
relays are controlled by this schedule.
4.
Only relays that are defined as types other than NOT USED appear
on the list of available relays. Touch the check box to the right of
each relay that you wish to control with this time schedule. The
scrolling arrows will move the screen up and down to show
additional relays. To unlink a relay, touch the checkbox to remove
the checkmark.
Schedule Links Checkboxes
5.
When you have completed the Links touch the SAVE button to
save the changes. You can also touch the QUIT button to return to
the MAIN SCREEN. If you leave the screen without saving the
Part D: Programming Wall Switches

The ControlKeeper T can use two distinct types of override switches: low voltage
dry contact input devices and Digita Switch Stations. In the ControlKeeper Ts
programming index, there are 64 switch input entries that may be programmed to
operate from any dry contact or Digita switch. When panels are set up in a network,
it is possible to have a switch wired to one controller that controls relays in another
controller on the network by using the broadcast capability of the controller.
The controller defaults for switches are:
Momentary switch type
Channel 1=Switch 1, Channel 2=Switch 2,Channel 32=Switch

32
Switch 1 is linked to Relay 1, Switch 2 to Relay 2, Switch 32 to

Relay 32
These defaults can be changed through the following steps.
Dry Contact Closure Switch Information

Thirty-two dry contact inputs channels are available at the bottom of the CK-T
board. These channels support photosensors, wall switches, motion sensors, or any
other system that provides a dry contact closure. It will be necessary to tell the
lighting controller what switch type is on each switch channel so that it interprets
closure commands properly.
It may also be necessary to assign a switch to a different switch channel. This allows
for flexibility in applications so that one physical switch can perform different
functions from a single command. For instance, you may have a switch wired to
channel 1 that needs to turn on some relays with the on command but also turn off
other relays when that command is issued. It will be necessary to set up two
switches in programming that are programmed to the same switch channel.
Dry Contact Closure Switch Types

There are three basic types of dry contact switches.
A MOMENTARY switch (SPDT) typically has a distinct ON

position and a distinct OFF position. When moved to the ON
position, the switch sends a brief closure between the ON contact
Momentary
A TOGGLE switch (SPST momentary) is typically a single push

button type switch. When the button is pushed and released a brief
closure is made to the controller switch channel. The first closure
is seen as an ON command. Each closure that follows will reverse
or toggle the command.
Maintained
OFF
ON
+24VDC
A MAINTAINED switch (SPST) is typically a standard wall

switch. When the switch is turned ON a constant contact is made
between the ON contact and the 24VDC contact of the controller.
When the switch is turned OFF, the closure is released, which is
interpreted as an OFF command.
OFF
ON
+24VDC
OFF
ON
+24VDC
and the 24VDC contact of the controller before returning to a

ready state. When moved to the OFF position, the switch sends a
brief closure between the OFF contact and the 24VDC contact of
the controller before returning to the ready state.
Toggle
Dry Contact Switch Configurations

You can wire up to eight Momentary or Toggle switches in parallel into one input
channel unless they are pilot lit. No more than 6 LED or 3 Incandescent pilot lit
switches should be wired to any one switch channel. Maintained switches should not
be parallel wired unless they are motion sensors controlling the same area.
Pilot lit switches can be configured per channel for incandescent or LED type as well
as pilot light or locator light function. Options are give to have the pilot function
track with one of the controlled relays or toggle state with each switch command.
Digita Switch Information

Digita 1 stations should be set up as the Digita 1 switch type. The Digita 1 switch
has a single rotary address switch for setting the switch hardware address. Settings
for this address are 0 through F (15).
All Digita 5 stations regardless of # of buttons should be set up as the Digita 5 type.
It will be necessary to set each button on a single station as a separate switch in the
programming. For instance, if you are using a Digita 5-5B station, you will repeat
the below process 5 times, once for each button using a different switch number for
each button. For each button to be programmed, you will need to know the base
address of the Digita 5 station it is on, the Digita button #, and the method of LED
feedback to be used.
The Digita 5 switch has two rotary address switches for setting the switchs hardware
address. The rotary settings are 1 through 9, A through F.
When you set the switch address in the Advanced Setup page, the letters A through F
are entered as follows: A=10, B=11, C=12, D=13, E=14, F=15.
If your Digita 5 model switch contains more than one button, each button is
programmed in as a separate switch. All buttons on the same physical switch station
will have the same base address.
Depending on the ordered configuration of your model Digita 5, it may contain
anywhere from one to five buttons. When programming the button, it is important to
note the physical location of the button as this is the number that must be
programmed in. Please refer to the graphic below to identify the button numbers that
should be used for your switch configuration.
Digita 5-5B
Digita 5-4B
Digita 5-3B
Digita 5-2B
1
2
3
4
5
2
3
4
5
2
3
4
2
4
Digita 5-1B
Each Digita 5 Button has an internal LED. A feedback must be set up to allow the
LED to illuminate and for the switch to operate properly. The next switch command
is determined from the LED state on the switch. If the LED is ON, it will issue an
OFF command and vice versa. If a feedback is not programmed, the switch will only
be able to issue the command opposite its current LED state.
You can choose from two sources for the status feedback for this switch input: Self
Feedback and Feedback from a Relay.
Self Feedback
When you choose Self Feedback, the indicator light will track with the last command
issued from the switch. The LED will be lit if the switch has issued an ON command
and it will be OFF when the switch has issued an OFF command. It toggles state
with each button press. (This method does not take into account that some other
input such as another switch or a time schedule may have turned ON or OFF lights.
For instance, if the switch is turned ON, the LED will light. If a time schedule turns
off the relays that the switch runs, the LED in the switch will continue to be ON until
that switch issues an OFF command.)
Feedback Relay
Alternatively, you can choose to have the button indicator show the status of one of
the relays controlled by the button. When you choose this option, the indicator light
will be ON when the relay is on and OFF when the relay is off. With this method, if
another switch or time schedule turns the feedback relay off or on, the switch will
reflect the proper status.
Step 1: Programming the Switch: Basic Setup
1.
If the SWITCH tab is not visible on the screen use the screen tab
arrows to scroll left or right until the Switch Tab appears. Touch
the tab to view Switch Information.
2.
Use the right and left arrow buttons to scroll through the list of
switches until you see the switch you would like to modify.
3.
First define the switch on the BASIC SETUP page. Change the
definitions as described below. When you have completed the
setup, touch the SAVE button to save the changes. You can also
touch the QUIT button to return to the MAIN SCREEN. If you
leave the screen without saving the changes, you will be asked if
that is what you want. Touch the NO button to remain on the
screen, or touch the YES button to leave without saving any
changes.
Setting
Description
Switch Name
The Switch Name defaults to SWITCH01, SWITCH02, etc. To enter

a different Switch Name, touch the down arrow to the right of the
default name on the Switch Scrolling list. A touch screen keypad will
appear. Press the characters you want and then touch the Enter button
to save the name or numbers. The Switch Name can have a maximum
of eight characters. We recommend that you use a name that refers to
the location of the switch or the function of the load that the switch
controls, such as 2FL HALL.
Switch Type
There are five switch types available: NOT USED, MOMENTARY,

MAINTAINED, TOGGLE, DIGITA 1 and DIGITA 5. Touch the
DOT to the right of the Type box to toggle you through a list of
available switch types. Select the type of switch that you are using.
Switch
Commands
The control panel allows you to choose the command to be issued

from a switch when it is turned on, and also for when it is turned off.
This may affect how the switch works for your application. Your
choices are ON, OFF, and NO COMMAND. The CK T defaults to
issuing an ON command for the ON and an OFF command for the
OFF.
The NO COMMAND selection is most often used when priorities
have been used. A NO COMMAND command at the NONE level of
priority can be used to release a higher priority command from this
switch without actually changing the relays state.
Touch the DOT at the right of the ON Command choice box. Each
time you touch the dot you will toggle through the list of possible
commands. Stop the toggle when the command you want shows on
the Command textbox. Do the same to set the OFF command.
Switch
Priorities
Use the right and left arrows to scroll through the available priority
levels until you see the priority level you would like for the
command. Priorities that are available in a basic setup are: NONE,
PRIORITY, and MASTER through MASTER13. In most cases, you
need only use the three lowest priorities to attain the control levels
you need.
Switch Timers
A switch can have a timer from 1 to 999 minutes and from 1 to 59

seconds. When the user turns a relay ON with a switch that has a
timer the control panel starts the timer running. At the end of the
timer period, the control panel will automatically issue an OFF
command from this switch to the linked relays. This feature is often
used for after-hours overrides.
To set up a Switch Timer, touch the down arrow to the right of the
Timer Minutes field. A drop-down touch screen numeric keypad will
appear. Touch the numbers you want, then touch the ENTER button.
Do the same for the Timer Seconds field.
Broadcast
Broadcasting a switch allows it to control relays in other lighting

controllers. To choose to broadcast the switch, touch the checkbox
next to the Broadcast option. A checkmark will appear. To remove
the broadcast option, touch the checkbox again, and the checkmark
will disappear.
A switch that is set to broadcast will send its name and the ON or
OFF state across the network wire whenever it is used. You would
need to set up a Remote Input with the same name as the original
switch in the other panels to receive the broadcast command. Special
settings such as masking, priorities, timers, and changes of the
commands issued will not broadcast with the switch.
Switch Logging Logs are a great tool for troubleshooting your lighting system. When
the Log option is selected for a switch, the control panel maintains a
listing of each switch actuation, including the switch Name, on or off
Status, and the Time and Date of the change.
To choose to log the switch actuations, touch the checkbox next to
the Log option. A checkmark will appear. To remove the log option,
touch the checkbox again, and the checkmark will disappear.
Warn Off
To set a switch to initiate the defined relay warning sequence, touch

the Warn Off checkbox. A checkmark will appear. Touch the
checkbox again to remove the warn feature.
Special Programming: Lighted Switches

1.
Access the Switch SETUP page. Make sure that the switch type is
defined for momentary, maintained or toggle type.
2.
Touch the ADVANCED SETUP button to continue defining the

switch. Change the Advanced definitions as described below, then
touch the SAVE button to store the changes.
Advanced Setup Button
3.
When you have completed the setup, touch the SAVE button to
Advanced Setup Screen for Switches with Fields Defined
#
1
Setting
Channel
Description
Dry Contact Input switches are wired into the Switch Input Terminal
Blocks at the bottom of the ControlKeeper circuit board. There are 32
input channels available. The Channel Number identifies which
terminals have been used for this switch input. Channel numbers
default to Switch 1 wired to Channel 1, Switch 2 Channel 2, etc.
Sometimes you may want a wall switch to act differently for different
relays. You can to set up two or more switch inputs to read off the
same input channel by changing the Channel Number for the switch.
You can then put special programming on one of the switches but not
the other.
When you touch the down arrow to the right of the Channel entry
field a drop-down calculator-like touch screen keypad will appear.
Touch the numbers for the channel that you want, then touch the
enter button.
Lighted Switch
Type
To set up a lighted switch type, touch the DOT to the right of the
Lighted Switch Type data field to toggle through the available
options until you see the one you need for your switch bulb type.
Choices are LED, INCANDESCENT, RELAY and NOT USED. The
RELAY option is reserved for special applications and should only
be used when authorized by technical support.
Feedback
You can choose from two sources for the status feedback for this
switch input: Self Feedback and Feedback from a Relay.
When you choose Self Feedback, the switch indicator will show the
last command issued by the SWITCH. The indicator light will be ON
when the switch was last turned on and will be OFF when the switch
was last turned off.
Alternatively, you can choose to have the switch indicator show the
status of a relay controlled by the switch. When you choose this
option, the indicator light will be ON when the relay is on and OFF
when the relay is off.
Touch the down arrow to the right of the Feedback Relay data field.
A drop-down numeric touch screen keypad will appear.
Enter the relay number that you want for feedback status, then touch
the enter button. When you choose Relay Feedback, the Self
Feedback option will automatically be deactivated.
Locator Option
If the Locator box is checked, the lighted switch will be dimly lit
when the load is off, but will be lit brightly when the associated
feedback is active. If locator is chosen, it is still necessary to select a
feedback object for proper function.
Special Programming: Digita 1

1.
defined for the Digita 1 type.
2.

3.
4.
Each Digita 1 switch has a hardware address that is set with a

rotary switch. The rotary settings are 1 through 9 and A through F.
(See the installation instructions for information about how to set
the switchs hardware address.) Enter this hardware address into
the touch screen set up for the switch input. To enter this address,
touch the down arrow to the right of the switch address. A dropdown numeric touch screen keypad will appear. Enter the switch
address, then touch the Enter button and save the change.
Special Programming: Digita 5

1.
defined for the Digita 5 type.
2.

3.
Digita 5 Switch Advanced Setup Screen with Fields Defined
#
1
Setting
Description
Address
The Digita 5 switch has two rotary address switches for setting the
switchs hardware address. The rotary settings are 1 through 9, A
through F. (A=10, B=11, C=12, D=13, E=14, F=15.)
Note what switch 1 and switch 2 address wheels have been set to.
You must enter this hardware address into the touch screen set up for
the switch input. To enter this address, touch the down arrow to the
right of the SW1 address field. A drop-down numeric touch screen
keypad will appear. Enter the switch 1 wheel setting, then touch the
Enter button. Repeat this process for the SW2 address field then save
the change.
Note: If your Digita 5 switch contains more than one button, each
button is programmed in as a separate switch. All buttons on the
same physical switch station will have the same base address.
Button #
Depending on the ordered configuration of your model Digita 5, it

may contain anywhere from one to five buttons. When programming
the button, it is important to note the physical location of the button
as this is the number that must be programmed in. Please refer to the
graphic below to identify the button numbers that should be used for
your switch configuration.
Digita 5-5B
Digita 5-4B
Digita 5-3B
Digita 5-2B
1
2
3
4
5
2
3
4
5
2
3
4
2
4
Digita 5-1B
Each button will need to be set up as a separate switch in the

ControlKeeper T programming.
3
Feedback
You can choose from two sources for the status feedback for the LED
in the switch: Self Feedback and Feedback from a Relay.
When you choose Self Feedback, the switch indicator will show the
last command issued by the SWITCH. The indicator light will be ON
when the switch was last turned on and will be OFF when the switch
was last turned off.
Alternatively, you can choose to have the switch indicator show the
status of a relay controlled by the switch. When you choose this
option, the indicator light will be ON when the relay is on and OFF
when the relay is off.
Touch the down arrow to the right of the Feedback Relay data field.
A drop-down numeric touch screen keypad will appear. Enter the
relay number that you want for feedback status, then touch the enter
button. When you choose Relay Feedback, the Self Feedback option
will automatically be deactivated.
Step 2: Linking the Switch to the Relays it Controls

1.
If the SWITCH tab is not visible on the screen use the arrows to
scroll left or right until the tab appears. Touch the tab to view
Switch Information.
2.
switches until you see the switch that you want to link to relays.
Each switch definition appears in the informational area of the
screen as you scroll through the list.
3.
relays are controlled by this switch.
4.
each relay that you wish to control with this switch. The scrolling
arrows will move the screen up and down to show additional
relays. To unlink a relay, touch the checkbox to remove the
checkmark.
5.
Part E: Setting up Analogs

Step 1: Basic Analog Setup
1.
If the Analog Tab is not visible on the screen use the arrows to
scroll left or right until the Analog Tab appears. Touch the tab to
view Analog Information.
2.
When you set up a new input, use the right and left arrow buttons
to scroll through the analogs until you see an analog with the Type
NOT USED. Each analogs definition appears in the
informational area of the screen as you scroll through the list.
3.
Define the analog as described below. When you have completed

this basic setup, touch the Adv. Setup Button to move to the
Advanced Setup Screen. If you are not prepared to enter advanced
parameters for this input, you can touch the SAVE button to save
the basic information you have just entered. You can also touch the
QUIT button to return to the MAIN SCREEN. If you leave the
screen without saving the changes, you will be asked if that is what
you want. Touch the NO button to remain on the screen, or touch
the YES button to leave without saving any changes.
Basic Analog Setup Screen with Fields Defined
Setting
Description
Name
To enter a new Analog Name, press the down arrow next to the
alphanumeric data entry field and a touch screen keypad will appear.
You can enter up to 8 alphanumeric characters. Press the characters
you want and then touch the Enter button to save the name or
numbers.
Type
The Analog Type can be Photocell, Custom or Not Used. To enter an

Analog Type, touch the DOT to the right of the type textbox. Each
time you touch the dot, you will toggle through the available types:
PHOTOCELL, CUSTOM and NOT USED. Stop when you see the
Type you want.
Analog
Commands
The control panel allows you modify the way a sensor works by
changing the command that is issued when the sensor reading calls
for an On and also for when the reading calls for an Off. Your
OFF. The NO COMMAND selection is most often used with
priorities. A NO COMMAND command at the NONE level of
analog without actually changing the relays state.
Touch the DOT at the right of the ON & OFF Command choice box.
Each time you touch the dot you will toggle through the list of
possible commands. Stop the toggle when the command you want
shows on the Command textbox.
Priorities
you need.
Timers
An analog can have a timer from 1 to 999 minutes and from 1 to 59

seconds. When the analog turns on a relay that has a timer the control
panel starts the timer running. At the end of the timer period, the
control panel will automatically issue an OFF command from this
analog to the linked relays. It is unusual for an analog to have a timer
and is not recommended that you set this up without council from
technical support.
Warn Off
To set an analog to initiate the defined relay warning sequence, touch

Broadcast
Broadcasting an analog allows it to control relays in other lighting

controllers. To choose to broadcast the analog, touch the checkbox
next to the Broadcast option. A checkmark will appear. To remove
the broadcast option, touch the checkbox again, and the checkmark
will disappear.
An analog that is set to broadcast will send its name and the ON or
OFF state across the network wire whenever it is used. You would
need to set up a Remote Input with the same name as the original
analog in the other panels to receive the broadcast command. Special
settings such as masking, priorities, timers, and changes of the
commands issued will not broadcast with the analog.
Logs
Logs are a great tool for troubleshooting your lighting system. You
have three options for logging an analog: logging the Reading, the
change of State, or leaving it at the None option.
If you choose to log the Reading, the ControlKeeper records the time,
date, and analog reading with every 5% change in value that it senses.
This information can be extremely useful when you set up thresholds,
although it is very memory intensive.
If you choose to log the State, the ControlKeeper records the reading,
time and date whenever the analog value passes through its assigned
threshold. It also logs the command it issued.
If you leave the choice at None, the analog input will not log.
To choose to log the analog actuations, touch the DOT at the right of
the Log choice box. Each time you touch the dot you will toggle
through the list of log types. Stop the toggle when the type that you
want shows on the Log textbox.
Step 2: Setting Analog Parameters

The Advanced Analog Settings screen for an analog input is where you define the
Channel into which the sensor is wired, define the Thresholds used to control the
lighting, set the upper and lower Endpoints of readings available from the sensor,
define the upper and lower Voltages provided from the sensor, and set sensor
Minimum ON and Minimum OFF parameters.
1.

analog. Change the definitions as described below, then touch the
SAVE button to store the changes.
2.
When you have completed the setup for both screens, touch the
SAVE button to save the changes. Touch the NORM SETUP
button to return to the Analog Basic Screen. You can also touch
the QUIT button to return to the MAIN SCREEN. If you leave the
you want. Touch the NO button to remain on the screen, or touch
the YES button to leave without saving any changes.
Advanced Analog Setup Screen with Fields Defined
#
1
Setting
Channel
Description
The Channel field tells the ControlKeeper which of the four hardware
input channels on the circuit board should be read for this particular
analog input. Any analog channel can be used to provide
information to drive any of the thirty two possible software analog
inputs in the ControlKeeper programming software. This allows you
to set up multiple threshold points for a single analog input.
To enter the Channel Number, touch the dot to the right of the
channel field. Each time you touch the dot you will toggle through
the analog channels that are available to you. Stop when you see the
channel that you want
Thresholds
The Upper and Lower Threshold fields allow you to set the analog
values at which the ControlKeeper should send ON and OFF
commands. The sensor readings that occur between these two values
provide a deadband. The Lower Threshold is the reading below
which the analog input normally issues an ON command. The Upper
Threshold is the reading above which the analog input normally
issues an OFF command.
Endpoints
The Lower Endpoint is the lowest value that can be read from this
sensor. The Upper Endpoint is the highest value that can be read by
this sensor. When Lower and Upper Endpoint values are set, the
analog automatically scales the readings returned evenly between this
range of values.
PC-I: 0-100fc, PC-O: 0-250FC, PC-A: 2-1000FC, PC-S: 10-2000FC
It may be desirable to set the photosensors to a larger range, for
instance 0-1000FC for the PC-I to allow for greater definition and
closer thresholds.
Voltage
The CK T can accommodate output voltages between 0.0 and10.0

Volts DC in the analog channels. If a sensor outputs more than 10.0
volts or less than 0.0 volts it cannot be used.
The Up Voltage is the highest output voltage that the sensor provides.
The Lo Voltage is the lowest output voltage that the sensor provides.
Currently, the PC-I, PC-O, PC-A, and PC-S models operate with a 110V range.
Min ON/OFF
The Minimum On and Minimum Off fields allow you to set

minimum time limits between the ON and OFF states. This can
prevent cycling of the lighting if the analog input goes through a
rapid change in readings. The field cannot exceed 999 minutes.
For instance, if a Minimum OFF time of 10 minutes has been entered
in to the Minimum OFF field, when the photosensor triggers an off
command, it starts the 10 minute timer running. Until this timer
expires, the photosensor can not issue another ON command to the
lights. Once the 10 minutes has expired, if the photosensor is calling
for the lights to go on, they will respond on.
Step 3: Linking the Analog to the Controlled Relays

1.
If the ANALOG tab is not visible on the screen use the arrows to
Analog Information.
2.
analogs until you see the analog that you want to link to relays.
Each analog definition appears in the informational area of the
3.
relays are controlled by this analog.
4.
each relay that you wish to control with this analog. The scrolling
checkmark.
Analog Links Checkboxes
5.
Part F: Programming Remote Commands

A Remote Input comes from a source outside of the control panel itself; that is, from
a source that is not directly wired as an input into that control panel.
You will need to set up remote commands in your system if any of the following are
true:
You are using touchtone commands from an optional Telephone

Interface Module (TIM).
You have a network of controllers and a switch or analog input or

a broadcast relay from another controller needs to control relays in
a different controller.
You are using VisionSwitch, VisionTouch or Keeper Enterprise

Software to control lighting loads.
You are using a DMX Gateway to issue commands to the lighting

network. (These commands program as TIM codes in the unit.
Please refer to the DMX Gateway instructions for information
specific to this units.)
There are additional sources of remote commands such as the use of VisionTouch
software. It is recommended that these commands be programmed in the Keeper
Enterprise Software, not through the touch screen display, as the VisionTouch
Software may be dependent on seeing these remote commands in the Keeper
Enterprise Database for proper operation.
With a remote command, it is the input Name and Command State that are
broadcast from the initiating device onto the network. Any panel with a remote
command that has that exact name will respond to the command as programmed.
There are two basic steps to setting up the programming for a remote command. The
first is to set up the remote with its settings and parameters. The second is to link the
remote to the relays it needs to control.
Step 1: Remote Setup

A remote input must be defined with a Name, Type, On and Off Commands,
Priorities, Timer options, Warn Off settings, and Log settings.
1.
To set up a Remote Input:
2.
If the Remote Tab is not visible on the screen use the arrows to
scroll left or right until the Remote tab appears. Touch the tab to
view Remote Information.
3.
Use the right and left arrow buttons to scroll through the remotes
until you see a remote that has not yet been defined. Each remotes
definition appears in the informational area of the screen as you
scroll through the list. An unused remote input will have the Type
NOT USED.
4.
Enter the Remote parameters as described below. When you have

completed the setup, touch the SAVE button to store the changes.
You can also touch the QUIT button to return to the MAIN
SCREEN. If you leave the screen without saving the changes, you
will be asked if that is what you want. Touch the NO button to
remain on the screen, or touch the YES button to leave without
saving any changes.
Remote Setup Screen with Fields Defined
#
1
Setting
Name
Description
The originating device that initiates the Remote Command will
broadcast its Name and ON/OFF State. If any panel finds a matching
Remote Name, it will command any linked relays. The Remote Name
has up to 8 characters that must match exactly the name of the
broadcasted command.
Switch, an Analog or Relay Command from Another Panel: To

set up the remote name from a broadcast switch, analog or relay
in another panel, match the name exactly to the originating
switch, analog or relay.
Telephone Interface Module Command: A Telephone Interface

Module Remote command name must start out with the capital
letters TIM. Following these letters will be the numeric code
that the user will input through a touch Tone telephone to
control the lighting. The numeric code can contain from 1 to 5
numbers. For instance, if you programmed a remote named
TIM012 into the controller, the user would need to input the
TIM code 012 when prompted
DMX Gateway Command: The DMX Gateway issues TIM

commands onto the network wire. The remote name must start
out with the capital letters TIM. The numeric code afterwards
must be 1 through 512 (no leading zeros for single digit
numbers).
VisionSwitch, VisionTouch or Keeper Enterprise Software

Command: The optional VisionSwitch, VisionTouch or Keeper
Enterprise Software may be used with the system. These
software packages allow remote commands to be issued from
computers that have been tied into the lighting system. If using
these packages to send commands, make certain to exactly
match the Remote Name to the name that each VisionSwitch or
VisionTouch button will be sending. If Keeper Enterprise
Software is being used, this software should be used to set up
the remote name fields.
Type
The Remote Type can be TIM, Switch, or Not Used. All commands
except a broadcast switch or analog command should be set up as a
TIM type for proper operation. Broadcast switches and analogs
should be set up as a SWITCH type. Touch the DOT to the right of
the Type box to toggle you through a list of available switch types.
Select the type of switch that you are using.
Commands
The control panel allows you to choose the command to be issued

from a remote when it is turned on, and also for when it is turned off.
This may affect how the remote works for your application. Your
OFF.
The NO COMMAND selection is most often used when priorities
have been used. A NO COMMAND command at the NONE level of
remote without actually changing the relays state.
Touch the DOT at the right of the ON Command choice box. Each
time you touch the dot you will toggle through the list of possible
commands. Stop the toggle when the command you want shows on
the Command textbox. Do the same to set the OFF command.
Priorities
you need.
Timers
A remote can have a timer from 1 to 999 minutes and from 1 to 59

seconds. When the user turns a relay ON with a remote that has a
timer the control panel starts the timer running. At the end of the
timer period, the control panel will automatically issue an OFF
command from this remote to the linked relays. This feature is often
used for after-hours overrides.
To set up a Remote Timer, touch the down arrow to the right of the
Timer Minutes field. A drop-down touch screen numeric keypad will
appear. Touch the numbers you want, then touch the ENTER button.
Do the same for the Timer Seconds field.
Warn Off
To set a remote to initiate the defined relay warning sequence, touch

Logging
Logs are a great tool for troubleshooting your lighting system. When
the Log option is selected for a remote, the control panel maintains a
listing of each remote actuation, including the remote Name, on or off
Status, and the Time and Date of the change.
To choose to log the remote actuations, touch the checkbox next to
the Log option. A checkmark will appear. To remove the log option,
touch the checkbox again, and the checkmark will disappear.
Step 2: Linking the Remote to the Relays it

Controls
1.
If the REMOTE tab is not visible on the screen use the arrows to
Remote Information.
2.
remotes until you see the remote that you want to link to relays.
Each remote definition appears in the informational area of the
3.
relays are controlled by this remote.
4.
each relay that you wish to control with this remote. The scrolling
checkmark.
Remote Links Checkboxes
5.
Part G: Holiday Dates

The control panel automatically turns relays ON or OFF based on user-defined timeof-day schedules. Sometimes exceptions need to be made to these schedules.
Holidays are an example of an exception. If you do not want to implement holiday
dates at your facility, please skip this step.
The control panel allows you to enter up to 250 holiday dates, defined by a month
and day of month, on which special holiday schedules are to be run. In the
ControlKeeper T, holidays are not year-specific which allows them to occur every
year on that date. This may require some updating for holidays that are not on the
same date every year.
When the panel enters into a holiday date, it will run the schedules that have been
defined to run on holidays. In some cases, it may be desirable to have holiday dates
but not have any holiday schedules defined. For instance, if you want the lights to be
off on the holiday or just operated by switch inputs and the last regularly scheduled
command was an OFF schedule that happens before midnight, you do not need to set
up holiday schedules. You can just set up holiday dates. When the holiday date is
entered and there are no On schedules for the holiday, the lights will remain off from
the previous nights Off schedule, ready for switch commands if necessary.
If it is necessary to set up holiday schedules, it is easily done through the time
schedule screen by check marking the day of week section for HOL (holiday).
When a holiday date has been defined and the panel enters that date, the letter H
will be shown next to the date and time in the ControlKeeper Main Screen.
To create a new holiday:

1.
If the HOLIDAY tab is not visible on the screen use the arrows to
scroll left or right until the tab appears. Touch the tab to view the
HOLIDAY Screen.
2.
Holidays. The information for each Holiday appears below the
Holiday Name as you scroll. Stop scrolling when you see an
unused Holiday Date. The screen will show dashes in the date
field when you come to a new entry and there will be no Name
entered.
3.
Enter the Holiday information as described below. When you have

completed the setup, touch the SAVE button to save the changes
you have made. You can also touch the QUIT button to return to
Holiday Screen with Fields Defined
#
1
Setting
Name
Description
It is not necessary to change the holiday name from the default,
however it does make it easier to administer Holidays if each holiday
has a meaningful name, such as NEW YEAR.
To change the holiday name, press the down arrow next to the
alphanumeric data entry field and a touch screen keypad will appear.
Press the characters you want and then touch the Enter button to save
the name or numbers.
Date
The control panel allows you to enter up to 250 holiday dates, defined
by a month and day of month.
Part H: Programming Masks

Masks change the way a switch, analog or remote input works during a specified
time of day. Masks often can achieve the same effect as priorities but can also
achieve certain actions that a priority cannot. There is no right or wrong to choosing
a mask over a priority. However, since masks are tied to a specific time of day, they
will need maintenance if you change the Time of an associated Time Schedule. You
can create a total of eight different masks and assign them to any switch input,
analog input or remote/TIM input command.
Mask Types
There are seven mask types for you to choose from.
Not Used: No mask is defined.
No Offs: OFF commands from the masked input will be ignored during the
period when the mask is active. Please note that if the inputs timer is counting
while the mask period begins and expires during the mask period, the timers
OFF command will occur. To make sure that expired timers will not cause
the lights to go off during this period you will also need to assign a No
Timer mask.
No Ons: All ON commands from the masked input will be ignored during the
period when the mask is active.
Ignored: All commands from the masked input will be ignored during the
period when the mask is active. The control panel acts as if the link between the
input and the output has been removed during the period that the mask is active.
No Timer: When an input with a timer turns ON during the period that the mask
is active or if the input timer times out during the period that the mask is active,
no OFF command will be issued by the timer.
No Warn: If an input that initiates a warn turns OFF during the period that the
mask is active, the OFF will cause an immediate OFF rather than waiting for the
warning delay. If the input is turned OFF just prior to the start of the mask
and the warn off timer starts counting down into the period that the mask is
active, that warning will be issued.
Re-evaluate: At the masks END TIME the ControlKeeper re-evaluates the

current status of each relay that has been controlled by the masked input. The
ControlKeeper determines the correct ON or OFF state for the relays based on
the status of other inputs that are linked to it, and turns the relay ON or OFF
based on that evaluation. The BEGIN TIME of the mask is irrelevant other than
the fact that it must occur prior to the END TIME. Please note that if other
masks are set up on the switch, they will take precedence over the REEVALUATE mask. For instance, if a NO OFFS mask is active at the REEVALUTE masks END TIME and the switch is OFF when the re-evaluation
occurs, the off command from the switch will not be issued.
Step 1: Setting Up a Mask

To use a mask, you must first DEFINE it. The mask definition includes the mask
Name, Type, Start Time, End Time, and Active Days.
To set up a Mask;
1.
If the MASK tab is not visible on the screen use the arrows to
Mask Information.
2.
Touch the right and left arrow buttons to scroll through the masks
until you see a mask that has not yet been defined. Each Masks
scroll through the list. An unused mask will have the type NOT
USED.
3.
If you are not already on the Setup Screen, touch the SETUP
button.
4.
Enter the Mask definitions as described below. Save the changes

by touching the SAVE button. You can also touch the QUIT button
to return to the Main Menu without saving any changes. You will
be asked to verify that you want to this. Touch the YES button if
you want to leave without saving. Touch the NO button to go back
to the data entry screen.
Mask Setup Screen with Fields Defined
Setting
Description
Name
While it is not necessary to change the mask name, it can be useful to

change the mask default name to one that describes the mask
function, such as NOTIMER. The name can be up to 8 characters
long..
Type
To define the mask Type, touch the DOT to the right of the entry
field. Each time you touch the dot you will toggle through the list of
available Mask Types. Stop the toggle when you see the one you
want.
Start and End

Times
The mask START TIME defines when the mask becomes active. The
mask END TIME defines when the active mask period should end.
Both start and end times can be either an actual time of day or the
sunup or sundown time calculated by the astronomical clock.
Touch the DOT to the right of the Start and End Time field. Each
time you touch the dot you will toggle through the list of options for
the field: TIME, SUNUP, or SUNDN. If you choose, time, you will
need to enter the hours and minutes. If you choose Sunup or
Sundown, you can add offsets if necessary.
Active Days
Select the days of week that you want the mask to be active.
Clock Time and

Date
The review area of this screen will show you the clock and date in the
controller based on the entries in the screen.
Step 2: Linking Masks to Switch, Analog and

Remote Inputs
Each mask can be applied to some or all of the switch, analog or remote inputs in the
ControlKeeper. You Link (or tie) a mask to the switches, analogs and remotes
through the Mask Links Screen. Please note that only the switches, analogs and
remotes that are setup as types other than not used will be shown in the links screen.
1.
If the MASK tab is not visible on the screen use the arrows to
Mask Information.
2.
Touch the right and left arrow buttons to scroll through the masks
until you see the mask that you want to link to inputs. Each Masks
scroll through the list.
3.
inputs this mask applies to.
4.
Only switches, analogs and remotes that are defined as types other
than NOT USED appear on the list of available inputs. Touch the
check box to the right of each input for which you want the mask
to be active. The scrolling arrows will move the screen up and
down to show additional inputs. To unlink an input, touch the
checkbox to remove the checkmark.
Mask Links Checkboxes
5.
Part I: Reviewing Changing and Deleting Programming

Reviewing Programming by Relay
Programming at a glance by viewing by relay.
Reviewing Switch Settings
Shows all settings in one spot for switch inputs without the fear of changing
programming inadvertently.
Reviewing Analog Settings
Shows all settings in one spot for analog inputs without the fear of changing
Reviewing Remote Settings
Shows all settings in one spot for remote inputs without the fear of changing
Changing Programming
In most cases, you will change programming through the same setup screens that are
used to set up the programming.
1.
If the desired object tab is not visible on the screen use the arrows
the items information.
2.
Use the right and left arrow buttons to scroll through the object list
until the name of the item that you want to change appears in the
Name textbox.
3.
When you see the item you want, touch the SETUP button to get
the set up screen for the chosen item.
4.
Make the changes you want, referring to the information about

setting up programming in earlier chapters of this manual.
5.
Touch the SAVE button to store the changes. You can also touch
the QUIT button to return to the MAIN SCREEN. If you leave the
you want to do. Touch the NO button to remain on the screen, or
touch the YES button to leave without saving any changes.
Deleting Programming
It is possible to delete time schedules and holiday dates. Deleting a time schedule
will also delete all associated relay links.
At some point, you may wish to turn on or off relays from the ControlKeeper T
panel without using a time schedule, switch, analog or remote command.
The ControlKeeper T allows you to override relays on or off by using either
Hardware Overrides or Touch Screen Overrides. These methods are discussed in
detail below.
Manually Overriding Relays

Hardware Relay Overrides
Hardware Relay Overrides can be done at the panel level or at the relay level. At the
panel level, each enclosure has an all relay override switch on the RSC (relay stack
controller). At the relay level, each relay has a relay override switch to allow for
individual relay control.
Panel Override Using the RSC Switch

All ControlKeeper T enclosures contain an override card at the bottom of the
cabinet called a Relay Stack Controller (RSC). This card is in charge of passing
control signals from the logic panel up through the relay stack. It also has a manual
three-position ALL OFF/ AUTO/ ALL ON switch that allows for relay overrides.
The RSC override switch can be used to turn on or off lighting regardless of whether
the CK T control panel is installed in the enclosure.
If this switch is used to the ALL ON or right position, all relays in the controller will
close, regardless of programmed state or relay type. If this switch is used to the ALL
OFF or left position, all the relays in the enclosure will open, regardless of
programmed state or relay type. If the switch is in the AUTO position, the controller
will run scheduled programming or respond to individual relay hardware override
commands.
The RSC is a MASTER hardware override for the enclosure. If the switch is in the
ALL ON or ALL OFF position, no further commands from the ControlKeeper T or
hardware relay override switches will be obeyed until the RSC has been placed in the
AUTO position.
If the RSC has been used to turn on or off lighting loads, the relay status screens will
not reflect this. However, on the main screen, the words OVERRIDE ON or
OVERRIDE OFF will flash, indicating that the panel has been overridden. This
allows notification of the override and also allows users to see what state the relay
will return to when the RSC Switch is moved back the Auto position. The panel will
also log the instance of the RSC override being used in the System log.
Please note, if the RSC ON or OFF command has been used, relay run times may not
reflect accurate run time figures.
Relay Override Using the Individual Relay Switches

Each Relay in the ControlKeeper T has a hardware override switch that will allow
for temporary override of the lighting load. This switch is in the high-voltage section
of the controller. If you are not an electrician, or rated for work in a high-voltage
environment, it is not recommended that you access these switches from a safety
concern.
The relay override switch is in a slightly different location based on the type of
relays that your enclosure contains. At the time of this manuals release, there are
three different available relay types. This includes the Serial Standard Relay Module
(sSRM), Serial Two Pole Relay Module (sTPRM), and the Serial Latching Relay
Module (sLRM). The location of the override card switch for these three different
modules is indicated in the diagrams below.
To override a relay, press the small reset button next to the relay until the relay is in
the correct ON or OFF state. The LED next to the reset button will be lit when the
relay is closed.
The manual override of the relay will stay in effect until the next command is
received from the ControlKeeper T, RSC override switch, or another relay override.
For this reason it is a temporary override only.
The manual relay override switches can be used to turn on or off lighting regardless
of whether the CK T is installed in the enclosure. However, if the RSC has been
used to override the lighting ALL ON or ALL OFF, the manual relay override
switches will not be operable until the RSC is placed in the AUTO position.
If the manual relay override switch has been used to override the relay, the relay
status screen will be updated to show that the relay is on or off by a cause type of
RELAY SW.
Touch Screen Relay Overrides

The ControlKeeper T panel allows you to turn on and off relays from the Touch
Screen of the controller. The status of the relay in the relay status page will show a
cause of KEYBOARD if a relay has been overridden in this method.
A Touch Screen Relay Override is a temporary override. It will stay in effect until
the next command is received from the ControlKeeper T or until the RSC override
switch or individual relay switch override is used.
Can be used to issue an ON or OFF command to a selected relay. (relay selected by

using the up and down scroll buttons on the right.)
Viewing Live Status & Log Data

Relay Status
Can view at a glance or view more in depth information under the relay STATUS
button.
Switch, Analog & Remote Status
Shows current command and time/date issued as well as timer counting down.
Shows if it is in a mask period. The Analog Status Screen will also have a Reading
field at the bottom to display the current reading of the sensor.
Viewing Logs
Logs may be viewed for Relays, Switches, Remotes & System (power up/RSC
Override use). All entries are put in order of most recent command.
Chapter 11 Keeper Enterprise

Quick Start Guide
Introduction
For those of you who do not want to read the entire manual but want to start
programming immediately, this guide takes you through the process of programming
a basic lighting control strategy using the Keeper Enterprise software and using the
most common features. Please note that because of the in depth nature of
ControlKeeper-4A V6 panels, they will not be discussed in this guide.
Wed like you to actually create your site and program a simple lighting control
strategy for it as you follow the steps outlined below. This guide will walk you
through the most common items of programming in the order that they might be
programmed in when configuring a site. This includes:
Creating a New Database and Site Path
Navigating to the Site Map
Defining the Site
Creating a Network
Defining the Network
Creating Panels
Defining the Panels
Defining Relays
Programming a Time Schedule
Programming a Contact Input Wall Switch
Programming a Digita Switch Station
Programming a Wall Switch to Activate Relays in Another Panel
Programming a Telephone Interface Module Command
Programming an Analog Photosensor
Programming a Mask
Creating a Holiday
Keeper Enterprise Quick Start Guide 11-1
Initial Communications Setup

o
Connection to the System
Clearing to Factory Defaults
Setting the Time and Date
Clearing the Log Files
Downloading Programming to the Panel
Commanding Relays ON or OFF from the Software
Viewing Live Status
Uploading and Viewing Log Files
Backing Up and Restoring Database Files
Opening the Keeper Enterprise Software

Start the software by using the steps below.
1.
Use the mouse to click on the Start button on the Windows Task
Bar.
2.
Highlight the All Programs option on the Start Menu.
3.
In the list of programs, find Cooper Controls and highlight it.
4.
In the Submenu, select the Keeper Enterprise folder.
5.
Select the Keeper Enterprise software option.
6.
The Enterprise Opening Screen will appear, followed shortly by

the Site Path screen.
Programming Screen
Creating a New Database and Site Path

When you first install and open the Keeper Enterprise Software, it will be necessary
to create a new database and a Site Path. A Site Path defines the location on your
hard drive where a Keeper Enterprise database file is stored. Once this file is
created, you can open it at any time by clicking on the Site Path tab and selecting the
site path you wish to open.
To create a Site Path and associated Database:
1.
If you are not already at the Site Path, click on the Site Paths
Tab at the left of your screen.
2.
Right-click on My Site Paths to see the Site Path Options

Menu. Choose New Site Path and Empty Database.
Creating a New Path and Database
3.
You will see the Site Path Definition Screen.
4.
Click on the Site Path Name field and enter the name of your
facility.
5.
Click on the SAVE button. Notice that the new Site Name appears
under My Site Paths in the left pane of the window. Note that the
Database Name and Path also appears on the right pane of the
screen.
Navigating to the Site Map

Now that you have created the Site Path that tells the Enterprise Software where to
store the program files for your site, you can begin programming the lighting control
by creating and defining a Site Map.
The Site Map is a graphical representation of all the sites lighting control panels and
programming. The Map is in the form of a tree that contains directories. The Site is
the Root directory within which Network, Building and Panel directories can be
created.
The directories contain the program files for the lighting control system, with each
directory holding information that is specific to that level. If this form looks familiar
to you, its because it is just like the directory of the computer files shown when you
click on the Explore option.
Navigate to your Site Map by:
1.
In the Site Path Tab, select the folder you created for your Site
Path.
2.
Click on the Site Map Tab.
Site Map Tab
Defining the Site

The Site Icon is a cluster of three buildings, representing the Site you have just
defined. Notice that there is a dotted line extending to the left from the building
cluster. When other directories have been defined under this site, a plus sign will
appear to the left of the dotted line.
Site Definition Screen
Filling in the Site Information Tab

The Site Information tab will be used to name your site and define default
parameters for panels that will be created within the site. If you have more than one
type or version of control panel being used, it is best to select the default panel type
that matches the majority of your panels. This will make set up easier.
Site Information Tab
To fill in the Site Information Tab:

1.
Select the Site root directory in the Site Map screen. The Site
Information tab will appear on the right side of the screen.
2.
Create a Name for your site in the Site Name field.
3.
Add informational Notes about the site if you wish in the note
field.
4.
Click on the down arrow to the right of the Default Panel Type.
Select the panel type and version for the panels that you will be
using for your site.
5.
Notice that the Next Hardware Address to Assign to a

Panel appears as 1. This Hardware Address will be assigned to the
first control panel that you create. Subsequent panels that are
created in the software will be addressed incrementally from this
number.
6.
Leave the other fields unchanged.
7.
Click on the SAVE button. You will see that the Site Name now
appears as the top directory of the Site Map.
Site Information Defined
Filling in the Communications Information Tab

The Communications Information tab is used to define default parameters for how
panels will communicate in your Site. Any directory or panel created within the site
will first inherit the parameters defined at the Site level. These can be adjusted after
items are created.
Site Communications Information Tab
To fill in the Communications Information Tab:

1.
2.
Click on the Site Communications Tab
3.
Click on the down arrow to the right of the Com Type field.
Select Direct, Internet or Modem communications type.
4.
a.
Direct Communications: You will plug your computer

directly into a panel or Gateway using the serial cable that
came with your Enterprise Software or Gateway. Click on the
down arrow next to the Com Port field. Choose the serial
communications port that you will use.
b.
Internet Communications: You will communicate to the

panels over the Internet using an Ethernet Interface Module to
connect into your Local Area Network. Enter the IP Address
and IP Port that have been configured in the Ethernet
Interface Module.
c.
Modem Communications: You will communicate to the

panels through a dial up modem connection into either another
modem or an optional Telephone Interface Module at the
control panel. Enter the Telephone Number for the control
panels modem.
Click on the SAVE button.
Filling in the Location Information Tab

The Site Location is important in calculating Sunup and Sundown times for each
day. These calculated times could be used to define time schedules and several other
programming options. Setting location information at the Site level will allow other
directories and panels to inherit this information automatically, making it easier to
set up multi panel sites.
Location Information Tab
1.
2.
Click on the Site Location Information Tab. You will see the
Location Information form.
3.
Click on the Find Your Location button.
Find Your Location Button
4.
In the Find Your Location window, choose your state and select
the nearest city to your location. Click on the OK button to
automatically populate the Latitude, Longitude and Time
Zone for the selected location. (Alternately, it is possible to enter
the latitude and longitude of your location directly into the location
information tab without using the Find Your Location feature).
Find Your Location Window
5.
If necessary, add or subtract time to the pre-calculated values by

putting entries in the offset fields
6.
Click on the Save button to save the latitude and longitude

settings.
Location Information Tab Filled In
Holidays Tab
Please leave this tab blank for initial setup. This tab will be discussed in the
Creating Holidays section.
Lamps Tab
Please leave this tab blank for initial setup. This feature will not be discussed as part
of the Quick Start Guide. Please refer to the Run Time Reporting Feature section for
information on using the run time reporting capabilities of the software.
Options Tab
The Options Tab allows you to choose which, if any, advanced programming
options you want to use. If you are using Digita switches, you will want to select the
Use Advanced Switch Features check box. Otherwise, for the purposes of the
Quick Start Guide, the options will not be discussed. Consult the Help Manual for
information about these options if you are interested.
Creating a Network
The software allows you to set up a network in your site map only if you have
purchased the Network version of the Enterprise Software. If you have the nonnetwork version of the Keeper Enterprise Software, please skip to the section on
Creating Panels.
ControlKeeper control panels can be wired into a network cable that allows you to
communicate from the Keeper Enterprise software on your computer to all the panels
in the site through a single connecting device. If the control panels on your site have
been installed this way, you must create a Network directory in the Keeper
Enterprise software to mirror the actual network for computer-to-control panel
communications to work properly. We will begin the programming process by
creating the control panel network.
To create a new Network in the Site:
1.
In the Site Map tab, right click on the Site directory.
2.
The Site Directory Options Menu will appear. Click on the New
Network.
New Network Menu
3.
Notice that a cluster of three yellow rectangles now appears under

the Site Directory. These rectangles represent control panels in a
network and form the Network Directory Icon. There is a plus
sign to the left of the icon, indicating that this Network Directory
contains lower directories. The network Name is to the right of the
icon, defaulting to New Network.
New Network Created
Defining the Network

The Network Icon is a cluster of three yellow rectangles tied together with a line.
These yellow rectangles represent control panels in a network. There is a plus sign to
the left of the icon, indicating that this Network Directory contains lower directories.
Click on the network icon to display the network information screens. Network
definition includes information about the control panels on the site and the method
used to communicate with those panels.
Network Definition Screen
Filling in the Network Information Tab

The Network Information tab will be used to name your network directory and
define default parameters for panels that will be created within the network. If you
set the default panel type at the Site level, the default panel type will already reflect
the settings you defined.
Network Information Tab
To fill in the Network Information Tab:

1.
In the Site Map, select the Network directory. The Network

2.
Create a Name for your network in the Network Name field.
3.
Add informational Notes about the network if you wish in the

note field.
4.
Notice that the rest of the information shown here is the same as
you defined in the Site Information form. If it needs to be
changed, you can make any necessary modifications.
5.
Click on the SAVE button. You will see that the Network Name
now appears in the site map.
Network Information Defined
Filling in the Network Communications Information

Tab
Click on the Network Communications Information Tab. Notice that the
Network communications definition is the same as the Site Communications
definition. If changes are necessary, please make them at this point.
Using the Find Panels Tab

If the control panels are wired into the network and the computer-to-panel
communications device has been installed, you can automatically create the panels in
the Network directory by using the Find Panels feature.
If you do not have the network version of the Keeper Enterprise
Software, if you are not on site when configuring the panels, or if the
panels are not yet installed or addressed at the facility, you must create
the panels directly within the Site. Please skip to the section Creating
Panels later in this guide.
Find Panels Tab
To use the Find Panels function:

1.
Make sure that your communications method is operational, i.e. the

serial cable is plugged into the panel from your computer, the EIM
is operational or the modem has been installed.
2.
Make sure that all panels have had their hardware addresses
assigned and are powered.
3.
In the Site Map, select the Network directory. The Network

4.
Select the Find Panels tab.
5.
In the Find Panels tab, enter the Starting Address and the Ending
Address of the panels that have been installed in the network. The
form defaults to an address range of from 1 to 10. You can change
these defaults if your address range is different.
6.
Click on the Search For Panels in Network button. Enterprise

will begin polling the network for panels in the address range
chosen. The software will show the progression of the search and
let you know if it cannot find a panel at a certain address.
7.
Once the search has completed, click on the OK button. Notice

that the software has created Panel directories for all the panels
that have been found in the search. Notice that there is a plus sign
to the left of the panel graphic in the Site Map, indicating that there
is more information at a lower level in the Panel Directory.
Creating Panels
You will need to create control panels manually if your control panels have not yet
been installed in the network, if you are not on site at the time you are configuring
the programming of the panels, or if you do not have a network of panels in your
site.
1.
If your panels are in a network, right click on the network directory

you created previously. If you have a standalone panel, right click
on the site directory.
2.
Click on New Panel option in the popup menu.
Popup Menu: New Panel Option
3.
Click on Mode at the top left of the form. A Create Panel

Options Menu will appear. If you have multiple panels that are
the same type, click on the Create Multiple Panels option. This
feature saves a lot of time if you have many panels to create in a
network. If you have different panel types or are creating a
standalone panel, select Create Single Panel mode.
Create New Panel Form
4.
If multiple mode is chosen, make certain the panel type and

version is correct and then type in the number of panels to create.
If single panel mode is chosen, you will have the option of naming
the panel and choosing a panel address as well as selecting the
panel type. Once the correct information is defined, click the OK
Button.
5.
You will see the created panels in the Site Map under the
Network directory if you created them in a network or in the Site
directory if you created them as standalone panels. The list of
panels will also appear at the bottom right of your screen. Notice
that there is a plus sign to the left of the panel graphic in the Site
Map, indicating that there is more information at a lower level in
the Panel Directory.
Newly Created Panels
Defining the Panels

At the panel level, it is possible to define panel information specific to that panel.
This is done through the three tabs at the panel level.
Filling in the Panel Identification Information Tab
Panel Identification Information Tab
1.
Expand the Site and Network directories in the Site Map.
2.
Click on the first panel. Panel Information tabs will appear on the
right side of the screen.
3.
Click on the Panel Identification Information tab. Enter a

Panel Name if you desire to change the default name: Names are
limited to 8 characters. Enter any informational notes that you
wish to add. If necessary, the panel address may be changed as
well.
4.
Click on the Save Button. Notice that the new Panel Name is
shown in the Site Map.
5.
Repeat for additional panels.
Filling in the Location Information Tab

Click on the Location Information Tab. Notice that the information is the same
as the Site location definitions you set before. If changes are necessary, please make
them at this point.
Filling in the Panel Communications Information

Tab
Click on the Communications Information Tab. Notice that the information is
the same as the Site or Network location definitions you set before. If changes are
necessary, please make them at this point.
Defining Relays
Once your panel is set up, you will need to define the relays for each panel. This
includes naming your relays, defining notes and breaker information, and selecting
the correct relay types and warn times.
Relays Icon
The relays icon appears as two relays in the site map tree. If you click on the plus
sign next to this icon, the view expands, showing all relays beneath. Clicking on the
icon itself will bring you to the relay list view window on the right of the screen
where you can perform multi edit functions. Please note that smaller panels such as
the ControlKeeper 2 or ControlKeeper 4 may show 32 available relays. Only the
first 2 or 4 relays respectively will be used to control lighting loads.
To define your relays:
1.
Expand the site map by clicking on the plus sign until the panel is
expanded.
2.
Click on the plus sign at the left of the Relays directory. The
directory will open, revealing the relays that it contains in its lower
directories. The plus sign changes to a minus sign, indicating that
the directory is open.
3.
Click on Relay #01. The Relay Information Form will appear

on the right of your screen.
Relay Information Screen
4.
Fill in the form as follows:
Relay Name: This name should be unique from any other relay
in the lighting panel, and can have up to 8 characters.
Relay Notes: This is information to help you identify the area

controlled by this relay.
Relay Type: You can click on the down arrow to the right of the
relay type to see what types are available in this control panel. In
most cases, you can leave this at the default relay type.
Breaker Panel Name and Circuit Number: Breaker panel

name and circuit number are very helpful when you are
troubleshooting the system. With this information you can easily
locate the controlled fixtures on the electrical drawings.
If you are using a Warn Off option, please define it here. Warn
Offs will not be discussed in detail in this Quick Start Guide.
Please refer to the section Warn Off for further information on
this feature.
The broadcast, log and relay card type fields should be left at
their default settings.
5.
Click on the Save button. Notice that the new Relay Name
appears in the List of Relays under the Relay Directory.
6.
Repeat the above steps for all additional relays in each panel.
Programming Time Schedules

Once your relays are defined, you can begin programming your control strategies.
This includes any time schedules that need to run the relays. Each lighting panel in
the system runs its own clock and schedules. It will be necessary to define schedules
in each panel that needs to run them.
Schedules Icon
The time schedules directory icon appears as two clocks in the site map tree. If you
click on the plus sign next to this icon, the view expands showing all available time
schedules underneath. Time schedules that have ??:?? are unused schedules that may
be programmed. Time schedules will resort themselves into time sort order.
To program a schedule:
1.
expanded.
2.
Click on the plus sign at the left of the Time Schedules

directory. The directory will open, revealing the available time
schedules. The plus sign changes to a minus sign, indicating that
the directory is open.
3.
Click on the first available time schedule that has ??:?? indicating
it is not used. The Time Schedule Information Form will
appear on the right of your screen.
4.
Click on the Active radial button to activate the form.
Time Schedule Information Screen
5.
Type: Select the type time if you are not using an astronomical
sunup or sundown schedule. Select the type Sunup or Sundown to
use the astronomical clock feature of the software.
Time: Enter the time you wish the schedule to occur at. AM is
distinguished from PM in the system by using military time. This
field will not be active if the schedule type of sunup or sundown
has been chosen.
Offset: If sunup or sundown has been chosen, you may define an

offset to allow the schedule to turn on before or after the sunup or
sundown time.
Note: Enter notes if desired for further description.
Command & Priority: Define the command that the schedule

should send, ON, OFF or AUTO. Define the priority of the
command (unless you know how to use priorities, please leave this
at the NONE level).
Days of Week: Checkmark the days of week that the schedule

will run.
6.
Click on the Save button. Notice that the new time appears in the
List of schedules under the Time Schedules directory.
7.
At the bottom of the screen, click on the Show All Local Relays
radial button. All the relays that are in that panel will appear on
the below right side of the window.
Show All Local Relays
8.
Use the mouse to select the relays that need to respond to this time
schedule. Hold down the shift key to select adjacent relays or the
CTRL key to select non-adjacent relays.
9.
Once all the relays that need to respond to the schedule are
selected, click on the Link button. The relays will then be linked
to the time schedule.
Link Button
10. At the bottom of the screen, click on the Show Only Linked
Relays radial button. Only the relays that are linked to the
schedule will now show in the lower right side of the window.
Verify that the relays are correct.
Show Only Linked Relays
11. Repeat the above steps to create any additional schedules needed in
this panel. Repeat for all panels that need time schedules.
Programming a Contact Input Wall Switch

Any relay can be programmed to on and off with a wall switch. In order to program
a contact input wall switch you will need to know the following information:
What low-voltage switch channel number is the wall

switch wired to?
What type of switch is it: three wire momentary, two wire

momentary (toggle), or two wire maintained?
What relays should the switch control?
Once you have this information, the wall switch can be programmed.
Switches Icon
The switches directory icon appears as two wall switches in the site map tree. If you
click on the plus sign next to this icon, the view expands showing all available
switches underneath. If in the Site directory, option tab you did not click on the Use
Advanced Switch Features, option, only 32 switches will be displayed. If this option
is enabled, 64 switches will be displayed unless your panel is a version 3 controller.
To program a contact input wall switch:
1.
expanded.
2.
Click on the plus sign at the left of the Switches directory. The
directory will open, revealing the available switches. The plus sign
changes to a minus sign, indicating that the directory is open.
3.
For contact closure switches, the software defaults to software

switch 1 operating off of the physical CH1, switch 2 operates from
CH2, and switch 32 operates from CH32 of the logic panel. It
is recommended that you select the switch that corresponds to the
correct channel # as the best programming practice. It is possible
to change the channel that a switch operates from if necessary.
Select the switch # that corresponds to the channel that your switch
is wired to. The Switch Information screen will appear.
Switch Information Screen
4.
Name: This name should be unique from any other switch in the
lighting panel, and can have up to 8 characters. The name is
especially important when broadcasting the switch to control relays
in other lighting panels.
Type: Select the switch type:

A Momentary switch (SPDT 3 wire momentary) typically

has a distinct ON position and a distinct OFF position. When
the switch is moved to the ON position, there is a brief closure
between the ON contact and the 24VDC contact of the
controller before the switch returns to a ready state. When
the switch is moved to the OFF position, there is a brief
closure between the OFF contact and the 24VDC contact of
the controller the switch returns to the ready state.
A Maintained switch (SPST 2 wire maintained) is typically a

standard wall switch. When the switch is turned ON a
constant contact is made between the ON contact and the
24VDC contact of the controller and the switch remains in that
position. When the switch is turned OFF, the closure is
released, which is interpreted as an OFF command.
A Toggle switch (SPST 2 wire momentary) is typically a

single push button type switch. When the button is pushed
and released a brief closure is made to the controller switch
channel. The first closure is seen as an ON command. Each
closure that follows will reverse or toggle the command.
Command & Priority: Define the commands that the switch

should send, ON, OFF or AUTO for both the On and Off
command. Define the priority of the command (unless you know
how to use priorities, please leave this at the NONE level).
Broadcast: This field will be discussed more in detail in the

section on "Programming a Wall Switch to Activate Relays in
Another Panel".
Warn Off: This field may be check marked to allow the switch to
cause the warn off sequence on linked relays to activate with the
off command of the switch or a timer off command.
Timer Minutes/Seconds: If you wish the switch to activate an

automatic timer off function, enter the timer minutes/seconds here.
For instance, if you want the lights to remain on for two hours
when an ON command is received, enter 120 minutes. Dont
forget to enter a no-timer mask to prevent the timer from counting
down during scheduled ON times. See Programming a Mask for
further information.
Mask: By default, unless masks are already created, this section

will be inactive. See Programming a Mask for further information.
5.
Click on the Save button. Notice that the new switch appears in
the list of switches under the Switches directory.
6.
7.
Use the mouse to select the relays that need to respond to this wall
switch. Hold down the shift key to select adjacent relays or the
8.
Once all the relays that need to respond to the switch are selected,
click on the Link button. The relays will then be linked to the
switch.
9.
At the bottom of the screen, click on the Show Only Linked

Relays radial button. Only the relays that are linked to the switch
will now show in the lower right side of the window. Verify that
the relays are correct.
Link Button
10. Repeat the above steps to create any additional switches as needed.
11. If using pilot lit switches in a ControlKeeper-T, please see
Programming Lighted Switches in the ControlKeeper T for
further details on programming the light function.
Programming a Digita Switch Station

Any relay can be programmed to on and off with a Digita Switch. Digita Switches
come in many configurations. In order to program a Digita Switch station you will
need to know the following information:
What panel is the Digita Switch network wired to?
How many buttons does the switch have?
What is the address of the switch station set at?
What relays should each button control?
Once you have this information, the Digita station can be programmed.
Switches Icon
The switches directory icon appears as two wall switches in the site map tree. If you
click on the plus sign next to this icon, the view expands showing all available
switches underneath. If in the Site directory, option tab you did not click on the Use
Advanced Switch Features, option, only 32 switches will be displayed. If this option
is enabled, 64 switches will be displayed unless your panel is a version 3 controller.
To program a Digita Switch station:
1.
Click on the Site root directory.
2.
Select the Options tab and ensure that the Use Advanced
Switch Features option is enabled then save this change.
Advanced Switch Features Enabled
3.
expanded.
4.
Right click on the Switches directory to bring up a popup menu.
5.
Select the option to create a New Switch Station.
New Switch Station Menu
6.
In the Switch Station popup screen that appears, make sure that the
Family option is set for Digita Classic.
7.
On the right side of the screen, click on the picture that resembles
your switch station. This will pre-populate the Type field with the
correct type for your switch.
8.
Type a descriptive name (limited to 8 characters) and a note if

you wish.
9.
Click on the Next button at the bottom of the screen.
Switch Station Form
10. Fill in the switch stations address information matching the

physical address of the rotary dials on the switch to the address
fields on the software screen. Click on the Next button at the
bottom of the screen.
Digita Station Address
11. On the switch button assignment screen, on the left side, use the
mouse to click on the first switch button.
12. On the right side of the screen, select the first available switch then
click on the Add to Station button.
13. Repeat steps 11 and 12 for each remaining button on the switch
station.
Digita Switch Station
14. Click on the Finish button at the bottom of the screen. The Digita
Station configuration screen will close.
15. In the site map, expand the Switches directory. There will be a
new directory for your switch station.
Switch Station Icon
16. Expand the switch station directory. Select the first switch in the
switch station.
Switch Station in Site Map
17. Fill in the switch information form as follows:
Name: This name should be unique from any other switch in the
especially important when broadcasting the switch to control relays
in other lighting panels.
Type: This field will be pre-defined based on the type chosen in

the station setup form.
Command & Priority: Define the commands that the switch

Broadcast: This field will be discussed more in detail in the

section on "Programming a Wall Switch to Activate Relays in
Another Panel".
Warn Off: This field may be check marked to allow the switch to
off command of the switch or a timer off command.
Timer Minutes/Seconds: If you wish the switch to activate an


18. Click on the Save button. Notice that the new switch appears in
the list of switches under the Switches directory.
19. At the bottom of the screen, click on the Show All Local Relays
20. Use the mouse to select the relays that need to respond to this wall
switch. Hold down the shift key to select adjacent relays or the
21. Once all the relays that need to respond to the switch are selected,
switch.
Link Button
Relays radial button. Only the relays that are linked to the switch
23. Repeat steps 17 through 22 for the additional buttons that are part
of that switch station.
24. Once all switches are defined, make sure the panel is expanded in
the Site Map tab.
25. Click on the Feedbacks directory. (This step will configure the
LED behavior in the switch to match one of the controlled relays
ON/OFF state).
26. In the Feedback grid, click on the Add Feedback button.
27. In the new blank row, click on the From Relay field. Use the
drop down to select ONE of the relays that this switch controls.
Only one relay should be chosen as a representative of the group of
relays.
28. Click on the To Panel field. Use the drop down to select to panel
Self option.
29. Click on the To Switch field. Use the drop down to select the
switch that the relay will feed back the LED state to.
30. Click on the Status column. It should read OK.
31. Click on the Save button at the bottom of the screen.
Feedbacks Screen
32. Repeat steps 26 through 31 for any additional buttons on the

switch station.
33. Repeat all steps for any additional switch stations that need to be
programmed.
Programming a Wall Switch to Activate Relays in

Another Panel
If your panels are ControlKeepers that are networked together, it is possible to
program a wall switch in one panel to control relays in another panel. This is done
by setting the wall switch to broadcast and creating a remote command in the
secondary panel.
To set a switch to control relays in another panel:
1.
Program the wall switch with the initial settings as described in the
Programming a Contact Input Wall Switch or Programming a
Digita Switch Station sections of this quick start guide.
2.
In the panel that the wall switch is wired to, expand the panels
Switches directory and select the switch you need to program.
3.
Make note of the exact switch name (this command is case

sensitive).
4.
Click on the Broadcast checkbox and make sure that there is a

checkmark in this field.
Switch Information Form Broadcast and Name Fields
5.
Click on the Save button.
6.
In the panel that has the relays that need to respond to the switch,
expand the panel in the site map.
7.
Expand the Remotes directory.
8.
Select the first available remote.
Remote Information Screen
9.
Fill in the following details:
10. Fill in the form as follows: (Note that when the originating switch
broadcasts, it sends just its name and the physical ON and OFF
command. Any priorities, commands, timers, or warn offs that
have been assigned to the original switch will not broadcast and
will need to be set on the remote as well).
Name: This name should match the broadcasting switch name

exactly. If not matched, the remote will not work.
Type: Select the switch type:
Command & Priority: Define the commands that the remote

Warn Off: This field may be check marked to allow the remote to
off command of the remote or a timer off command.
Timer Minutes/Seconds: If you wish the remote to activate an


11. Click on the Save button. Notice that the new remote appears in
the list of remotes under the Remotes directory.
12. At the bottom of the screen, click on the Show All Local Relays
13. Use the mouse to select the relays that need to respond to this
remote. Hold down the shift key to select adjacent relays or the
14. Once all the relays that need to respond to the remote are selected,
remote.
Link Button
Relays radial button. Only the relays that are linked to the remote
16. Repeat the above steps to create any additional remotes in other
panels as needed.
(Note: if the wall switch is a Digita 5 switch type that controls no relays that are local
to it, it will be necessary to set up the feedback table in the panel that has the relays
controlled.)
Programming a Telephone Interface Module Command

If your site has purchased a telephone interface module and you are using the touchtone override capability of this system, it will be necessary to set up remote
commands for the panel to respond to these codes.
To set up TIM commands in a panel:
1.
Expand the panel that has the relays that need to respond to the
TIM code.
2.
Expand the Remotes directory.
3.
Select the first available remote.
Remote Information Screen
4.
Name: The name of the remote must start with the capital letters
TIM that identifies it as a telephone interface module code. The
rest of the name will contain the numbers that the user will enter
on their telephone to override the attached relays. For instance,
TIM2051: The end user would enter 2051 when the voice prompts
prompted for the user area code.
Type: Select the TIM type:
Command & Priority: Define the commands that the remote

Warn Off: This field may be check marked to allow the remote to
off command of the remote or a timer off command.
Timer Minutes/Seconds: If you wish the remote to activate an


5.
Click on the Save button. Notice that the new remote appears in
the list of remotes under the Remotes directory.
6.
7.
Use the mouse to select the relays that need to respond to this
remote. Hold down the shift key to select adjacent relays or the
8.
Once all the relays that need to respond to the remote are selected,
remote.
9.
At the bottom of the screen, click on the Show Only Linked

Relays radial button. Only the relays that are linked to the remote
Link Button
10. Repeat the above steps to create any additional TIM codes in other
panels as needed.
If a TIM code with the same number is programmed in multiple panels that are part
of a networked system, all panels that are programmed with this code will respond
when that code is issued.
Programming an Analog Photosensor

If you have a ControlKeeper T, you may have an analog photosensor as an accessory
to the system. Any relay may be programmed to turn on or off with an analog
photosensor. In order to program an analog photosensor, you will need to know the
following information:
What analog channel number is the photosensor wired to?
What is the range and voltage of the analog sensor (if this
sensor has been provided by Cooper Controls, this
information can be found in the analog photosensors
installation documentation)?
What relays should the analog control and what is the

desired light level?
Once you have this information, the analog can be programmed.

Analogs Icon
The Analogs Icon appears as two yellow dials. If you click on the plus sign next to
this icon the view expands to show all the analogs beneath. Clicking on the icon
itself it will bring you to the analog list view window at the right of your screen. The
panels display 32 analogs beneath this icon. .
To program a contact input wall switch:
1.
expanded.
2.
Click on the plus sign at the left of the Analogs directory. The
directory will open, revealing the available analogs. The plus sign
3.
Select the first available analog. The Analog Information Screen

will appear.
Analog Information Screen
4.
Name: This name should be unique from any other analog in the
especially important when broadcasting the analog to control
relays in other lighting panels.
Type: Select the photocell type:
Command & Priority: Define the commands that the analog

Broadcast: If the analog is going to command relays in another

panel, checkmark this box.
Warn Off: This field may be check marked to allow the analog to
off command of the analog or a timer off command.
Timer Minutes/Seconds: It is rare that an analog has a timer.

Do not use this field without consulting technical support.

Log Type: Select whether you want the logs to show analog
readings or ON/OFF commands. It is recommended that the
reading option be chosen during initial setup to allow for easier
setting of thresholds.
Min On, Min Off: If the thresholds are set too close together,
lights may cycle unless a minimum on or off time is set. It is
recommended that these fields be left blank until an observation
period has passed that shows that these are necessary.
5.
Click on the Save button. Notice that the new analog appears in
the list of analogs under the Analogs directory.
6.
Click on the Analog Settings tab.
Analog Settings Tab
7.
Channel: Type the number of the analog channel that the

Photosensor is wired to.
Lower Endpoint and Upper Endpoint: Enter the range of the

photosensor.
Lower & Upper End Point Voltage: Enter the voltage range of
the photosensor.
Trip Type & State: Leave at the defaults.
Lower and Upper Thresholds: These are the readings at which

the ON and OFF commands will be sent. You may set a
preliminary threshold in these fields to get started but these fields
will need adjustment based on light levels later on. When the
photosensor goes below the figure in the lower threshold field, it
will issue an ON command. When the photosensor goes above the
figure in the upper threshold field, it will issue an OFF command.
8.
9.
Use the mouse to select the relays that need to respond to this
photosensor. Hold down the shift key to select adjacent relays or
the CTRL key to select non-adjacent relays.
10. Once all the relays that need to respond to the switch are selected,
photosensor.
Link Button
Relays radial button. Only the relays that are linked to the
photosensor will now show in the lower right side of the window.
Verify that the relays are correct.
12. Repeat the above steps to create any additional photosensors as

needed.
It will be necessary to adjust the upper and lower threshold fields based on the
desired light level in the space. The easiest method of achieving this is to be in the
space when the light level is at the necessary switch off point. Perform a live status
command to determine what the analog photosensors current reading is. The
thresholds can then be adjusted to reflect this figure with a comfortable deadband
cushion in between.
Programming a Mask
One of the most frequent mask types used in the lighting control system is the notimer mask. This mask was built to allow inputs that have timers to work with timers
only after-hours, preventing timer offs from occurring during the daytime hours and
creating a nuisance for personnel in the occupied facilities. This application is just
one example of the power of masks.
In order to program mask, you will need to know the following information:
What type of mask are you setting up?
What times should the mask be active?
What inputs need to be masked?
Once you have this information, the mask can be programmed.

Masks Icon
The Masks Icon appears as two crossed out switches. If you click on the plus sign
next to this icon the view expands to show all the masks beneath. Clicking on the
icon itself it will bring you to the mask list view window at the right of your screen.
The panels display 8 masks beneath this icon. .
To program a mask:
1.
expanded.
2.
Click on the plus sign at the left of the Masks directory. The
directory will open, revealing the available masks. The plus sign
3.
Select the first available mask. The Mask Information Screen will
appear.
Mask Information Screen
4.
Name: The mask can have up to an 8-character name.
Type: Select the mask type:
Begin & End Times, Days of Week: Enter the times that the
mask should be active and select the days of week.
Offsets: If sunup or sundown has been chosen, you may define an

offset to allow the mask to begin or end before or after the sunup
or sundown time
5.
Click on the Save button. Notice that the new analog appears in
the list of analogs under the Analogs directory.
6.
Expand the directory (switches, analogs or remotes) that has the

input(s) that the mask should apply to and select the correct input.
7.
The Information Form for the input will appear on the right side.
The Mask list will appear at the bottom of the form.
8.
Place a checkmark in the checkbox for the mask that should apply.
Mask Applied to Switch
9.
Click on the Save button.
10. Repeat for additional inputs or masks that need to be created.
Creating Holidays
Sometimes exceptions need to be made to time schedules you have defined, such as
during a Holiday. When you define Holiday Dates, you can adjust your lighting
schedules to the decreased building occupancy during a Holiday. Holidays will
require you to enter the month and date of the holiday. No year is required. The
system assumes that these dates will re-occur each year. If this is a one-time event or
a floating holiday that may not occur on the same date the next year, it will be
necessary to update the holiday programming on a yearly basis.
Holidays may be defined at the Site Level, Building Level or Panel Level. For the
purpose of this quick start guide, we will define the Holidays at the Site Level.
Holidays defined at the Site Level are copied automatically to all control panels.
1.
2.
Select the Holiday tab.
3.
Click on the Add Site Holiday button.
4.
In the new line created enter the Date of the holiday in MM/DD
format and any desired notes.
Site Holiday Tab
5.
Click on the Save button to save this Holiday. A secondary

window may appear letting you know the number of panels that
may be affected by this change. Click on the Save button again to
apply the changes.
6.
Expand the site map until all the panels can be seen.
7.
Expand the first panel and then expand the time schedule directory.
8.
Review the schedules to see if any of them are set to run on the
Holiday day of week. If not, it may be necessary to program
schedules for the necessary holiday hours. Refer to the time
schedule programming section of this guide to create this schedule
and repeat for any affected panels.
Initial Communications Setup

These steps should be followed regardless of panel type or configuration.
Up until this point, all the steps for programming have been done offline from the
system. The Keeper Enterprise Software is an offline editor. Once programming
changes are done, it will require that you download the changes for them to take
effect. Before this is done initially, there are a few items that should be done.
Step 1: Initial Connection to the System

As part of the initial setup, you set the site communications parameters for the type
of communications you were going to use. If it is necessary to change these
parameters, please do so now. If you have a network, you will need to change the
parameters at the network directory; otherwise, parameters may be changed at the
panel directory.
If you are using a serial cable, it will be necessary to make this connection from your
computer to the panel or Gateway. Make sure that any EIMs or Modems are
configured, connected and powered.
Step 2: Verify the Hardware Addresses

It will also be necessary to ensure that all panels have had their addresses assigned
properly.
Hardware Address in the ControlKeeper T

The ControlKeeper T (CK T) logic panel does not have an address switch. The
hardware address must be set through the touch screen interface on the circuit board.
Refer to the CK T User Manual for information about how to set the CK T hardware
address.
Hardware Address in Other Control Panels

Panels other than the CK T use a board-mounted 8-position switch to set the
Hardware Address. Refer to the Item Reference Drawing in the Installation
Instructions for the location of the Address Switch on your control panel. The
location of the switch varies depending on the type of control panel being used. This
switch works by binary numbering scheme. You add the binary value of the
switches that are in the ON position to reach the end address. Once the switches are
set for the proper address, make sure to press the reset button to initialize the
new address.
Switch position 1 = Binary Value 1

Step 3: Clear the Control Panel Memory to Factory

Defaults
Before initial programming, panels should be cleared back to factory defaults. This
ensures that there is a clean download of programmed settings.
To Clear Memory in CK T Version 5 Panels:

1.
First be sure that the hardware override switch has been set to
ON. This will keep your lights on during the clear memory
process. Refer to the installation instructions for the location of this
override switch, as the location varies from panel type to panel
type.
2.
Reset the panel, using the Reset Button. Refer to the installation
instructions for the location of the reset button.
3.
Within one minute, touch all 4 corners of the display screen, one
corner after the other, being sure not to touch anywhere else on the
screen. If more than a minute goes by without all four corners
being touched, or if you touch anything other than the four corners,
you will leave the memory clear function without having cleared
the memory.
4.
After you have touched the four corners within the one minute
time period, a warning message will appear, asking if you really
want to clear the panel. Press YES if you want to clear the panel
memory; press NO if you do not want to clear the memory.
To Clear Memory in LiteKeeper 16 & 32 size Panels or Older

Keypad Style ControlKeeper Panels
1.
type.
2.
Clear memory by holding down the * key with one hand while you
press and release the Reset Button with the other. Keep the *
pressed until the Initializing message appears on the display.
To Clear Memory in LiteKeeper 8 & LiteKeeper 4 Panels
1.
type.
2.
Press and release the reset button. Wait for the display to come
back from initializing.
3.
Press the key sequence A B C D * . The display will read

initializing again. The panel is now clear.
To Clear Memory in ControlKeeper 4 and ControlKeeper 2 Panels

1.
type.
2.
Press and hold the reset button for approximately 20 seconds. The
panel will be cleared.
Step 4: Setting the Panel Time and Date

Single Panel Time and Date Command
This command can be sent to a single panel in a network or a standalone panel.
1.
Expand the site map.
2.
Right click on the panel name in the site map tree.
3.
Select the Communicate with Panel option.
4.
Select the Set Time/Date in Panel option.
5.
The time and date will pull automatically from your computer
clock. If this is incorrect, please type in the correct time and date
in the white fields provided.
Set Time Date Command Window
6.
Click on the OK button. The command will execute.
Network Panel Time and Date Command

This command can be sent to a network of panels.
1.
2.
Right click on the network name in the site map tree.
3.
Select the Send Command option.
4.
Select the Set Time/Date for Network option.
5.
The time and date will pull automatically from your computer
clock. If this is incorrect, please type in the correct time and date
in the white fields provided.
Set Time Date Command Window
6.
Click on the OK button. The command will execute. All panels

on the network will receive the command simultaneously.
If the panels you are working with are older panel versions, they may not support the
network time/date command. Please see the section titled Network Time and Date
Command With Older Panels for further information on this subject.
Step 5: Clearing Panel Logs

Once the time and date is set, you will want to clear the panel logs. This will allow
log data to accumulate more accurately as there may be some log files that have
accumulated before the time and date was set to the current value that could skew
this data later on.
Single Panel Clear Log Command

1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the Clear Logs In Panel option.
5.
Network Panel Clear Log Command

1.
2.
Click on the network name in the site map tree.
3.
On the right side of the screen, select the panel or panels to clear
logs from. Press the Shift key to select adjacent panels or the
CTRL key to select non-adjacent panels.
4.
Click on the OK button. The command will begin execution.

Once all panels are complete, success messages should be seen in
the status column indicating that the process is through.
Downloading Programming to the Panel

It will be necessary to download the programming to the panel initially as well as
any time a change is made.
Single Panel Download

1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the Send Settings to Panel (Download) option.
5.
For the initial download, make certain the All Settings radial
button is selected. After the initial download, if you are the only
one making changes to the database, you can select the Changed
Settings option.
Single Panel Download
6.
Network Download
1.
2.
Click on the network name in the site map tree.
3.
On the right side of the screen, select the panel or panels to send
the download to. Press the Shift key to select adjacent panels or
the CTRL key to select non-adjacent panels.
Multiple Panel Download
4.
Click on the OK button. The command will begin execution.

Once all panels are complete, success messages should be seen in
the status column indicating that the process is through.
Commanding Relays On or Off from the Software

Once download is complete, it may be necessary to issue an ON or OFF command to
ensure the relays assume the correct state until the next command goes through the
system. The Keeper Enterprise Software provides a means of turning a relay or
relays ON and OFF from your computer. This Manual Command remains in
effect until the next schedule time or the next switch input command is issued.
To turn a relay ON or OFF:
1.
2.
Expand the panel you wish to command relays within.
3.
Click on the Relays directory.
4.
On the right side of the screen, select the relays that need to be
commanded. Hold the shift key to select adjacent relays. Hold the
Ctrl key to select non-adjacent relays.
5.
Right click on the selected relays.
6.
From the popup menu, select the Send On Command to

Relays option or the Send Off Command to Relays option.
Relay Command Screen
7.
Click OK to send the command.
Viewing Live Status

To verify that the relays are in the correct configuration or to look at status later on,
you may want to perform a Live Relay Status Report. The shortened version of
this report shows the current Status for all relays. You can also get expanded
information about the current status, scheduled status and next status of a selected
relay.
1.
2.
Expand the panel you wish to command relays within.
3.
Click on the Relays directory.
4.
Click on the Live Relay Status Tab at the bottom of the screen.
The Live Relay Status Window will open. The basic window
shows the relay Name, Type, and Current Status.
5.
The relay information is updated about every two seconds.
6.
If you wish to view expanded status, wait for the mouse cursor to
become an arrow then click on the check box to the left of the relay
name.
Live Status Tab
7.
Once you are done, when the mouse cursor is an arrow, click on
the Relay Settings Tab to end the Live Update Report.
Uploading and Viewing Log Files

The lighting controllers maintain Logs of all relay, analog, switch and remote
actuations. You must upload this information into your computer in order to view it.
To Upload Logs:
1.
Expand the Site Map.
2.
Right click on the panel name in the Site Map Tree. A popup menu
will appear.
3.
Choose Communicate With Panel. The Panel Communications

Menu will appear.
4.
Choose Get Settings/Logs from the panel
5.
In the middle of the communications window select All Logs

and click on the OK button.
6.
When the communication is complete, the window status column

will read Success: Upload.
7.
Click on the Close button to exit the screen.
If uploading from a network system, it is possible to upload log settings from all
panels by selecting the panels to upload on the right side of the screen when in the
network directory.
To Viewing the Log Data:
1.
Right click on the panel name in the Site Map Tree. A popup menu
will appear.
2.
Choose the Panel Reports option.
3.
The Reports Window will appear.
4.
Choose the Log Reports Tab.
5.
Select the type of log data you wish to view, then select the relays,
analogs, switches or remotes you wish to view.
6.
Click on the Get Log Data Button. The log report will appear to
the right of your screen.
7.
Once done viewing the data, click on Close to exit.
Backing Up and Restoring Databases

It is always good practice to maintain a backup copy of your site programming. The
Database Backup and Restore functions are found at the Site Path Tab.
Backing up the Database

Once you have completed the programming, you should make a backup copy of the
data files that you have created. This backup includes all programming and any notes
fields that you have entered. To back up your programming data:
1.
Make sure that you are in the Site Path Window by accessing the
Site Path Tab.
2.
Select the directory in the Site Path that you would like to back
up.
3.
Use the mouse to right click on the Site Path to bring up a popup
menu.
4.
Click on Backup Database option. The Backup Database

Window will appear.
5.
Click on the Browse button in the Destination Zip File section.
6.
Browse to the location you would like to save the backup to then
click on the Save button in the Select Location window.
7.
Select the Create Backup Zip button to make the backup. You
will see a status report as the backup is created. The words
Database Backup Completed will appear in the lower left
corner when the backup is done.
8.
Use the Close button to close the backup screen.
Restoring a database from a backup

The Restore Database command reinstates backed up programming files to be the
active programming for the site. Using this command, you can restore files quickly
and easily in the event that data has been lost or overwritten. The Keeper Enterprise
saves the entire database in backup. To restore a backup file:
1.
Make sure that you are in the Site Path Window by accessing the
Site Path Tab.
2.
Create or select the directory in the Site Path that you would like
to restore to.
3.
Use the mouse to right click on the Site Path to bring up a popup
menu.
4.
Click on Restore Database option. The Restore Database

Window will appear. If an error message appears regarding the
existence of the back up file, click on OK to bypass this.
5.
Click on the Browse button in the Source Zip File section.
6.
Browse to the location of your backup file and select it.
7.
Select the Restore Database button to restore the file. You will
see a status report as the restoration processes. The words
Database Restore Completed will appear in the lower left
corner when the restoration is done.
8.
Use the Close button to close the restore screen.
9.
Double click on the site path to open the newly restored

programming into the Site Map screen.
Chapter 12 ControlKeeper Logic

Panel Troubleshooting
Transformer Power
ControlKeeper-T Transformer Troubleshooting
Symptoms of Issue:
RSC Power LED not lit
Panel Power LED not lit
Power LED lit but status LED not blinking or display not lit
Panel is in continuous re-initialization

Voltage from RSC to Panel:
From the RSC, the voltage is converted to additional voltages that power the panel.
The power LED only monitors the 24V line, not either of the two 5V lines. The
connector to the power of the RSC is color coded as follows:
+5V to power Network:
White & White/Black (leftmost pair)
+5V to power CKT Logic: Orange & Orange/Black (middle pair)

+24V to power switch/peripherals: Yellow & Yellow Black (rightmost pair)
To check power at this connector:
1.
Override the relay stack with the RSC ALL ON function.
2.
Disconnect the power connector from the top of the CKT logic
panel.
3.
With a meter on DC Voltage, check between each pair of wires for

the voltage shown above.
4.
If voltages are incorrect, proceed with measuring the voltage from

the transformer to the RSC.
ControlKeeper Logic Panel Troubleshooting 12-1
Voltage from the Transformer to the RSC

All relays will open when this test is performed. Disconnect power leads from the
RSC to the transformer. With a volt meter on AC Voltage:
Measure between the two red connection points in the transformer

Measure between the two blue connection points in the transformer

Condition
Direction
An internal thermal cutoff device protects

the transformer. This device opens when
transformer core temperature reaches 130
degrees centigrade. If this device has
opened you will need to bypass the relays to
hold the lights on until you can replace the
transformer.
The output may be low because of low

primary voltage, improper connection of
primary voltage wires (i.e. connecting the
277 VAC tap into a 120 VAC source), or a
bad power supply.
There is a secondary set of wires coming out of the transformer (red) which also are
connected to the RSC. These wires are simply docked in this location and do not
perform any power function to the RSC or logic board. All voltages for the panel
and RSC are derived off of the red and blue wires connected to the Molex connector.
If the voltages are correct, please troubleshoot further or contact technical support. If
voltages are incorrect, check primary voltages.
Primary Voltages
white/black for 120 VAC. For the 347 volt version of the transformer, the brown
wire is the 347 Volt neutral tap. The solid black wire is the line voltage wire. If a
power problem is suspected, it is recommended that the incoming voltage be
checked.
CK2 and CK4 Transformer Troubleshooting

Symptoms of issue:
Power LED is not illuminated
Power LED is illuminated but Status LED is not blinking
Panel continually resets.

The transformer provides power directly through control circuitry. There is no easy
way of measuring the secondary voltages on this logic board. The best way of
determining if there is adequate output voltage would be to take a reading for DV
voltage off of the +24V and Ground peripheral power. If approx. 24VDC is present,
the transformer is providing adequate power.
Condition
Direction
No Output on 24VDC
Verify that there is voltage on the primary side. If

voltage is present, contact Technical Support to obtain
replacement product...
Low Output on 24VDC

a bad power supply. Verify incoming voltage. Contact
Technical Support to obtain replacement product if
incoming voltage is fine.

The solid black wire is the line voltage wire. If a power problem is suspected, it is
recommended that the incoming voltage be checked.
The CK2 and CK4 have a single tapped transformer supply. Verify that the voltage
leads colors are correct for the voltage being supplied: white/orange for 277 VAC or
white/black for 120 VAC.
Brownout Notes:
In the Cooper Controls system, a brownout to the transformer circuit is defined as an
event that causes our on board DC supply to reach 7VDC or less. In this situation,
our logic board goes into "powerhit" mode in which it will shut down in order to
prevent damage to the software and RAM chips on the circuit board. This could
cause the lighting to be interrupted briefly as the relays may open then close once
power is restored to the normal DC voltage range. This would be an event that
would affect all relays on the panel in this same manner.
Events that could cause this type of could be:
cycles of power loss

100-90VAC range.

230-210VAC.
A loose neutral on the transformer circuit can also cause the panel to go
into occasional powerhit mode.
If powerhits are occurring and causing lighting disruptions, it is possible to place the
transformer circuit onto a constant voltage transformer. (for ControlKeeper 32, 16,
& 4A enclosures, Cooper Controls would recommend the model Sola 23-13-060-2
60VA 120V in/ 120V out. For the ControlKeeper 48 size enclosures, Cooper
Controls would recommend the model Sola 23-22-112-2 120VA 120 or 240V in/
120V out. For the ControlKeeper-4 and ControlKeeper-2 Cooper Controls would
recommend the model Sola 23-13-030-2 30VA 120V in/ 120V out ) Although
not preferred, a UPS may also be used.
RSC Troubleshooting
The Relay Stack Controller has undergone a change as of 3/5/2007 to allow for
increased functionality. If you have an RSC with a part number 54-022160-04 or 54-
022161-01 or higher revision, these RSCs will have the increased functionality
mentioned under the status LED function.
The Relay Stack Controller should have the power LED on at all times
when powered. Please check transformer voltages as indicated above if
the power LED is not lit. Swap out the RSC if the correct voltages are
present.
The Relay Stack Controller (RSC) has two override indicator LEDs.
The green LED comes on when the rocker switch overrides the relays
ON. The red LED comes on when the rocker switch overrides the
relays OFF. If the indicator LEDs do not come on check the power to
the RSC. If the correct voltages are present as indicated in the power
section above, swap out the RSC.
If the indicator LEDs do come on but the relays do not respond to the
override switch: Check that the status LED is flashing and flashes more
rapidly for a second when the ALL ON or ALL OFF switch is used. If
it does not, swap the RSC. Check that the relay card Status LEDs flash
when the RSC Switch is used and resume normal flash afterwards. If
they do not, check the connection from the RSC to the relay cards in
the high voltage compartment and the relay cards to the center rail to
make certain that all connections are properly seated. If the status
indicators are all receiving the signal, and you can hear the relays click,
verify the voltage to the lighting loads. If the relays are still not pulling
in, please contact technical support for further instruction.
DO NOT CHECK VOLTAGE ON PINS IN THE BACK OF THE
ENCLOSURE ON A SERIAL RELAY CONNECTION. YOU
WILL CAUSE LOW VOLTAGE COMPONENTS TO SHORT
RESULTING IN DAMAGE TO THE COMPONENTS AND OR
LIGHTING CONTROLLER.
If the indicator LED indicates that the panel is overridden ALL OFF or
ALL ON but the RSC switch is in the AUTO position, do a visual
check to see if there are any wires coming into the bottom of the RSC
other than the transformer leads. If there are wires coming into a
terminal block on the bottom of the RSC, these may go into a relay
interface module device or switch that has been triggered. Double
check the status of this device or remove the terminal block to verify
that the panel goes to the proper mode of operation. If no device is
wired, the override card has been damaged. Replace the override card.
There is a status LED that monitors the serial stack communications.

Depending on the vintage of your controller, this may react slightly
differently.
RSCs manufactured prior to 3/5/07: The status LED will flash

every few seconds indicating that the microprocessor on the RSC
is operational. The LED will flash at a more rapid rate when
communications are going through the RSC to the serial stack.
RSCs manufactured after 3/5/07: In addition to the blink pattern

described above, the status LED will flash rapidly if the RSC is
unable to contact any relay card in the enclosure indicating an error
condition. If you see this rapid flash a relay card is not
communicating on the serial stack. Look for a relay card that is
flashing its LED rapidly as the culprit for this communications
error.
Basic Serial Relay Troubleshooting

Symptoms:
A relay or relays do not turn lighting loads on and off as they should.
Basic questions to ask before beginning to

troubleshoot:
When there is trouble with a relay, usually the first indication is when you get the
call from someone that the lights are not working correctly.
Some basic questions to ask before beginning to troubleshoot:
Is this the only relay in the enclosure not working?
Do any of the relay cards in the enclosure work?
Do they work with the RSC override but not with the control panel
switches?
What type of lighting load is being controlled?
Troubleshooting steps:
Go to the control panel that has the relay or relays controlling the affected lighting.
1.
Check the relay status LEDs against what the lighting load is doing. If
the relay status LED reflects what the lighting load is doing, i.e. the
lights are off and the LED is off, more than likely there is a
programming issue that is at fault. Manually command the relay
through the touchscreen or onboard override to verify that it operates
properly and if so, double-check the programming. Double-check the
programming. If the relay status LED does not match the status of the
load, i.e. relay status LED is on and the lights are off, check that the
relay has not been manually overridden using the RSC or hardware
override switch if a sLRC..
2.
Check the relay card status LED. As of 3/5/07 a change has been made
to the relay card LED status. Normal operation for all vintages of cards
before has been that this LED should be blinking slowly unless
communications are occurring to it. As of 3/5/07 the LED will now
blink rapidly if the card can not communicate to the RSC. If you see a
card LED blinking rapidly without stop, this is likely the cause. Relay
card replacement is recommended.
3.
Check the indicator LEDs on the control panel itself to make sure the
board is functioning. The STATUS LED should be blinking. The
POWER LED should be on. The NETWORK LED should be off
unless communications are going across the network wire. If incorrect,
check to make sure that the control panel is getting the proper power
through the transformer. Refer to transformer troubleshooting section
for assistance.
4.
Try overriding the individual relay ON and OFF using the individual
relay override switch. If this does not work, verify that the status LEDs
are flashing on the relay cards and that the power and status LEDs are
functioning as expected on the RSC. If LEDs look correct, swap the

relay card as it is more than likely a failed relay.
5.
If the individual relay overrides work, then try to override using the
RSC. Verify that the load responds. If the load responds to the
individual relay override but not to the RSC, replace the RSC card.
6.
If the above steps check out OK, making sure that the RSC is in
AUTO, override the relay through the touch screen ON and OFF
command. You should hear the relay click open and closed and you
should see the relay LED light next to the relay on the relay cards. If
you are qualified,, you can use a voltmeter to be sure that the relay is
actually opening and closing. It is not recommended that you reference
conduit ground in this situation but actually take a voltage
measurement across the contacts of the relay. With the relay open, you
should read 120 or 277. With the relay closed, you should read close to
0 volts AC. Rarely, the relay is not actuating even though you may
hear a clicking sound. In this situation, the clicking sound may not be
as loud as other relays in the cabinet.
7.
If no click is heard and the LED next to the commanded relay does not
indicate a change of state, verify that the communications cable is
properly connected to the Relay Stack Controller. If this is connected,
contact technical support for further troubleshooting details.
If the manual command does work from the touch screen, double check
programming to verify the load is correctly programmed.
Troubleshooting Specifics:
1.
Sometimes a relay will stick slightly, causing lighting loads to not turn
off. This may happen on a rare basis when relays are new due to
manufacturing oils on the contacts of the relays or may happen as
relays age due to pitting on the contacts. Sometimes it is possible to
give the relay casing a slight tap to free the contacts and then actuate
the relay a few times to fix the problem. If a relay continues to exhibit
the sticking behavior, replace the relay card.
2.
With a very lightly loaded circuit, there is a protection device called a

snubber that may allow some leak through voltage to occur. On rare
occasion, this device may allow enough leak through to keep a
contactor coil or lighting load active or strobe the lights when the relay
is open. On the rare occasion that this occurs, it is usually with loads
less than two amps. If this is the suspected issue, technical support will
usually recommend removal of the orange snubber device from the
relay card which will alleviate this problem.
3.
The snubber device can also fake out a meter. If readings with a
meter are being referenced to earth ground from the line and load side
of the relay, a very lighting loaded circuit may still register some or all
of the full supplied voltage from the load side to ground when the relay
is open. Please note that this reading is voltage NOT CURRENT. The
more heavily loaded the circuit, the less likely this will occur. As a
precaution, always, Cooper Controls recommends following
recommended NEC circuit lock out practices when work is being done
on a circuit under relay control.
4.
A more accurate way of testing if a relay is open or closed is to take an

AC measurement across the relay contacts with the relay open then
closed. With the relay open, the reading should be 120 or 277VAC
(depended on supplied voltage) With the relay closed, the reading

should be close to 0VAC.
Please note that if you are replacing a relay card in a serial enclosure, the enclosure
must be powered down when the connection to the rail is made. Failure to power
down the enclosure may result in damage or failure of the card to initialize its
location properly.
Troubleshooting Logic Boards

Logic Board Status Indicators
If the Status LED is not blinking at the rate of about once per second and the panel is
behaving strangely, it is recommended that the panel be reset. In some situations,
technical support may recommend that the panel be cleared if the reset switch is not
successful in restoring function in the controller.
Status: Should be blinking on and off each second
Power: Should be lit
Network: Should be lit with communication going through
If the controller does not seem to be showing the above behavior or is acting
strangely, the following things can be tried.
Reset
Sometimes all it takes to get the control panel working again is a simple reset. The
reset gives the control panel a jump start and may quickly restore a panel to
functionality. Please contact technical support if you encounter a panel that needs to
be reset consistently.
Memory Clear
Always with a new installation being commissioned, one of the first steps that should
be done is a memory clear. This ensures that you are working from a clean slate. In
addition, it is sometimes used as a troubleshooting tool if the simple reset does not
bring a control panel back to operation, you can try clearing the control panel
memory. When you clear the memory the lights will go out unless you use the
override switch on the RSC of the CKT or the slide switch on the CK2 or CK4. Once
memory has been cleared, verify basic functionality you will need to reprogram the
control panel using the on-board keypad or the computer software.
ControlKeeper-T
1.
Reset the panel, using the Reset Button. Wait for the status LED to start
blinking again.
2.
Within one minute, touch all 4 corners of the display screen, one corner
after the other, being sure not to touch anywhere else on the screen. If
more than a minute goes by without all four corners being touched, or
if you touch anything other than the four corners, you will leave the
memory clear function.
3.
After you have touched the four corners within the one minute time
period, a warning message asking if you really want to clear the panel
will appear. Press YES if you want to clear the panel memory; press
NO if you do not want to clear the memory.
4.
Make sure that the display shows that it is reloading the panel.
ControlKeeper-2/ControlKeeper-4
Press and hold down the reset button for approximately 25 seconds until the Status
LED flickers. Release the reset button. Memory has been cleared.
ControlKeeper-4A
Rock your finger across the first and second reset buttons on the core from left to
right.
Power Cycle
If a reset and cold start do not work, you can make one more attempt at getting the
logic board to function by cycling power to the control panel. This is easily done
with the CK-T without interrupting the building lighting. You need to put the
Standard Override Card rocker switch in the ON position to maintain the lights and
then disconnect the power connection between the RSC and the control panel.
Simply disconnect, then reconnect the white plastic connector. The control panel
then goes through a power recovery reset and may begin working again. The relay
status indicators will show you what will happen to the lighting in the building when
you put the RSC switch into the AUTO position. Programming will not be lost with
this power cycle.
In a CK2 and CK4, cycling power will interrupt lighting. The easiest method of
achieving this is to power down the transformer control circuit. Programming will
not be lost with a power cycle.
If the logic board fails to respond to any of the above measures, please contact
technical support to obtain a replacement unit.
Troubleshooting Contact Closure Switches, Motion

Sensors and Photosensors:
Symptoms
Switches are not working to control lighting loads on and off.
Basic Troubleshooting Steps

1.
Verify that the panel has not been overridden all on or all off.
2.
Remove the switch wiring from the panel and try jumpering the switch
channel using a piece of wire.
If panel responds to jumpering the switch channel:

1.
The problem is in the switch or wiring to the switch. Check the switch
wiring visually for mis-wires and crosses.
2.
Disconnect switch from the end of wire and jumper with the switch
wiring. If this works, the switch needs replacement. If this does not
work:
3.
Disconnect both ends of the wire from both switch and panel. Verify
that conductors are not touching and perform a test with an ohm meter
to verify that there are no shorts between wires. If an open line reading
results, wire nut the wires together at one end. Verify at the other end
that you have continuity through the wires.
4.
If steps above fail to reveal a problem with wiring, please contact

technical support for further assistance in troubleshooting.
If panel does not responds to jumpering the switch channel:

1.
Verify that the switch PIC chip has a label identifying it at a V2.3 or
higher level. (CK-T only)
2.
Double-check and make certain that the local/remote jumpers are in the
local position. These enable the +24VDC supply to the switch inputs.
(CK-T only)
3.
With switch wiring off the board, double check that there is 24VDC on
the peripheral power connector between the +24VDC and DC Ground
Terminal.
4.
If there is no DC voltage present, double check the switch fuse. If hot,

there is a short on one of the switch inputs. This fuse is auto resettable.
Disconnect switch wiring terminal blocks and allow the fuse to cool to
reset. Ohm out switch wiring with it disconnected from the logic panel.
Check for shorts especially between any +24V and DC ground wires.
Check for continuity between conduit ground and any wire.
5.
If the jumper at the panel does not work and you have verified that
24VDC is present, double check the programming. The easiest way to
confirm a programming issue clear the board back to factory defaults
and verify functionality of the switch channels.
6.
If programming is verified to be the issue: check for improperly set up

switch types, prioritizations, masking, timers, improperly set up
remotes or broadcast not being selected as root causes of the potential
issues.
Lighted Switch Troubleshooting

Similar to the Lighted Switch Card on the LiteKeeper panels, lighted switches can
pose a challenge to troubleshoot on ControlKeeper T and 4A panels due to the way
that Cooper Controls chops the wave to drive the switch bulbs and LEDs. It is not
easy to take a voltage measurement and determine if the LSO channel is damaged.
In addition, the LSO is fairly sensitive. Care must be taken in the installation of
switches and troubleshooting to prevent damage to the chips that drive the LSO
channels.
Please keep in mind that not all pilot lit switches are created equal! If switches have
been obtained by a source other than Cooper Controls and the switches are not
functioning properly, they may not be approved for use with our system. The
Cooper Controls system provides a sink path for voltage, not a source. In addition,
LED switches may need to have a resistor in place to prevent the LED from burning
out. Please contact technical support if you are faced with working with Lighted
Switches that we have not provided.
With switches provided (or approved) by Cooper Controls, here are a few items for
troubleshooting.
Things to Check First
Verify the programming in the panel is correct to drive the LSO

channel. Check for feedback and for switch light type.
Check wiring at the switch and logic board to verify it is correct.
Check that the local remote jumpers are enabled.
With GE switches, verify at the switch that the filament connecting

the +24V and Pilot wire has not been crushed when the connector
has been applied.
Blown Bulbs or LED in the Switch:

If you suspect a switch with a blown bulb or LED, try replacing it first with a known
good switch. If the new switch exhibits similar behavior as the old switch, suspect a
wiring or blown LSO channel issue. If the new switch works fine, time to replace
the switch!
Blown LSO Channel:

Symptoms include some switches on the logic board work properly while one switch
operates but the pilot light does not light.
The first thing to try would be to place a known good switch in this location to verify
the issue. If the new switch also does not have its pilot light lit, it may be either
programming or a blown channel. To troubleshoot further:
ControlKeeper-T LSO Test Point

1.
Verify that the switch has been properly set up for pilot light functions
2.
Remove the switch wiring from the CK-T.
3.
Using a jumper wire, touch the LSO terminal pin to the Lighted Switch
Driver Test Point located in the middle of the switch wiring channels.
4.
Turn the feedback relay ON and OFF that has been associated with the
switch, the LSO Test 1 LED should also turn on and off. If the LED
fails to light, first verify that the programming is correct for the
feedback relay. If the programming is correct, the channel may not be
operating properly. Please contact technical support for further
assistance.
ControlKeeper-4A or ControlKeeper-T (optional test)

It is recommended in a ControlKeeper-T to use the LSO test point to test the driver.
If you wish to doublecheck this reading or you are working in a ControlKeeper-4A,
you may perform the following steps to diagnose a blown channel.
1.
Verify that the switch has been properly set up for pilot light functions
2.
Remove the switch wiring from the CK-T.
3.
Through programming, set the LSO output to RELAY type and set up a
relay to feedback.
4.
From the touch screen, turn ON the relay that is associated with the
switch.
5.
With a multimeter on DC voltage, place the positive meter probe on the

remote power terminal +24VDC. Place the negative meter probe on
the LSO channel. With the associated relay ON, you should read
24VDC. With the relay OFF you should read 0 VDC.
6.
If the reading remains at 0VDC regardless of relay state, check the

local remote jumpers are in the local position. If these are correct:
7.
After discharging your static potential by touching the enclosure,

carefully feel the 5801 chips on the board. If any of the chips are
warm, power down the panel and remove all switch wiring. The warm
chips will probably need to be replaced before functionality returns.
The most frequent causes of a blown LSO channel are.
Another switch that is shorting to the pilot light wire and 24V,
verify each wire to the pilot light wire to verify that there is an
open line between conductors.
A switch that internally shorts the +24V to the pilot when the
switch is pressed. Double check that the switch maintains an open
line reading between the on and off wires and the pilot light wires
when the button is pressed.
If no short is found, please place one switch at a time on the logic board to verify that
the problem does not reassert itself. It is also recommended that each switch be
toggled on and off during this process as it may be an internal switch short that
causes this issue.
Once the issue is resolved, remember to reset your pilot switch programming back to
the proper type, LED or Incandescent.
Overloading the Switch Channel:

There is a limit to the number of lighted switches that may be attached to any one
switch channel. Our recommendation is to not have more than 3 Incandescent
switches and 6 LED switches have the pilot wires landed on a single channel. If the
channels are overloaded, it can blow the lighted switch output resulting in the bulbs
not illuminating properly. In this instance, it is recommended that the switches be
rewired to more than one LSO channel. (Dummy switch programming may be
necessary in some cases). In extreme overloaded cases, the panel may actually
exhibit brown-out or powerhit like symptoms due to the current draw of overloaded
circuits.

size panel, with no more than 6 LEDs per LSO channel. You can
have no more than 20 LED lighted switches in a ControlKeeper4A panel with no more than 6 LEDs per LSO channel.

size panel, with no more than 3 bulbs per LSO channel. You can
have no more than 10 incandescent lighted switches in a
ControlKeeper-4A panel with no more than 3 bulbs per LSO
channel.
These figures may be affected by Motion sensor or photosensor usage on the same
logic panel.
Low-Voltage Motion Sensor Troubleshooting:

LED will not turn ON

Lights will not turn ON
For motion sensors that have an option for manual control from an
onboard or directly wired wall switch, verify that the sensor is not
set in Manual mode.
Double check motion wiring following the switch input

troubleshooting discussed earlier in this chapter.
Lights will not turn OFF
Disconnect ON leg of sensor from the logic panel. If lighting

remains on, check for a programming issue. Check that the switch
type is set for the correct switch type, for priorities, timers, or
masks.
Make certain the sensor is not overridden with the on board

override switches or jumpers.
If multiple sensors are installed and wired to the same wiring

channel, sensors will need to be checked individually as another
sensor may be the cause of the lighting being on.
Verify that the motion sensor is registering lack of motion by the

LED being off. If LED is continuously flashing, verify cause such
as HVAC air flow or sensitivity of the sensor to traffic outside of
its coverage area. Adjust sensitivity or relocate sensor as needed.
Contact Closure Photosensor Troubleshooting

Lights will not turn on:
Verify that the read out on the display shows that the photosensor
is OFF. If the photosensor is stating it is ON, check for a wiring or
panel issue.
If the photosensor is indicating it is off, manually override it

through the on board menu and verify that the lighting responds.
Check threshold settings if this operates properly.
Lights will not turn off:
Manually override the sensor OFF from the LED display. If this
does not operate, disconnect ON leg of sensor from the logic panel.
If lighting remains on, check for a programming issue. Check that
the switch type is set for the correct switch type, for priorities,
timers, or masks.
If the lighting turns off when the sensor is overridden, verify

threshold settings.
Digita Switch Troubleshooting

Recommended Equipment:
For ease of ruling out programming in a Digita switch troubleshooting job, it is
recommended that all commissioning agents carry a test Digita Switch setup with
them to a site that has Digita Switches. This is an invaluable tool if switches are not
working properly in the field as it allows you to verify that the logic board is
functioning properly first and then the site Digita gateway. Remember when
adjusting Digita switch wiring, POWER DOWN the Digita network to avoid damage
to logic board, transformer or switch units in event of a short on the Digita network.
An Ohm meter is also an essential tool when troubleshooting Digita Switches.
Resistance Test Prior to Powering Network

1.

power and communications cable connections to the Greengate
lighting control panel.
2.
With an ohm meter, at any Digita station, measure between the

CAN-L and CAN-H wires. The measurement should be close to
60 ohms for a properly terminated network. If not close to 60
ohms, check that the termination resistors are installed at the two
end locations.
3.

and GND wires. The measurement should be greater than 2
megohms.
4.

and CAN-H wire and the +V and CAN-L wire. Repeat this test
measuring between the GND and CAN-H and CAN-L wire. All
measurements should be greater than 2 megohms.
5.
If these measurements are correct, proceed with powering the

Digita network. If incorrect, troubleshoot wiring to determine
cause or contact technical support for further assistance.
Testing Digita Functionality and Troubleshooting
1.
Upon initial power up, verify that the Digita Gateway LEDs will
flash amber for a period of seconds and then flash rapidly red and
green and turn off.
2.
Verify that when the Digita Gateway LEDs are flashing during
initial power up, the Digita CAN RX and CAN TX LEDs on the
lighting controller flash. These LEDs are usually located next to

the Digita communications cable connector on the lighting
controller. (LiteKeeper 8 panels do not have these LEDs. Proceed
to the next step).
3.
Remove the face plate of the Digita 5 and Digita 1 switches by

pressing in on the tabs on one side and lifting. Verify that when a
button is pressed, the communications LED near the right side
flashes. If able, verify that the Digita Gateway LEDs and the
Lighting Controller CAN RX LED also flashes when the button is
pressed.
Digita 5 Switch with

Face Plate Removed
Communication LED
Digita 1 Switch
Face Plate Removed
Communication LED
4.
Once the lighting controller is programmed, verify that the lighting

loads respond on and off for the Digita stations. The Digita 5
button LEDs should also turn on and off.
5.
If any of the above items do not function as expected, please

follow the below troubleshooting steps.
Regardless of the issue being experienced, follow these steps in the order they appear
in below to rule out potential causes prior to contacting technical support.
Failure Condition
1. Power down and power up the Digita Red and Green LEDs do not 1. Verify that the communications cable
Switch Network. Ensure that the
is correctly plugged in properly from
turn off on the Gateway but
Gateway LEDs flash amber. If there
the Digita Gateway to the Lighting
continually flash.
are Digita-5 switches on the network Lighting Controller CAN
Controller Digita Port matching the
they should then flash red and green
labels on the gray phone cable to the
RX and TX LEDs do not
and turn off. Ensure that there is an
correct devices.
flash when the Gateway
answering flash on the CAN RX and
2. In a LiteKeeper-8 panel, verify that the
LEDs flash or the RX LED
COM port has been set up for Digita
TX LEDs on the lighting controller. .
may be dimly illuminated at
If there are only Digita-1 switches,
through menu option 8.
all times.
there will be no secondary red and
(LK8 and CK2 panels do not 3. In a ControlKeeper-2 panel, verify that
green flashes If the behavior is
the option select switch #1 is set to the
ON position.
LEDs. Proceed with
resolution steps for these two
controller types).
Failure Condition
2. Verify that the communication LED
Communications LED stays
on the switch flashes when a button is
ON continuously
pressed. If the behavior is normal,
proceed to the next step.
Communications LED is
completely OFF
Communications LED blinks

on and off repetitively
without button press. (Digita
1)

switch is pressed the LEDs flash on
the Digita Gateway. If the behavior
Communications LEDs do
not flash.

switch is pressed both the CAN RX
and TX LEDs illuminate on the
Lighting Controller. If the behavior
Only CAN RX illuminates

(LK8 and CK2 panels do not
LEDs. Proceed with
troubleshooting steps for this
step for these two controller
types).
Digita 5 switch issues only
ON or only OFF commands.
Digita 5 switch button LEDs
stay continuously off or are
continuously lit.

1. Verify that the CAN-L and CAN-H
wires have not been reversed in the
switch wiring.
2. Verify that there is no break in the
CAN-L or CAN-H wiring.
3. With power off to the Digita network,
verify that there are no shorts between
+24V or GND to the CAN-L or CANH wiring.
4. If a Digita 5 station is exhibiting this
behavior, verify that the address has
not been set to 0 0.
5. If a single switch is exhibiting this
behavior, replace with a known good
contact technical support
1. With a multimeter set to read DC
voltage, verify that +24VDC is present
between the V+ and GND terminals of
the Digita Station. If not, verify that
the panel peripheral power connector
has +24VDC and that the local remote
jumpers have been set properly on
larger controller types. Troubleshoot
wiring if power is at the panel but not
at the switch.
2. If 24VDC is present, at the switch,
replace with a known good switch. If
failure condition persists, contact
technical support.
1. Make certain that the clear Service
Switch lever in the lower left corner is
pushed in.
1. Troubleshoot for a break in the CAN-L
or CAN-H wiring.
1. Verify that the panel has been
programmed for the desired switch
action and that it is linked properly to
the relays it controls.
2. Verify that the switch address is correct
on both the Digita Station and the
Lighting Controller Programming.
3. For Digita 5 switches, verify that a
Feedback has been set for the switch.
The feedback can be either a relay that
the switch controls or for self feedback.
If the feedback field is blank, the
switch will not work properly.
technical support.
5. Verify that the control relay responds
to a manual relay command from the
lighting panel. If the behavior is
Failure Condition
The relay does not turn the
lighting load ON or OFF.
5. Immediately after the manual relay

command to the relay from the
lighting controller, test the switch
again. See steps to the right before
proceeding.
The relay responds to the

first press of the switch then
stops.
The relay still does not
respond.
6. Was the controller cleared of all

settings prior to initial programming?
7. Is the operating voltage of the Digita

Network correct?
Consistently intermittent
problems with switches and
feedback LEDs working as
expected.

1. Listen to hear that the relay clicks
when commanded. If it does not,
verify that the panel ALL ON or ALL
OFF override is not active. Verify
that the LED relay indicator on the
panel turns on and off with the
commands. If not in override mode
and the LED tracks properly, contact
technical support for further assistance
with troubleshooting the relay
2. If the relay clicks properly, verify that
there is voltage applied to the relay.
3. If voltage is present, trace out wiring
to verify the controlled load location.
technical support.
1. Verify what the priority command is
in control of the relay and current
input that issued the command by
reviewing the relays live status. If a
priority other than NONE is on the
screen, check all program settings are
correct.
technical support.
1. If no, please clear settings back to
factory default and reprogram a
switch for test
technical support.
Using a Multi-meter, verify voltage at
the last station on the network between
the +24VDC and GND terminals. If
voltage is less than 16VDC stations will
not work properly. Verify wiring and
distance of wire is per installation
instructions. It is recommended that this
test be repeated for each station on the
network wire.
Analog Photosensor Troubleshooting
Cooper Controls uses a 24V in, 0-10V output. The photosensor is

designed such that 1-10V are used for determining the ranging of the
photosensor. 1V is interpreted as 0 FC while 10V is the max of the
range. It is possible to take a reading between the Signal and Analog
Gnd on DC voltage to see what the approximate photosensor output is
reading. This can be translated into a FC reading to verify that the
reading on the touch screen is accurate.
It is also possible to do a quick check of programming by jumpering

between the Signal and GND wire. With the jumper there, the reading
will go to the minimum of the range. With the photosensor wiring
removed and the jumper removed, the reading will go to the maximum
of the range. This allows you to cross thresholds and verify that the
proper lighting responds.
Getting the photosensor to the correct setting may take some tweaking.
If lighting appears to be cycling, increase the distance between your
lower and upper thresholds or add some max and min timers to the
analog switching.
Photosensor placement is everything with a daylight harvesting

application! Before beginning with a photosensor application, look at
where the photosensor has been located. Look for the following
potential problems:
Uplights in the fixtures that shine directly on the photosensor
Obstructions around the photosensor that shield it from the

necessary light reading.
Improperly situated outdoor photosensors that are not pointing

north or are near fixtures that shine on the photosensor.
For indoor applications, the photosensor is located in the

section of lighting that it should control.
What the photosensor is looking at has a large influence on

what the foot candle readings will be. For instance, if the
photosensor is looking at a dark surface, the foot candle
readings will be lower than if it is looking at a lighter surface.
It is recommended that you have a light meter for use with analog sites to verify light
readings at the work surface are within acceptable norms. This becomes even more
critical for ControlKeeper-4A sites.
Notes on Troubleshooting Programming

Programming problems can be the cause of the majority of issues that may be
experienced in the field. Remember our priorities and mask discussion.
If programming issues are suspected as the root of the problem, review the
programming in the panel to verify that things are what they should be.
However, there are a few tips and tricks that are handy to know when
troubleshooting programming.
If a relay is not turning on or off by an input and the relay is linked to that
input, perform a view relay status command. This will tell you what
command is currently in effect and what priority level it may have. In
addition, it will tell you if there are any timers counting down. If a priority
is shown on the screen, or a timer is counting down, this may be why the
input is not operational.
If contact input switches are not working but there are no priorities
assigned, make certain first that the local remote jumpers are correct. If so,
double check that there are no masks assigned and that the switches are set
up for a type and a channel number to read from.
If relays are responding at odd times, review the logs and see what the log
data says is happening with the relay. This can be invaluable in finding the
cause of the problem
Network Troubleshooting
Cooper Controls asks installing contractors for a map of the network wiring before
arriving on site. It is easiest in commissioning to follow the way the network wiring
is run in order to commission the panels. This way, it is easy to find where a
problem starts when you are checking network communications with each successive
panel brought online. If you run into problems after the fact, the below steps can be
followed. When dealing with a large network, the tried and true divide and
conquer method may be used in which you continue to break the network in half
until you have isolated the issue to a small segment.
Single Panel not Communicating

If a single panel is not communicating on a network:
1.
Try swapping a known good panel in its place. If this functions,

contact technical support to obtain a replacement.
2.
If the replacement panel also fails, with the computer plugged into this
panel directly, try issuing a command to another panel on the network.
If the network LED flashes, see the section on no communications
beyond a point for further instruction.
3.
If the network LED does not flash, disconnect the network wiring from
the board and try the same command, if the LED flashes, check for
voltage on the network wire.
4.
If the LED does not flash and this is a CK-T panel, verify secondary
voltages from the RSC are correct. The board has a separate 5V supply
which may not be outputting the correct voltage to the panel.
Contact technical support if you are still having problems.
No Communications beyond a Point

With this type of problem, you can talk to one or more control panels but at one
point in the network, the communications stop. The problem remains the same - you
can always talk to the same control panels and communications always stop at the
same point.
No communications beyond the control panel that the computer is connected to:
1.
Check the control panel for: Network cable disconnected.
2.
Look for a break in the network wiring at a splice in a cable tray or

junction box. Also, check for a break in the wiring at a network
terminal block beyond the last point where you can communicate
successfully. If Belden 9841 has been used, disconnect the segment
that you can not communicate through from both connected panels.
Verify through a continuity test that there is continuity through the
cable. If using CAT5 cable in a CKT use a cable tester to verify that
the cable is sound.
3.
Test for transmitter or receiver failure: You can use a portable PC with
the software to check the transmitter on any control panel on the
network. Take the PC to the control panel in question, plug into the
serial port on the control panel, and use the COMS function to access
another control panel on the network. If the transmitter is working you
should see the green Network LED flash on the control panel you are
trying to talk to as well as on all the other control panels on the

network. If you do not see the green Network LED flash at all, the
control panel originating the communications has probably experienced
a transmitter failure and may need to be replaced. If the transmitter is
working, then the control panel you are trying to talk to will answer the
request for information. You will see pairs of flashes on its Network
LED, one for the request for information and one for the response. If
the receiver on the control panel you are using to access the network is
not working you will not see the pairs of flashes. You will see only the
flash of its network transmission. You will need to replace that control
panel.
4.
Using a Known-Good Control Panel: Another way to check for failure

of this critical control panel is to swap in another control panel that you
know will talk on the network and try communicating through it. This
will let you determine whether the problem is in the control panel or in
the network.
Intermittent Communications Problems

Maybe you could establish communications to this (or these) control panel(s) before,
or maybe you could never communicate. Maybe communications are intermittent sometimes OK and sometimes not.
Things to check:
What is the distance of the network and how many panels are on it.
The network may require a repeater.
Verify all network connections to terminal blocks are sound.

Sometimes if one wire is lifted from the network, the network can
still function intermittently.
Verify that there are no shorts to ground between network wires at

each panel location. Ground faults occur when there is a path to
ground between two different points on the Lighting Control
System, introducing a Ground Loop. If the network wire is
compromised to earth ground in two locations that have different
ground potential, it can create an electrical connection allowing
current to flow on the network cable between these locations. This
can, at a minimum, disrupt network communications. The current
can be large enough to damage network chips.
Checking for Continuity:

Disconnect network wiring from all panels. Verify through a continuity test that
there is continuity through the cable. If using CAT5 cable in a CKT use a cable
tester to verify that each segment of cable is sound.
Troubleshooting the Network Wire for Ground Issues

The purpose of this test is to help pinpoint the segment or segments of network wire
that are compromised. The idea is to test the network intact for these items and if
any test fails, to break the network in half and retest. If one half of the network fails,
that network is further broken in half until the problem is located. Ideally, the entire
network should be tested at every junction box and connection point for these tests as
Earth Ground reference may be slightly different at different locations.
Test 1: Measuring for AC & DC Voltage on the Network Wire
Making certain that all switch and network wires are connected to the network
terminal blocks, and panels are powered:.
AC or DC test
1.
Measure for volts between network plus and shield wire.
2.
Measure volts between network minus and shield wire.
3.
Measure volts between network plus and conduit (earth) ground.
4.
Measure volts between network minus and (earth) conduit ground.
5.
Measure volts between shield and conduit (earth) ground.
6.
Measure volts between network plus and network minus.
For AC measurement tests, you should have a reading of approximately 0VAC. It is

normal to have this fluctuate slightly. For sustained AC voltage readings, the source
of this should be determined before making other measurements. One question to
ask is if there is a mix of high voltage in with the network wiring which can
introduce this type of interference on the low voltage wires. This might be a
situation in which the shield wires are landed at one point in the network.
All measurements should get a reading of 0VDC. If a reading of 2 VDC or over is
present, there is likely a short to conduit ground at some point. If 5VDC is found,
this may be indicative of a blown network driver. If 24VDC is present, there is a
good chance that switch wiring is shorted to the network wire. Continue to break the
network until the source of this voltage is found before proceeding with the
resistance test below as DC voltage being present will skew readings.
Test 2: Network Wire Resistance Test

Making certain that all switch and network wires are connected to the network
terminal blocks, remove the terminal blocks from all logic panels on the network
or remove power from all logic panels on the network wire.
1.
Measure between network plus and shield.
2.
Measure between network minus and shield.
3.
Measure between network plus and conduit.
4.
Measure between network minus and conduit.
5.
Measure between shield and conduit.
All measurements should read open line (O.L) or greater than 1 MEG on all
measurements. If they do not, continue breaking the network into segments
performing this test again with each segment until the faulty segment or segments
is/are located. Ideally, the entire network should be tested at every junction box and
connection point for these tests as Earth Ground reference may be slightly different
at different locations.
Chapter 13 Additional Greengate

Products
TracKeeper
The TracKeeper current limiting panel for track lighting allows designers to easily
meet energy codes. Limiting the branch circuit volt-ampere rating with the
TracKeeper provides you with a fixed power consumption limit for your installation
as opposed to calculated values based on watts per linear foot of track. Designers can
now specify as many linear feet of track as desired without paying a penalty.
Additionally, the use of high efficiency luminaires will often yield a lower
watts/linear foot number than is specified in the code. Keep your track lighting
installation options open with the TracKeeper.
As a commissioning agent, there is no added work with a TracKeeper panel other
than to be aware of the fact that there may be another circuit breaker down line of a
relay if used in conjunction with a control system.
VisionSwitch User Manual
Additional Greengate Products 13-1
VisionSwitch
The VisionSwitch software works with Cooper Controls Greengate panels. Users
can define button displays that will send commands to the Greengate products.
These buttons act as virtual wall switches, allowing the user to turn on or off lighting
as needed.
With the implementation of the VisionSwitch Software, ON/OFF control strategies
are made readily accessible to office personnel without requiring detailed system
knowledge.
Through the button displays of VisionSwitch, the user can issue remote commands
onto the Greengate panel network. The Greengate systems lighting control
administrator must set up these remote commands to control the proper load groups.
These functions, combined with the power and flexibility of Greengate products,
provide a powerful tool for facility management.
The computer requirements of VisionSwitch are:
Windows 2000 and Windows XP
512 MB RAM
20GB Hard Drive
CD ROM
10/100MB Network Card
A mouse or mouse compatible pointing device
The software will require a TCP/IP connection through an Ethernet Interface Module
(EIM) to one lighting control panel in the Greengate controller network.
As the commissioning agent, if VisionSwitch has been purchased, you will be
responsible for installing VisionSwitch on all desired computers and setting up the
initial configuration screens that are desired.
Installing VisionSwitch
An INSTALL program is supplied on the VisionSwitch CD. This program ensures
that the VisionSwitch program and all its related files are properly loaded to a
suitable hard drive destination.
VisionSwitch may be installed by inserting the CD into the CD ROM drive. The CD
should start running the setup utility immediately. If it does not, click on the
VisionSwitch Setup.msi file on the CD ROM to start the process. All other
programs should be closed during the setup process.
Follow the Install Wizard through the setup process. When installation is complete,
the software wizard will provide a message indicating that the installation was
completed successfully.
It will be necessary to install the VisionSwitch Software on each PC that will be
using it.
If it becomes necessary to unistall the VisionSwitch program, use Window's Add
Remove Programs command to remove VisionSwitch.
Configuring the XML File

After installation, it will be necessary to set up the VisionSwitch screen for each
user. You will need the following information:
The IP address of the ethernet interface module (EIM) that is on the lighting
system. It is necessary to set the EIM up first according to the EIM operating
instructions. A network administrator may be necessary in this process.
The Remote Names being used for the lighting groups that each screen button
will control.
The User's preferences as to what the screen buttons will be labeled.
Any passwords that the administrator of the system would like to use to protect
the configuration files after they have been implemented.
1.
Open the VisionSwitch program from the Start, Program Files

VisionSwitch option.
2.
Click on the File Menu, Create File option.
3.
Browse to the location on the computer that you would like to

save the file.
4.
Type in the desired file name and click on the save button.
5.
The VisionSwitch screen will refresh with the name of the file you
have created.
6.
If all buttons on the screen are going to use the same

communications parameters, it is possible to set the
communications parameters for all buttons at once. Select the
Option Menu, Set Comms option and define the communications
method. (In most cases this will be Ethernet although you can also
use a direct connection if you are serially connected to the lighting
network.) If Ethernet is chosen, you will need to type in the IP
address and defined IP port of your Ethernet Interface Module. If
direct is chosen, you will need to choose the COM port number
being used to communicate to the system.
7.
Select the Edit Menu, Add Button option.
8.
Continue to select the Add Button option until you have the
number of buttons you would like on you configuration screen.
9.
With your mouse, right click on the first button you wish to
configure and select the Configure Button option from the
popup menu.
10. The Configuration Screen will appear.
11. Fill in a Button Name for the button (max approx 15 characters).
12. Enable the button by placing a checkmark in the checkbox. (if
this is not done, the button will appear on the users screen but they
will not be able to use it.)
13. Enter the remote name that the button will issue to the
Greengate Lighting System.
14. If you have not configured the communications method already
through the option menu, the communications method will be prefilled and grayed out. To select a communications method per
button, you can fill in each buttons communication screens if
necessary. Choose the communications method being used. (In
most cases this will be Ethernet although you can also use a direct
connection if you are serially connected to the lighting network.)
If Ethernet is chosen, you will need to type in the IP address and
defined IP port of your Ethernet Interface Module. If direct is
chosen, you will need to choose the COM port number being used
to communicate to the system.
15. Click on the Save button to save the changes.
16. If you wish the software to Log if the button configuration has
been changed, click on the Log settings option at the bottom of the
sceen and type in the email address that the system should send an
email to and the frequency of the emails.
17. Click on the save button to save the changes in the log settings
form and in the button configuration screen.
18. Once all the buttons are defined, you can close the VisionSwitch
software, or continue to create button screens by repeating this
process.
Adding Password Protection to Prevent Unauthorized

Changes
It is possible to password protect the configuration file so that users are unable to
access and change the button configuration. This allows them to use the buttons to
control the lighting loads but not change any of the configurations beneath. This
prevents them from disabling or breaking the software. The password is contained
in the screen XML file. Each XML button screen can have a different password if
there will be different people administering them.
To set a password
1.
Click on the Option Menu, Set Password option.
2.
Type in the desired password. (If this is not the first time you have
created a password, you will need to type in the original password
and then the new desired password).
3.
Press the Enter Key.
Once a password is set, you will need to enter Administrator mode by entering the
password before you can access the configuration screens again. You can access
administrator mode by right clicking a button and selecting Admin Mode, or through
the option menu.
Once Configuration is complete, you can exit Administrator Mode by clicking on the
Option Menu and selecting Exit Admin Mode.
Issuing Commands from the VisionSwitch Software

Once the VisionSwitch Software is opened and the button configuration file is
loaded, it is possible to use the VisionSwitch Software to issue on and off commands
to the controlled lighting.
To issue commands:
1.
Right click on the button you wish to trigger. A popup menu will
appear.
2.
Select to either send the ON or OFF command. The display will

refresh appropriately.
OR
1.
Left click on the button you wish to trigger. It will issue a

command.
2.
Click again to toggle commands. Each successive click of the

moutse will send the opposite command from the last command
sent, toggling the command between ON and OFF.
If the button was last used to issue an ON command, it will be outlined in green. An
OFF commanded button will display outlined in red. These outlines do not represent
the ON or OFF state of the controlled lighting but the last command sent from that
button.
If a communications error has occurred, the error will be displayed in the message
status bar at the bottom of the screen.
VisionTouch Software
General Information
VisionTouch Software was designed to work with your Lighting Control System,
allowing control of lighting loads from a virtual display of your site. VisionTouch
uses data files defined in the Enterprise Software to create this graphic interface
from which you can issue commands and monitor the lighting at the site.
When you install the VisionTouch Software at your facility, ON/OFF control
strategies are readily accessible to operational personnel without requiring that they
have detailed lighting control system knowledge. The user can issue Remote
Commands and Manual Commands onto the Lighting Control Network, and display
real-time status of control points, providing a powerful tool for facility management.
Hardware and Software Requirements

The hardware requirements of the VisionTouch software include the following:
o
An IBM compatible personal computer with a minimum of 96MB

of RAM
A monitor with 256 colors, SVGA, 17 minimum
CD ROM Drive
A communications connection to the lighting control system. Refer

to VisionTouch Communications Methods on page 13-9 for
information on accepted communications types.
The VisionTouch program requires access to the Enterprise Software data files.
This can be done either by being directly installed on the same computer as the
Enterprise software, or being able to access the database file through an Ethernet
connection with a shared network drive.
In addition to database access, the computer must have Microsoft .NET framework
installed on the computer. A copy of Microsoft .NET Framework installation is
included on the installation CD if needed. Most current operating systems already
have the .NET Framework installed. If the installation is started without the .NET
Framework installed, the installation program will alert you that it will be necessary
to install the framework prior to continuing.
The VisionTouch Software may be installed on computers with Windows 2000 and
Windows XP. Please be sure that your computer has had the latest service packs
installed for your operating system before you install the Software. If the service
packs are not up to date, the software installation may fail.
Windows 2000 and Windows XP users must have administrator access
on the local machine in order for the software to work properly. If your
IT department has questions regarding these settings, please have them contact
Technical Support.
VisionTouch Communications Methods

The VisionTouch Software sends control commands to remote relays in the lighting
control system. It also receives status information about relays and remote
commands. There are two means of communication between the VisionTouch
computer and the lighting system network. The Enterprise Software Help
Manual has more detailed information about these communications methods.
Direct Connection Communications Method

A Direct Connection is made from the computers serial port to the lighting control
system without using a modem or Ethernet interface. The computer may be directly
connected through its serial port to a Gateway or directly to a lighting panel COM
port. All lighting control panels on the network can be contacted through this single
point of entry.
Internet (TCP/IP) Connection Communications Method

TCP/IP Internet Connection is achieved by communicating to the lighting control
system through your computers Network Interface Card to an Ethernet Interface
Module (EIM). The EIM connects to the lighting control network through a
Gateway. The Ethernet Interface Module must be configured with a static IP address
to allow the software to communicate to the lighting system. Please check with your
IT administrator or refer to the Installation Instructions for the Ethernet Interface
Module for more in depth information of the EIM setup process.
As the commissioning agent of a VisionTouch job, it will be your job to design and
implement the graphics screen for the VisionTouch, install the software on the end
user PC, and train the user in the use of the system.
VisionTouch Installation
To begin the installation process, simply place the CD into your CD ROM drive.
Installation will start automatically. If the installation does not start immediately, use
Windows Explorer to find the VisionTouch IV Setup.msi file on the CD and
double click on the file name to activate it.
Follow the installation wizard through the installation process. If the .NET
Framework is not installed on your computer, the software will bring up a window
asking you to install this prior to installing the VisionTouch software. You may use
the provided copy of the .NET Framework on the VisionTouch CD or may download
the .NET Framework from the Microsoft web site.
It is recommended that the Program Directory not be changed from the default of
C:\Program Files\VisionTouchIV and that you leave the Program Group as
VisionTouch IV.
Basic Screen Design

Before you get started you will need:
A Keeper Enterprise Database with the desired remotes and relays
defined.
CAD drawings or .BMP files of the desired screen layouts. (If
scaling is necessary, .BMP files are recommended.)
Definition of what icons are to be created on the screens and what
relays or remotes they are to control.
Opening VisionTouch and Configuring a Session

1.
Once the VisionTouch program has been installed, start the software
from the icon in the Start Menu, Programs command. The
VisionTouch program file is found within the VisionTouchIV folder.
Starting VisionTouch
2.
The opening screen will appear. You can left click on the OK button or
wait a few seconds for the program itself to begin running.
3.
The program automatically opens into Edit Mode. If you have already
created a session, the program will open the last session you were in. If
not, you will start from a blank screen. The VisionTouch software will
always look to see if changes have been made to the Keeper Enterprise
Database it is attached to. If the software sees that the database has
been updated, it will request that an integrity check be run. Click on
the Yes button to run the integrity check and open the software. If the
integrity check is not run, changes in the Enterprise software database
will not be reflected in the VisionTouch software.
Integrity Check Request
4.
Access the File Menu by using the mouse to click on File on the
Menu Bar, or press the <Alt> key and the <F> key simultaneously for
the keyboard shortcut to the File Menu.
5.
From the menu, choose New.
File Menu New Option
6.
Fill in the New Session data entry screen.
New Session Data Entry Screen
Setting
Description
Name
The Session Name is used as an identifier for all the components

of a session. It should be a name that will be meaningful to the users
of the software so they can readily identify the area of your site that
the Session controls.
Icon
You may choose to have an Icon associated with this session,

although it is not necessary to do so. The icon will appear beside the
Session Name. You may use the icons provided or may browse the
internet for icon files external to VisionTouch.
Database
You must choose a Database for the session. Click on the browse
button to bring up a list of all databases available for use in the
VisionTouch. The available databases must have been created
through the Enterprise Software, and will have a name ending
with .mdb. Click on the database that will be used for this session.
The user cannot change the Network name that appears on the New
Session Data Entry Form. The VisionTouch Software
automatically determines the Network from the chosen Enterprise
Software database. If you are using a database that has multiple
networks, you will be presented with a drop-down list of available
networks from which to choose.
Network
Custom Comm. The Session communication parameters default to those for the
Parameters
chosen Database. You may, however, create custom parameters for
this session by clicking on the Custom Communications
Parameters choice box. Once you have chosen custom parameters,
you will be able to choose the type of communications you want for
this session. You must first choose the Type of communications and
then define the parameters for that type.
Display Live
Status
By default, VisionTouch is configured to automatically pole for

status of controlled points. It is possible to use VisionTouch in a
command only mode by un-checking the Display Live Status
checkbox.
Screen
When you create a new session, you define the default control screen
that is created for that session. The Name will be the title on the first
tab of your session screen. Select BackGround if you wish to choose
an AutoCAD, Bitmap, Windows Metafile (.wmf), Microsoft
Enhanced Metafile (.emf) drawing of your sites layout to add to the
session screen. (It is recommended that all background files be
placed in the C:\Program Files\VisionTouchIV\ Background Images
folder.) Leave the BackGround field blank to have a blank design
screen.
Screen with Background Defined
Adding Additional Session Screens

Each session window starts with a default screen tab and a New tab. Create
additional session screens by clicking on the "New" tab and filling in the Screen
Properties Data Form. Use the following steps to create a new screen:
1. Click on the File Menu.
2.
Choose Open and select the Session you would like to change.
Open Session
3.
The screens for that session will appear on the right side of the display.
Screen Tabs
4.
Click on the New Tab. A New Screen Data Entry Form will appear.
5.
Notice that the Session definition appears on the Screen form, but those
data fields are not available for modification.
Session Properties Form
6.
Enter the Screen Name. The name can be as long as 255 characters,
but it is best to limit the length to what can be contained in the name
text box.
7.
If you would like to use an AutoCAD, Bitmap, Windows Metafile

(.wmf), or Microsoft Enhanced Metafile (.emf) drawing as a
background for your screen, click on the browse button to select the
desired background file. If no background is desired, leave this field
blank. (It is recommended that all background files be placed in the
C:\Program Files\VisionTouchIV\ Background Images folder.)
8.
Click on the OK button to continue.
Adding Control Buttons to a Screen

Once you have created the Session and any Screens you want to use, you must add
the Control Buttons that make the session work for you. To add control buttons:
1. Open the session by clicking on the File Menu.

2.
Choose Open and select the Session you would like to change.
Open Session Command
3.
The screens for that session will appear on the right side of the display.
Click on the Screen Tab for the screen you wish to modify. The
screen will appear in the session window.
4.
Left click on the icon in the Icon Palette that you wish to use for a
command button
Palette Tabs
5.
Drag the Icon to the Screen and drop it where you would like to place
a command button.
Adding a Remote Command to a Control Button

Groups of relays can be controlled by a single remote command if remotes have been
defined in the Enterprise Software. Through programming in the Enterprise
Software, remote commands can have assigned timers and special priority
programming for customized interaction. It is easy to add a remote to a control
button after the icon for the button has been placed on the screen background.
Multiple remotes may be added to a single control button icon if desired. To add a
remote to a control button icon, perform the following steps.
1.
After the icon control button has been created, go to the Remote
Palette to choose the Remote Name you would like to associate with
the command button. Click on the + to expand the Remote Tree. You
will see the panels and the relays that are linked to the Remote.
Remote Names
Remote Expanded to show Panel and Relays
2.
Drag the Remote Name to the icon and drop it on the Icon. You have
now created a Control Button for your screen.
3.
Continue until you have dragged and dropped all the Remote Names
you would like to associate with this Control Button.
4.
To double-check the changes, right click on the Control Button to

see the Remote Names associated with the button.
Control Button Properties Window
5.
Click on the + to the left of the Remote Name to see the Relays that
are linked to the Remote Name.
Expanded Properties Window
Adding a Relay Manual Command to a Control Button

A control button can control individual relays without special programming assigned
to them in the Enterprise Software. This limits the functionality of the
commands as special timers and prioritizations will not be able to be used with
Manual Relay Commands. In addition, if other controls have been programmed with
timers and priorities through the Enterprise Software, issuing a manual relay
command may result in the canceling of these special settings that are set up on other
objects.
It is easy to add an individual relay to a control button after the icon for the button
has been placed on the screen background. Multiple relays may be added to a single
control button icon if desired. To add a relay to a control button icon, perform the
following steps.
1.
If the button is to issue a Manual Relay Command, Go to the Relays

Palette to choose the Panel that the relay is mounted in. Click on the
+ to expand the Relay Tree. You will see the relays that are defined
in this panel in the associated Enterprise Software Database.
Relay Names
2.
Drag the desired Relay Name to the icon and drop it on the Icon. You
have now created a Control Button for your screen.
3.
Continue until you have dragged and dropped all the Relay Names
you would like to associate with this Control Button. Multiple relays
may be dragged at one time by using the shift button and selecting
additional relays and then dragging the selected group to the icon.
4.
Double Check programming by using the right click on the Control

Button to see the Relay Names associated with the button. They will
be listed under their associated panel name.
Control Button Properties Box
Running VisionTouch
In order to command lighting on and off, VisionTouch must be put into Run Mode.
Run Mode is VisionTouchs real time command and status mode.
To enter Run Mode, go to the File menu and choose Run Mode. Note: If
VisionTouch was last in Run Mode when the software was closed, it will revert to
Run Mode upon the next time the software is opened.
Entering Run Mode
Control Buttons are Icons that have been placed on the Session Screen and
associated with Remotes and Relays. These buttons are used to send remote
commands, command individual relays, and monitor lighting load status.
Control Button Meters

Button Meters show the percent ON/OFF of remotes and relays associated with the
Control Button. They appear just to the right of the associated Control Button.
Meter
ON/ OFF Status of Associated Relays

None ON (ALL BARS GRAY)
25% ON (BOTTOM BAR GREEN)
50% ON (TWO BOTTOM BARS GREEN)
75%ON (THREE BOTTOM BARS GREEN)
All ON (ALL BARS GREEN)
Communications problem. Cannot update

button status. (ALL BARS YELLOW) Yellow
bars can mean that that panel is offline and not
responding OR there could be no relays or
remotes assigned to this icon.
Quick Status Report

Each icon can report a quick status of all attached lighting loads. To perform this
function, use the mouse to hover over the icon. The quick status report will appear
in a popup box describing the number of points ON and OFF.
Quick Status Report
For more information about the individual points, you can access the Status and
Command Menu.
Status and Command Menu

When you right click on the control button, a Status and Command Menu will pop
up. You can check the status of individual control points associated with the
Command Button, or you can send the associated Remote Command. You can also
send a Manual Command to associated relays.
Status and Command Menu
Status
If you click on Status, the following screen will appear, showing the status of each of
the associated relays.
Relay Status Screen
You can send a Manual Command to an individual relay from this window. If you
click on the relay row, a manual command window will appear. Choose the ON or
OFF command, and it will be sent to that relay.
Command
If you click on Command, you will be able to send the associated Remote
Commands or Manual Relay Commands to all relays with one click of the mouse.
1.
Click on the Command Button with the remote command you want to
issue.
2.
Click on Command and a popup menu will appear.
3.
Choose the ON or OFF command.
4.
All Remote Name commands associated with this Command Button

will be sent over the lighting control network to all relays or if
individual relays have been assigned to the control button, manual relay
commands will be issued to those relays.
Using Command Button Remotes
5.
The Command Button Meter and Quick Status Report will update
immediately.
Command Button Meter
Quick Status Report
Moving the Files to the Customer Machine

While backup and restore functions are being built into the VisionTouch program, as
these features are being developed, the recommended method of moving the files to
the customer machine are:
1.
Install Keeper Enterprise on the customer machine.
2.
Restore the Keeper Enterprise database. Make sure that the Keeper
Enterprise database is named exactly the same as on the original
machine and is located in the same directory.
3.
Install VisionTouch on the customers machine.
4.
On the original machine, navigate to the C:\Program

Files\VisionTouchIV directory.
5.
Copy the VisionTouchIV.mdb file and the directory that contains the
background screen files to a source drive that can be placed at the
customer machine.
6.
In the customer machine, paste the copied VisionTouchIV.mdb file and

the directory that contains the background screen files into the same
location as the originating PC.
7.
Open VisionTouch and verify that the file runs properly.
Items to Be Aware of: Database Integrity Check

The VisionTouch Software has a built in integrity check which compares data
between the VisionTouch session and the Keeper Enterprise Software database. If
something has changed in the Keeper Enterprise Software, the VisionTouch
Software will request that the integrity check be run.
Database Integrity Check Window
It is always recommended that the integrity check be run to allow the most up to date
information to be displayed in the VisionTouch software. If the integrity check is
not run, status bars may not indicate the correct status or incorrect relays for
controlled loads if there have been changes to linked relays in Enterprise.
The length of time that the integrity check takes depends on the size of the Enterprise
Software database and the number of sessions and screens. For smaller systems, the
check may take mere seconds. Larger systems may take slightly longer to process.
Database Integrity Check Change Indications

Once the integrity check is run, the updated information will be imported into the
VisionTouch Software.
If relay names have changed from what they were prior in the Keeper Enterprise
database, this information will be immediately updated in all icons that control these
relays without flagging the end user.
If remotes have changed, an icon will have a red shadow assigned to it to indicate
that attention is needed.
Integrity Check Icon Conflict Indicator
If your screen displays these red shadows, it is usually the result of a change to the
remote that is issued by that icon. This could be a result of the remote name
changing in the Keeper Enterprise Software or the remote being deleted from the
Keeper Enterprise database.
To review the cause of the conflict:
1.
Right click on the affected icon.
2.
Select Properties.
3.
In the properties window for the icon, the screen will display the controlled
relays and remotes. Review the items for an item or items in red text.
Integrity Conflict Item
4.
The items in red text are the items that are in conflict. Review the remotes
palette to see if the remote name has changed. If so, you can drag the new
remote name to the affected icon and delete the old one to end the conflict. If
the remote no longer exists, simply delete the entry from the icon. Once the
conflicting item has been rectified, the icon will no longer have the red shadow,
indicating that the item has been resolved.
Event Manager
The Event Manager software is an accessory to control network panels. Events can
be scheduled to run by adding them in the Calendar View graphic screen. This
software package is an ease of use, facilities management tool that is ideal for
stadiums, arenas, convention centers and schools.
The Event Manager software provides calendar view scheduling for sites that host a
variety of events with constantly changing lighting needs. This enables system users
to define a type of event and its specific lighting control needs and automatically
provide the desired lighting levels based on the start time of the event, end time or
under manual control. The Event Manager softwares Client/Server application setup
allows for multi-user access
Due to the complexity of the initial setup process, at this time, only Cooper Controls
commissioning personnel may commission an Event Manager system at this time.
Chapter 14 Commissioning
Documentation
General Expectations
As a commissioning representative of Cooper Controls, there are certain expectations
to meet. This includes adequately preparing, performing, and documenting your
commissionings.
Cooper Controls allows agents to purchase REP STARTUP as part of the lighting
control bill of material. This allows the customer to provide a single Purchase Order
for the entire bill of material.
IN ORDER TO RECEIVE THE COMMISSIONING DOLLARS FROM COOPER CONTROLS,
THE COMMISSIONING AGENT IS EXPECTED TO PROVIDE A COMPLETED KEEPER
ENTERPRISE PROGRAMMING DATABASE AND TRIP REPORT TO THE FIELD SERVICE
DEPARTMENT. PLEASE REFERENCE THE ORIGINAL ORDER # OR PO# SO THAT WE
CAN MATCH THIS TO THE APPROPRIATE JOB. UPON REVIEW OF THESE MATERIALS,
THE FIELD SERVICE DEPARTMENT WILL RELEASE ACCOUNTS PAYABLE TO PAY
OUT THE COMMISSIONING DOLLARS.
In this section, you will find examples of paperwork that Cooper Controls Field
Service department uses to gather information, commission sites, and document the
commissioning upon return to the office. We hope that this will be useful as you
begin performing the commissioning role.
Startup Documentation
Cooper Controls requires 21 days notice for commissioning to occur. Before startup can
be scheduled, Cooper requires filing of paperwork to ensure the site is ready for startup to
occur. During startup, Cooper keeps record of steps taken per panel to set up and
troubleshoot if necessary. After startup, the commissioning technician files a trip report
and other paperwork with the installation contractor and for future reference in the sites
startup file. Following are some examples of this paperwork.
Commissioning Documentation 14-1
Before Startup is scheduled
During Startup
A startup checklist can be handy when first starting out. It ensures that no step is
missed at any point during a panel checkout and provides a document that can be
referenced on file at a later time should it become necessary. Please see an outline
below of a startup checklist that may be used for the commissioning process. In
addition, it is recommended that a list of any trainees be kept on file with a
commissioning sign off.
After Startup Paperwork

Cooper Controls keeps on record a trip report of off sites commissioned. This is kept
with a copy of the customer database at the time of the commissioning and any other
supporting paperwork. Following is an example of a closing document provided to a
contractor for their close out paperwork.
Chapter 15 Appendix A:
Commissioning Expectations Summary

LiteKeeper & ControlKeeper Panel Hardware:



schedule times.
Verify all switch wiring to terminal connection points is free of


for programming for switch types and locations.

positioned.
If switches are pilot lit, with power down to the lighting controller,
verify that the jumper on the lighted switch card is set for the
correct pilot light type, i.e. LED or Incandescent.
Appendix A: Commissioning Expectations 15-1

out and programming is downloaded, verify all switch locations for
function.
If switches provided are pilot lit, verify that the pilot lights
function in addition to the switch functionality.
Motion Sensor Inputs


for programming.

positioned.


necessary.
Contact Closure Photosensor Inputs


for programming.

positioned.


Adjust sensitivity and deadband for sensor if necessary.
Digita Switch Inputs
Verify that wiring to terminal connection points is visually free of

Use ohm test described in this chapter to verify that resistance of

the CAN H and CAN L are correct for a terminated network and
that there are no shorts between the ground and +24V wires.
It may be necessary to address switch stations if not done by the

electrical contractor.

positioned.

out and programming is downloaded test each switch station to see
that it controls the correct loads and that the LEDs in the buttons
light properly.
Analog Photosensors


for programming.


Adjust thresholds by logging photosensor values over time, using a

foot-candle meter and choosing thresholds that lighting should be
turning on and off at or in the case of dimming, maintaining..
Telephone Interface Module
Verify that wiring to the TIM is correct.

out and programming is downloaded test each TIM Code to see
that it controls the correct loads. If phone line is not yet installed
for the TIM, this verification can be done using the Keeper
Enterprise Software to issue remote commands.
Network Commissioning
Visually verify all network wiring to terminal connection points is

free of shorts between terminals and polarity is observed.
Verify that the two distinct ends of the daisy chain network are
properly terminated with the network jumpers.
Verify that all panels are addressed properly.
During panel checkout, verify that Keeper Enterprise Software can

communicate back to panels that have already been brought on
line.
It may be necessary to completely check out the lighting system

prior to checking inputs for function as commands may be shared
between panels.
Gateway

properly connected.
Verify that the PC is properly connected using the provided 9 to 25

pin serial cable.
Verify that the gateway has a unique network address.
If at the end of the network, make certain that the network

Verify that the customers computer can talk to the network

using the Keeper Enterprise Software..
DMX Gateway

properly connected for both the PC network and the DMX 512
network.
Verify that the gateway has its address wheel set for the starting
DMX512 address.
If at the end of the network, make certain that the PCI network
Have the DMX system issue commands to the lighting control

system to verify control. Test each command to verify that the
proper lighting is turning on and off.
Automation Interface Module
Verify that the AIM is properly connected to either the PCI

network or directly to the COM port of a LiteKeeper panel.
Verify that there is power to the AIM and that the power switch is
ON.
After about 1 minute powered, verify that the archive valid LED
illuminates and the Module Status LEDs follow a chase pattern
around the outside of the status display. In a networked system,
you should see some intermittent network traffic on the network
LED.
Have the system integrator verify that they can issue commands to
the defined points per the mapping table provided.
Ethernet Interface Module:
Verify that unit is configured with the correct IP Address settings.
Verify that the unit is wired properly to the lighting controller.
Verify by a crossover cable connection that the EIM is able to talk

to the lighting controller using the Keeper Enterprise Software.
Verify that the customer computer is able to communicate properly

through the building LAN.
Modems
Verify wiring to panel is correct.
Verify that modem is operational by establishing a modem

connection or by dialing the unit to hear the modem tones..
Ideally, verify that the Keeper Enterprise Software can talk to

the system via the modem from the customers machine.
Repeaters
Verify wiring to network and panel power is correct.
Verify that the network talks through the repeater.

GreengateCommissioningTrainingManual1 18 2010 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GreengateCommissioningTrainingManual1 18 2010 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

System Commissioning Training

January 4th, 2010

Chapter 2 Greengate Motion Sensor Commissioning

Motion Sensors Stand Alone and Lighting Controller Interface..........................................2-1

Chapter 3 Understanding Basic Power Principles

Electrical Power Basics ..........................................................................................................3-1

Chapter 4 LiteKeeper Panel Hardware

What is involved with Commissioning LiteKeeper Panel Hardware?....................................4-1

System Commissioning Training

Table of Contents TOC-1

Chapter 5 LiteKeeper Panel Input Accessories

Virtual versus Hardware Input Programming Concept...........................................................5-1

Chapter 6 Keypad Programming Tutorial

Table of Contents TOC-2

System Commissioning Training

Programming a Dry Contact Closure Switch .........................................................6-13

Chapter 7 LiteKeeper Troubleshooting Procedures

System Commissioning Training

Table of Contents TOC-3

Resistance Test Prior to Powering Network ...........................................................7-13

Chapter 8 ControlKeeper Panel Hardware

What is involved with Commissioning ControlKeeper Panel Hardware? ..............................8-1

Chapter 9 Network Wiring and ControlKeeper Accessories

Networking Controllers ..........................................................................................................9-1

Table of Contents TOC-4

System Commissioning Training

What is involved with Commissioning an Ethernet Interface Module? .................9-25

Chapter 10 Touchscreen Programming

System Commissioning Training

Table of Contents TOC-5

Chapter 11 Keeper Enterprise Quick Start Guide

Table of Contents TOC-6

System Commissioning Training

Chapter 12 ControlKeeper Logic Panel Troubleshooting

Transformer Power ...............................................................................................................12-1

Chapter 13 Additional Greengate Products

Chapter 14 Commissioning Documentation

General Expectations ............................................................................................................14-1

Chapter 15 Appendix A: Commissioning Expectations

Commissioning Expectations Summary ...............................................................................15-1

System Commissioning Training

Table of Contents TOC-7

Telephone Interface Module...................................................................................15-3

Table of Contents TOC-8

System Commissioning Training

An in depth hardware review of the Greengate line including

An in depth programming overview of the on board keypad or

An in depth overview of the Keeper Enterprise Software usage.

Demonstration of the VisionTouch and VisionSwitch Software

Discussion of best practices in commissioning procedures and

System Commissioning Training

Setting up programming parameters based on information gathered

Providing descriptive notes fields in the Enterprise Software for

Pretesting any special applications to be implemented in the field

On site system checkout including:

Verifying panel functionality by cycling all relays, downloading

Verifying functionality of and making any adjustments necessary

Verifying network integrity by systematically checking network

Installing software on customers PC, verifying communications,

System Commissioning Training

Chapter 2 Greengate Motion

Motion Sensors Stand Alone and Lighting Controller Interface

Motion Sensor Terminology